HP Business Service Management
For the Windows, Linux operating systems
Software Version: 9.20
Modeling Guide
Document Release Date: August 2012
Software Release Date: August 2012
Modeling Guide
Legal Notices
Warranty
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements
accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
Restricted Rights Legend
Confidential computer software. Valid license from HP required for possession, use or copying.
Consistent with FAR 12.211 and 12.212, Commercial Computer Software, Computer Software
Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed to the U.S. Government
under vendor's standard commercial license.
Copyright Notice
© Copyright 2005 - 2012 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
Trademark Notices
Adobe™ is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Microsoft® and Windows® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
AMD and the AMD Arrow symbol are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
Google™ and Google Maps™ are trademarks of Google Inc.
Intel®, Itanium®, Pentium®, and Intel® Xeon® are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and
other countries.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
Page 2 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Acknowledgements
This product includes an interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library, which is
Copyright © 1995-2002 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler.
This product includes software developed by Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/licenses).
This product includes OpenLDAP code from OpenLDAP Foundation
(http://www.openldap.org/foundation/).
This product includes GNU code from Free Software Foundation, Inc. (http://www.fsf.org/).
This product includes JiBX code from Dennis M. Sosnoski.
This product includes the XPP3 XMLPull parser included in the distribution and used throughout
JiBX, from Extreme! Lab, Indiana University.
This product includes the Office Look and Feels License from Robert Futrell
(http://sourceforge.net/projects/officelnfs).
Page 3 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Documentation Updates
The title page of this document contains the following identifying information:
l
Software Version number, which indicates the software version.
l
Document Release Date, which changes each time the document is updated.
l
Software Release Date, which indicates the release date of this version of the software.
To check for recent updates or to verify that you are using the most recent edition of a document, go
to:
http://h20230.www2.hp.com/selfsolve/manuals
This site requires that you register for an HP Passport and sign in. To register for an HP Passport
ID, go to:
http://h20229.www2.hp.com/passport-registration.html
Or click the New users - please register link on the HP Passport login page.
You will also receive updated or new editions if you subscribe to the appropriate product support
service. Contact your HP sales representative for details.
PDF Version of Online Help
This document is a PDF version of the online help. This PDF file is provided so you can easily print
multiple topics from the help information or read the online help in PDF format.
This document was last updated: Thursday, July 26, 2012
Page 4 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Support
Visit the HP Software Support Online web site at:
http://www.hp.com/go/hpsoftwaresupport
This web site provides contact information and details about the products, services, and support
that HP Software offers.
HP Software online support provides customer self-solve capabilities. It provides a fast and
efficient way to access interactive technical support tools needed to manage your business. As a
valued support customer, you can benefit by using the support web site to:
l
Search for knowledge documents of interest
l
Submit and track support cases and enhancement requests
l
Download software patches
l
Manage support contracts
l
Look up HP support contacts
l
Review information about available services
l
Enter into discussions with other software customers
l
Research and register for software training
Most of the support areas require that you register as an HP Passport user and sign in. Many also
require a support contract. To register for an HP Passport ID, go to:
http://h20229.www2.hp.com/passport-registration.html
To find more information about access levels, go to:
http://h20230.www2.hp.com/new_access_levels.jsp
Page 5 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Contents
Modeling Guide
1
Contents
6
Introduction
16
Topology Query Language
Page 6 of 446
17
Topology Query Language (TQL) Overview
18
Creating TQL Queries in the RTSM Managers
19
Viewing TQL Query Results
20
Compound Relationship
22
Join Relationship
23
Query Node Conditions
24
Complex Type Condition
26
Subgraph Definition
28
The ALLOW_VOLATILITY Qualifier
29
Define a TQL Query
30
Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL Query
32
Define a Compound Relationship – Scenario
33
Define a Join Relationship – Scenario
36
Define a Complex Type Condition - Scenario
37
Create a Subgraph Definition – Scenario
38
Shortcut Menu Options
40
Attribute Operator Definitions
44
TQL Logs
46
Topology Query Language User Interface
51
Add/Edit Calculated Relationship Dialog Box
51
Add/Edit Compound Relationship Dialog Box
53
Add/Edit Join Relationship Dialog Box
56
Add/Edit Relationship Dialog Box
59
Add Related Query Node Wizard
61
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Contents
Related Query Node Type Page
62
Relationship Type Page
63
Related Query Node Properties Page
64
Related Query Node Instances Page
66
Add Triplet Dialog Box
67
Conditions Preview Dialog Box
69
Element Instances Dialog Box
70
Element Layout Preview Dialog Box
73
Filter CI Instances Dialog Box
73
Join Relationship Condition Dialog Box
74
Layout Settings Dialog Box
75
Query Node/Relationship Properties Dialog Box
76
Refine Query Node Type Dialog Box
89
Select Relationship Type Dialog Box
90
Subgraph Condition Definition Dialog Box
90
Subgraph Definition Dialog Box
92
User Preferences Dialog Box
94
Troubleshooting and Limitations
96
Impact Modeling
100
Impact Modeling Overview
101
Impact Layer
102
Impact Rules
103
Propagation Reversal
104
Calculated Relationship Types
105
Creating Views Based on the Impact Model
106
Create a URL for a Direct Link
Generate a Direct Link – Overview
108
Generate a Direct Link – Scenario
109
Create a Direct Link to a Template with Parameter Values
110
Encrypt the Password of a Direct Link Using the JMX Console
111
Generate a Direct Link User Interface
112
Generate Direct Link Dialog Box
Page 7 of 446
107
112
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Contents
Generate Direct Link Wizard
112
Select Command Page
113
Direct Link Parameters – CI Selector Page
115
Direct Link Parameters – CI Type Selector Page
116
Direct Link Parameters – CII Grid Page
117
Direct Link Parameters – Impact Map Page
117
Direct Link Parameters – Model Editor
118
Direct Link Parameters – Query Editor
119
Direct Link Parameters – Related CIs Page
120
Direct Link Parameters – Report Viewer Page
120
Direct Link Parameters – Report Viewer – Saved Report Page
121
Direct Link Parameters – Show CI Properties Page
121
Direct Link Parameters – Show View Topology Page
122
Direct Link Parameters – View Editor Page
122
Direct Link Parameters – Views Selector Page
123
Direct Link Parameters – Show View Page
123
Direct Link Parameters – Start in Mode Page
124
Finish Page
125
Embedding RTSM Applets Using Direct Links
126
Using the Direct Link Functionality to Embed RTSM Applets
127
RTSM Applet Tag – Overview
128
Direct Link Operation Flow
129
Working with the CI Selector
133
CI Selector Overview
134
Display a View in Browse Mode
135
Search for CIs in Search Mode
136
Modify CI Selector Display Options
137
CI Selector User Interface
138
Page 8 of 446
CI Conditional Search Dialog Box
138
CI Selector
139
Organize Searches Dialog Box
147
Running Software Search Dialog Box
148
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Contents
Save Search Criteria Dialog Box
148
Troubleshooting and Limitations
150
Working with Topology Map
151
Topology Map Overview
152
Handling Large Views
153
Topology Map User Interface
154
Export Map to Image Dialog Box
154
Layout Properties Dialog Box
155
Main Menu
168
Print Dialog Box
169
Print Preview Dialog Box
170
Print Setup Dialog Box
170
Toolbar Options
171
Topology Map Sidebar
178
Modeling
180
Best Practices for Modeling
181
Using Modeling Studio
182
Models and Perspectives
183
Building Models
184
Model Dependencies on Other CIs in the RTSM
188
Modeling an Application with Running Software
189
Creating Views Using the Modeling Studio
190
IT Universe Manager
Page 9 of 446
191
IT Universe Manager Overview
192
Working with Views in IT Universe Manager
193
View Tree Structure
195
Working with CIs
196
Working with Relationships
199
Create CIs and Relationships in the RTSM
204
View Related CIs
205
Check Status of Application Discovery (Rediscover a View)
206
Retrieve Impact Analysis Results – Scenario
208
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Contents
Take a Snapshot of a View
213
Print and Save a Topology Map to File
214
IT Universe Manager User Interface
215
Add CIs to Model Dialog Box
215
Add CIs to View Dialog Box
216
Change Timeframe Dialog Box
216
CI/Relationship History Dialog Box
217
Configuration Item Properties Dialog Box
219
Get Related CIs From CMDB Dialog Box
223
Insert Relationship Dialog Box
224
Relationship Page
225
IT Universe Manager Page
227
New CI/New Related CI Dialog Box
236
Relationship Dialog Box
238
Run Impact Analysis Dialog Box
240
Save Snapshot Dialog Box
242
Show Discovery Status and Changes Dialog Box
242
Show Impact Pane
243
Modeling Studio
246
Modeling Studio Overview
247
View Formats
248
Building a Business View
249
Templates and Perspectives
251
Predefined Folders and Views
252
Creating Template Based Views
254
Business CI Models
255
Building a Perspective Based View
257
Revealed CIs and Watchpoints
261
Create a Pattern View
265
Create a Template
266
Create a Perspective
267
Create a Template Based View
268
Page 10 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Contents
Create Multiple Template Based Views
269
Define Report Settings
270
Build an Instance-based Model
271
Build a New Pattern-based Model
272
Build a Perspective-Based View Based on a Model
273
Build a Perspective-Based View Based on a Collection of CIs
274
Build a Business CI Model – Scenario
275
Modeling Studio User Interface
277
Page 11 of 446
Add/Edit Function Dialog Box
278
Change Query Node/Relationship Type Dialog Box
279
Choose Operation for Selected Items Dialog Box
280
Conditions of Related CIs Dialog Box
281
Create/Edit/Save Reveal Path Dialog Box
282
Creating New View Dialog Box
283
Cycle Definition Dialog Box
283
Hidden CIs Dialog Box
284
Hierarchy Rules Dialog Box
285
Left Pane
285
Manage CI Watchpoints Dialog Box
290
Model Editor
290
Modeling Studio Page
296
Models Containing Selected CI Dialog Box
298
New Model Dialog Box
298
New Pattern View/Template/Perspective Dialog Box
299
New Watchpoint Dialog Box
300
Open Reveal Path Dialog Box
300
Pattern Based Model Wizard
301
Select CI Type Page
302
Query Selection Page
302
Pattern View Editor
303
Perspective-based View Editor
307
Query Node Grouping Dialog Box
312
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Contents
Query/View Definition Properties Dialog Box
312
Reveal CIs Dialog Box
313
Save Query Dialog Box
315
Save View/Template/Perspective Dialog Box
316
Select Integration Points Dialog Box
317
Sort Column Content Dialog Box
317
Template-based View Wizard
318
Select Template Page
319
Import Parameter Values Page
320
Enter Parameters Page
320
Select Location for Views Page
321
Summary Page
322
Save Views Page
322
Template Parameter Values Dialog Box
323
TQL Query Editor
323
Views Containing Selected CI Dialog Box
327
Watchpoints Updates Dialog Box
328
<Query/Template/Perspective Name> Dependencies Dialog Box
329
Reports
330
Topology Reports Overview
331
Compare CIs
332
Compare Snapshots
333
Cron Expressions
334
Reports User Interface
335
Page 12 of 446
Asset Report
335
Compare CIs Report
336
Compare Snapshots Report
340
Impact Analysis Report
345
Job List Dialog Box
346
Schedule Snapshot Dialog Box
348
Topology Report
349
Toolbar Options
350
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Contents
Impact Analysis Manager
354
Impact Analysis Manager Overview
355
Define an Impact Rule – Workflow
356
Impact Analysis Manager User Interface
359
Details Dialog Box
359
Impact Analysis Manager Page
359
Impacted Query Nodes Dialog Box
366
Impact Rules Definition Dialog Box
366
New Impact Rule/Impact Rule Properties/Save As Impact Rule Wizard
367
Impact Rule General Attributes Page
368
Impact Rule Base Query Page
369
Impact Rule Groups Page
370
CI Type Manager
371
CI Types Overview
372
CI Type Attributes
373
CI Type Relationships
375
Deprecated CI Types
376
System Type Manager
377
Create a CI Type
378
Create a Relationship Type
379
Create a Calculated Relationship Type
380
Create List and Enumeration Definitions
381
Create an Enumeration Definition – Workflow
382
View Descriptions for CI Types and Relationships
384
CI Type Manager User Interface
385
Add/Edit Attribute Dialog Box
385
Add/Remove Relationship Dialog Box
388
CI Type Manager
388
Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship Wizard
391
Details Page
392
Attributes Page
393
Qualifiers Page
396
Page 13 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Contents
Triplets Page
397
Icon Page
398
Attached Menu Page
399
Default Label Page
401
Matching Rules Page
402
Create/Update List/Enumeration Definition Dialog Box
403
Export Selected CITs to Excel Dialog Box
406
Export Selected CITs to PDF Dialog Box
407
System Type Manager Dialog Box
408
Enrichment Manager
409
Enrichment Manager – Overview
410
Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario
412
Add Enrichment Query Nodes and Relationships to an Enrichment TQL Query
416
Enrichment Manager User Interface
417
Enrichment Manager Page
417
New Enrichment Rule/Enrichment Rule Properties/Save As Enrichment Rule
Wizard
424
Rule General Attributes Page
424
Rule Base Query Page
425
Query Node/Relationship Definition Dialog Box
427
Query Node Definition - Advanced Attribute Dialog Box
428
RTSM Data Model
RTSM Data Model Introduction
430
431
Universal Data Model (UDM) Overview
432
Exporting the RTSM Data Model to a UML Tool
433
Export the Class Model
434
Export to UML Tool – Overview
435
Convert XML of Selected Part of Class Model
436
Export to UML Tool User Interface
437
Page 14 of 446
Export Class Model to UML Wizard
437
Select Valid Links
437
Export Selected Items
438
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Contents
Tool Plug-in Input
439
Reference Information
441
Working with Tables
442
Columns User Interface
Select Columns Dialog Box
443
Sort Column Content Dialog Box
443
Regular Expression Examples
Examples of Regular Expressions
Page 15 of 446
443
445
446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Part 1
Introduction
Page 16 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 1
Topology Query Language
This chapter includes:
Topology Query Language (TQL) Overview
18
Creating TQL Queries in the RTSM Managers
19
Viewing TQL Query Results
20
Compound Relationship
22
Join Relationship
23
Query Node Conditions
24
Complex Type Condition
26
Subgraph Definition
28
The ALLOW_VOLATILITY Qualifier
29
Define a TQL Query
30
Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL Query
32
Define a Compound Relationship – Scenario
33
Define a Join Relationship – Scenario
36
Define a Complex Type Condition - Scenario
37
Create a Subgraph Definition – Scenario
38
Shortcut Menu Options
40
Attribute Operator Definitions
44
TQL Logs
46
Topology Query Language User Interface
51
Troubleshooting and Limitations
96
Page 17 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Topology Query Language (TQL) Overview
Topology Query Language (TQL) is a language and tool for discovering, organizing, and managing
IT infrastructure data. It enables you to create TQL queries that retrieve business service data from
the RTSM. TQL queries also help you display the data in a visual representation that facilitates data
monitoring and managing.
This section includes the following topics:
Topology Query Language
TQL extends the standard SQL language by adding two important capabilities:
l
TQL enables you to draw conceptual relationships between configuration items (CIs), which
represent their actual interdependencies. Using predefined operators, the different types of
interconnections (relationships) that exist between CIs can be established, and consequently
the infrastructure design and performance are more accurately represented. This representation
serves as a basis and a model for the discovery, arrangement, query, and management of
complex infrastructures.
l
TQL includes a graphical aspect, consisting of visual symbols and syntax, that represents the
resources and their interconnections. This visualization of an IT infrastructure simplifies the
understanding, monitoring, and managing of the IT business operations.
The Roles of TQL
TQL plays several roles:
l
Builds a business service model that defines and delineates the interconnection between IT
assets that function together as business services. The business service model guides the
discovery and identification of these business services, from the ever-increasing number and
complexity of infrastructure resources. After the resources that comprise the business services
are discovered, the business service model structures the way they are organized and managed
in the RTSM.
l
Constantly searches the RTSM for changes that occur in the state of managed resources.
When such changes are detected, the relevant subsystems are informed and updated.
l
Creates queries that retrieve business service data from the RTSM, and displays the data in a
visual representation that facilitates data monitoring and managing.
Page 18 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Creating TQL Queries in the RTSM Managers
The following managers enable you to create TQL queries that retrieve specific data from the RTSM
and to display that data:
l
Impact Analysis Manager. An Impact rule simulates how infrastructure changes can impact
your system and enables you to determine the true origin of a problem and its business impact.
During rule creation, you define the base TQL query type, which can be a new query or an
existing query. For details, see "Impact Analysis Manager" on page 354.
l
Enrichment Manager. An Enrichment rule enables enlarging the RTSM, deleting CI instances
from the RTSM, or updating the attributes of a CI that already exists in the RTSM. During rule
creation, you define the base TQL query type, which can be a new query or an existing query.
For details, see "Enrichment Manager" on page 409.
l
Modeling Studio. You can build a new TQL query using the TQL Query Editor or you can build a
new query while defining a new view, template, or perspective using the Pattern View Editor.
You can also define the topology report settings for any view in the Pattern View Editor. For
details, see "Modeling Studio" on page 246.
Page 19 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Viewing TQL Query Results
You view the resulting data in a visual representation in IT Universe Manager. The queries define
the structure of the resulting topology map. The view displays only those CIs and relationships that
meet the query definition. You can also view the results of a query by clicking the Preview
button in the toolbar to open a preview display identical to IT Universe Manager. For more details
about IT Universe Manager, see "IT Universe Manager" on page 191.
TQL Query Types and Priorities
When you define a TQL query, you define the type of the TQL query in the Type field of the Query
Definition Properties dialog box. The following query types are available:
l
View. TQL queries used as the basis for pattern views.
l
Integration. TQL queries used for integrations.
l
Discovery. TQL queries used as the basis for DFM patterns.
l
Template. TQL queries used as the basis for templates.
l
Perspective. TQL queries used as the basis for perspectives.
l
Impact Analysis. TQL queries used as the basis for Impact rules. This is the default type for
queries created in Impact Analysis Manager.
l
Enrichment. TQL queries used as the basis for Enrichment rules. This is the default type for
queries created in Enrichment Manager.
You cannot change the type of an existing TQL query if it has dependencies (such as views,
templates, and so on).
If a query imported though an integration is not assigned a type, it is considered a hidden query and
does not appear in the query list in the Modeling Studio. To display hidden queries in the query list,
change the setting for hidden queries under General in the User Preferences dialog box. For details,
see "User Preferences Dialog Box" on page 94.
You can also set the priority level of a TQL query, which determines how often the query is rerun
automatically to include updated information. The following priorities are available:
l
Low. The TQL query is refreshed every 2 minutes.
l
Medium. The TQL query is refreshed every 30 seconds.
l
High. The TQL query is refreshed every 10 seconds.
l
Express. The TQL query is refreshed continuously.
l
Not Active. The TQL query is inactive.
Note: The above refresh times are average values.
If you set the priority of a TQL query to Not Active, the query becomes inactive and is not run
automatically, however it can be used for manually building a view.
Page 20 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Base Queries
You can select a base query for a TQL query in the Query Definition Properties dialog box. In this
case, the base query is first applied to the entire IT Universe, generating results. The new query is
then applied to that subset of the universe, further refining the results. Selecting a base query
enables you to filter the query results more finely and generate results more quickly in certain
cases.
The base query you select must be both active and persistent for your new query to be active. If the
base query is not active and persistent, the new query is automatically assigned a priority of Not
Active.
Page 21 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Compound Relationship
A compound relationship represents a path in the topological graph. You use a compound
relationship to define the allowed steps in the path between the source and the target CIs.
Each row represents one of the allowed steps in the path leading from the source CI to the target CI
in the topology map.
For an example of a compound definition, see "Define a Compound Relationship – Scenario" on
page 33. For details on defining compound relationships, see "Add/Edit Compound Relationship
Dialog Box" on page 53.
Page 22 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Join Relationship
A join relationship is a logical connection that represents the relationship between two CIs (and
which appears only in the topology map containing the TQL query results). It does not exist in the
RTSM. A join relationship is created by defining an attribute for each query node, whose values are
used for comparison.
The TQL results retrieve all CIs whose attribute values meet the conditions defined in the join
definition.
For example, you can create a join definition that links all node CIs connected to IP Address CIs
whose Created By attribute values are equal (see the example below).
Each join definition represents one condition defined for the join relationship.
Note: You can define multiple conditions.
For an example of a join definition, see "Define a Join Relationship – Scenario" on page 36. For
details on defining join relationships, see "Add/Edit Join Relationship Dialog Box" on page 56.
Page 23 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Query Node Conditions
You can add conditions to the query nodes and relationships of a TQL query in the Query Node
Properties dialog box. The conditions filter the query results by retrieving only CIs and relationships
that match the conditions defined in the query. There are several types of conditions you can define:
l
Attributes. Conditions based on CI property values.
l
Cardinality. Conditions based on the number of related query nodes.
l
Qualifiers. Conditions based on CI type qualifiers.
l
Element type. Conditions based on CI subtypes. See below for details.
l
Identity. Conditions based on CI element IDs.
Each one has a separate tab in the dialog box. For details, see "Query Node/Relationship
Properties Dialog Box" on page 76.
Element Type Conditions
The Element type conditions enable you to specify the subtypes of a query node that should appear
in the query results. There are two options for defining this condition:
l
Simple Type Condition. The simple type condition enables you to either include all subtypes
of the selected query node in the query results, or to exclude all of them.
l
Complex Type Condition. The complex type condition enables you to select the specific
subtypes of the query node to be included in the query results. For details, see "Complex Type
Condition" on page 26.
Element Layout
You can specify the attributes to include in the query results for each query node or relationship in a
TQL query in the Element Layout tab of the Query Node Properties dialog box. Select the Select
attributes for layout radio button and then select a CIT or relationship in the CIT pane. If you
select Specific Attributes for the Attributes condition, only the attributes you move to the Specific
Attributes pane are included in the query results for that element. If you select All for the Attributes
condition, all of the available attributes are included in the query results for that element. In this
case, you can select Exclude specific attributes and move selected attributes to the Excluded
Attributes pane.
There is also an option to select attributes by qualifiers. If you select qualifiers in the Attributes
with the following qualifiers field, all attributes that have the selected qualifiers are included in
the query results for that element, in addition to the attributes selected in the Specific Attributes
pane. In this case too, you can exclude selected attributes by moving them to the Excluded
Attributes pane.
By default, the attribute settings you select for a CIT are automatically applied to its descendant
CITs in the query results, however the settings are not visible in the Element Layout tab of the
dialog box. For example, if you select specific attributes to be included for the Database CIT, the
same attributes are included for the Oracle CIT (a child CIT of Database), but if you select Oracle
in the CIT pane, the Attributes condition displayed is None (the default condition).
You can then make attributes condition selection for the child CITs themselves. If the parent CIT
has All selected as the attributes condition, then the Specific Attributes option is disabled for the
Page 24 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
child CITs. If the parent CIT has Specific Attributes selected as the attributes condition, you can
select All or Specific Attributes for the child CIT. If you select Specific Attributes, you can add
more attributes by moving them to the Specific Attributes pane. These are included in the query
results along with the attributes inherited from the parent CIT's setting. Similarly, you can select
attributes from the parent CIT's setting to exclude for the child CIT, by moving them to the
Excluded Attributes pane. If the parent CIT has qualifiers selected to determine the attribute
selection, these are also inherited by the child CIT. If you select additional qualifiers to filter the
child CIT's attribute selection, the combined set of selected qualifiers is used to filter the attribute
selection for the child CIT.
When you change the type of a query node or relationship using the Change Query
Node/Relationship Type dialog box, the attributes selection for that element is lost.
Note: The layout selection is not visible in the query results in the user interface. To view the
query results with the selected attributes, access the JMX console, select TQL services, and
invoke the calculateTqlAdHoc method.
Page 25 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Complex Type Condition
The complex type condition enables you to select the specific subtypes of the query node to be
included in the query results. A CI type tree appears with all the subtypes of the selected query
node. By default, instances of all the displayed subtypes are included in the query results. For each
subtype, you can select Exclude <subtype> from the query which excludes instances of that
subtype from the query results. If you select the Apply this condition recursively on all
subtypes check box, instances of the subtype and all of its descendants are excluded from the
results.
If you select a subtype from the tree and you select Include <subtype> in the query without
selecting the Apply this condition recursively on all subtypes check box, only instances of the
specified subtype are included, but not instances of its descendants.
For both the Include and Exclude options, there is a further selection in the Conditions pane. If you
select By CI type, all instances of the specified subtype are then included or excluded from the
results. If you select By qualifiers and then select qualifiers from the popup list, only the instances
of the selected subtype with the selected qualifiers are included or excluded from the query results.
For example, suppose CIT_B and CIT_C are subtypes of CIT_A, and CIT_A and CIT_B have
qualifier Q1. The following are some of the possible configurations of options:
l
Select Exclude for CIT_A and all of its descendants. No CITs are included.
l
Select Exclude for CIT_A without its descendants. Only CIT_B and CIT_C are included.
l
Select Exclude for CIT_A and all of its descendants with qualifier Q1. Only CIT_C is
included.
Note:
n
It is possible to apply the Exclude option to the root of the tree (that is, the CI type of the
original query node). If the Apply this condition recursively on all subtypes check box
is selected, no CIs are included in the results. If the check box is not selected, instances
of the root CI type are excluded, but instances of its descendants are included.
n
The Element Type Conditions feature is only available in the Modeling Studio. If you define
a complex type condition in the Modeling Studio, and then modify the TQL query in
Enrichment Manager or Impact Analysis Manager, the condition may be overwritten and
will no longer be in effect. If the complex condition is equivalent to a simple condition, you
can edit the TQL query from the Qualifier tab of Enrichment Manager or Impact Analysis
Manager.
n
If you want to define a qualifier condition on a query node as using the functionality of
previous UCMDB versions, select Customize subtypes and select the root query node in
the CI types tree. Then select the Include option, select By qualifiers, and select the
required qualifiers. Similarly, when accessing a TQL query with qualifier conditions defined
in a previous UCMDB version or in Enrichment Manager or Impact Analysis Manager, the
condition appears in the Customize subtypes section of the Element Type tab, using the
Include and By qualifiers options.
n
It is sometimes possible to define an attribute condition (using the CI Type attribute) that
generates the same results as a complex type condition. However, the complex type
Page 26 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
condition ensures better performance. In such cases, the RTSM automatically optimizes
the query calculation by substituting an equivalent complex type condition for the simple
one. If the query is active,you will see the complex conditions in the TQL definition the next
time you open it.
For details on defining a complex type condition, see "Define a Complex Type Condition - Scenario"
on page 37.
Page 27 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Subgraph Definition
A subgraph definition enables you to create a graph that represents additional TQL query data
related to a specific CI. The DFM job searches for the results from both the TQL query and the
subgraph definitions. The query recursively retrieves all related CIs for a defined depth matching the
definition of the subgraph. For details on defining subgraph definitions, see "Subgraph Definition
Dialog Box" on page 92.
In the graph, you can define the relationship that is connected to a specific query node. For
example, if one of the query nodes is of type node, you can specify different relationships for
Windows, router, and IP Address. You can also define attribute conditions for query nodes. For
details, see "Subgraph Condition Definition Dialog Box" on page 90.
DFM jobs retrieve data that meets the criteria defined in the subgraph.
For an example of a subgraph definition, see "Create a Subgraph Definition – Scenario" on page 38.
Page 28 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
The ALLOW_VOLATILITY Qualifier
This qualifier is used to mark attributes that enable minor deviations to their value. For example,
there is probably no need to report a small disk size change (from 8.00008 to 8.00009 GB).
When updating an attribute that is marked with this qualifier, HP Business Service Management
checks the new value against the old value. This check is performed on the server as part of the
record update. If the difference between the two values is lower that the allowed deviation, an
update is not performed (the action is considered a false update).
This qualifier must contain one of the following data items that hold the allowed deviation:
l
ALLOWED_DEVIATION_FIX. The type of deviation is the same as the attribute type for
numeric attributes, and the integer type for date attributes. Deviation is measured by a fixed
value, of the same unit as the attribute value. (For date attributes, the deviation is measured in
seconds.)
l
ALLOWED_DEVIATION_PERCENT. Deviation is measured by percentage. For date values,
the percentage is checked against the millisecond date representation. This data item type is
always integer, and the value range is 0 to 100.
To deactivate the qualifier:
Access the Infrastructure Settings Manager (Admin > Platform > Setup and Maintenance >
Infrastructure Settings). Locate the Allow Volatility option. Change the value to False.
Page 29 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Define a TQL Query
This task describes how to create a TQL query in the Modeling Studio.
Note: You can also create a TQL query during the procedure for creating Impact rules,
Enrichment rules, Views, Templates, and Perspectives.
This task includes the following steps:
l
"Create a TQL Query" below
l
"Add Query Nodes and Relationships to the Query" below
l
"Set the Query Properties" below
1.
Create a TQL Query
In the Modeling Studio, select New > Query to open the TQL Query Editor. For details, see
"TQL Query Editor" on page 323.
2.
Add Query Nodes and Relationships to the Query
Add the TQL query nodes and relationships that define the query. The TQL query nodes
represent the CITs, as defined in the CI Type Manager, and the relationships represent the
connections between them. Relationships are defined one at a time for each pair of TQL query
nodes in the query. For details, see "Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL Query" on
page 32.
Note: You can also define a self-relationship from a query node to itself.
3.
Set the Query Properties
Click the Query Definition Properties
button to open the Query Definition Properties
dialog box. Set the query type, scope, priority, and other properties. For details, see
"Query/View Definition Properties Dialog Box" on page 312.
Example of a TQL Query Definition:
The direction of the relationship indicates which query node is dependent on the other. The
following example displays two nodes, an IP Service Endpoint, and a Client Port, which
are linked to one another via a client/server connection. The TQL query results must
comply with the direction of the arrows.
Page 30 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Note: A TQL query is subject to certain validation restrictions. For details, see
"Troubleshooting and Limitations" on page 96.
Page 31 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL
Query
This section explains how to add query nodes and relationships to a TQL query. It is relevant for
Impact Analysis Manager, Enrichment Manager, and the Modeling Studio.
Note: For TQL queries to be valid, they must comply with certain restrictions. For details, see
"Troubleshooting and Limitations" on page 96.
To add query nodes and relationships to a TQL query:
1. In Impact Analysis Manager or Enrichment manager, select the required query from the tree in
the left pane or click the New
button to create one.
In the Modeling Studio, select the Resources tab in the left pane, select Queries as the
Resource type, and select the required query from the tree or click New > Query to create a new
one.
2. In Impact Analysis Manager or Enrichment manager, click and drag one or more required TQL
query nodes from the tree displayed in the CI Type Selector, onto the editing pane. In the
Modeling Studio, select the CI Types tab in the left pane and drag the required TQL query
nodes from the tree onto the editing pane. These are the TQL query nodes that are included in
the query.
If you want the query to run over federated CIs also, right-click a query node and select Set
Integration Points. In the Select Integration Points dialog box, select the integration points for
the external data sources to use. For details, see "Select Integration Points Dialog Box" on
page 317.
3. To add a relationship between two query nodes, do one of the following:
n
Select the required TQL query nodes by holding down CTRL and clicking the TQL query
nodes, right-click and select Add Relationship. The Add Relationship dialog box opens.
Select the required relationship. For details, see "Add/Edit Relationship Dialog Box" on page
59.
n
Click the Create Relationship
icon and draw a line between the required query nodes.
The Select Relationship Type dialog box opens. Select the required relationship type. For
details, see "Select Relationship Type Dialog Box" on page 90.
4. Click OK. The selected query nodes are linked by the relationship you have selected.
Page 32 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Define a Compound Relationship – Scenario
This section describes how to define the allowed steps that form a compound relationship between
an IP Subnet CI and an IP Address CI.
Note: To reach the required result, you must implement each one of the following steps.
To define a compound relationship between a IP Subnet CI and an IP Address CI:
1. Create a TQL query of type view and drag the following query nodes onto the editing pane:
n
IP Subnet
n
IP Address
2. Right-click the IP Subnet and IP Address query nodes and select Add Compound
Relationship to open the Add Compound Relationship dialog box.
3. Click the Add
button. In Enrichment Manager and Impact Analysis Manager, the Add
Triplet dialog box opens. In the Modeling Studio, a row is added to the table. Make the following
selections:
n
From the Source list, select IP Subnet.
n
From the Target list, select Node.
n
From the Relationship list, select Membership.
n
Select the required Relationship direction.
In Enrichment Manager and Impact Analysis Manager, click OK to save your changes.
4. Click the Add
button again and make the following selections:
n
From the Source list, select Node.
n
From the Target list, select IP Address.
n
From the Relationship list, select Containment.
n
Select the required Relationship direction.
In Enrichment Manager and Impact Analysis Manager, click OK to save your changes.
The following shows an example of compound definitions following the changes:
5. Click OK to save your changes.
The TQL query in the editing pane now looks like this:
Page 33 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
6. Create a view based on your TQL query and save it.
7. Go to the required view in IT Universe Manager to view the results. If you did not select the
Show full path between source and target CIs option, then the results display the names of
the relationships that link the CIs as Virtual-Compound rather than the actual names of the
relationships. See the illustration below:
You can double-click the Virtual - Compound relationship in IT Universe Manager to open the
Link Map, which displays the CIs and relationships that comprise the allowed steps used to link
the IP Subnet and IP Address CIs.
Page 34 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
In the example above, the 192.168.168.0 (IP Subnet) CI is linked to the 192.168.0.1 (IP
Address) CI through the labm1ccm15 (Node) CI.
If you selected the Show full path between source and target CIs option, then the results in
IT Universe Manager display the actual names of the relationships that link the CIs and the full
path between the source and target CIs. See the illustration below:
Page 35 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Define a Join Relationship – Scenario
This section explains how to define a join relationship that links Node CIs to IP Address CIs
whose Created by attribute values are equal.
Note: To reach the required result, you must implement each one of the following steps.
To define a join relationship that links all IP Address and Node CIs whose Created by
attribute values are equal:
1. Create a TQL query and drag the following query nodes from the CI Type Selector onto the
editing pane:
n
Node
n
IP Address
2. Select the Node and IP Address query nodes and right-click to open the Add Join
Relationship dialog box.
3. Click the Add
button to add a row to the table and do the following:
n
In the Node Attribute box, select Created by.
n
In the Operator box, select Equal.
n
In the IP Address Attribute box, select Created by.
In Enrichment Manager and Impact Analysis Manager, you make these selections in the Join
Relationship Condition dialog box.
The Join Definition area now looks like this.
4. Click OK to save your changes.
The TQL query in the editing pane now looks like this:
Page 36 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Define a Complex Type Condition - Scenario
This section describes how to define a complex type condition in the Query Node Properties dialog
box. In this example, you add subtype conditions to a Node query node in a TQL query.
To define a complex type condition:
1. Create a TQL query and drag a query node of type Node onto the editing pane.
2. Right click the query node and select Query Node Properties. The Query Node Properties
dialog box opens.
3. Select the Element Type tab and select Customize subtypes.
4. In the CI Types pane, select Computer, and in the Conditions pane, select Exclude
<Computer> from the query. Select the Apply this condition recursively on all subtypes
of <Computer> check box. This excludes all CIs of type Computer and its descendants in the
query results.
5. In the CI Types pane, select Unix, and in the Conditions pane, select Include <Unix> in the
query. This includes all Unix CIs in the query results.
6. In the CI Types pane, select IBM Frame, and in the Conditions pane, select Include <IBM
Frame> in the query. Then select By qualifiers and select the CONTAINER qualifier. This
includes all IBM Frame CIs with the CONTAINER qualifier in the query results.
7. In the CI Types pane, select Firewall, and in the Conditions pane, select Exclude <Firewall>
from the query. Select By qualifiers and select the HIDDEN_CLASS and MAJOR_APP
qualifiers. This excludes all Firewall CIs with the HIDDEN_CLASS and MAJOR_APP
qualifiers from the query results.
8. Click OK to save your conditions and exit the dialog box.
Page 37 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Create a Subgraph Definition – Scenario
This section describes how to create a subgraph definition. In this example, the TQL query results
retrieve all CIs that are connected to a Business Service CI by a Containment relationship up to a
depth of 3.
Note: To reach the required result, you must implement each one of the following steps.
To create this sample subgraph definition:
1. Create a TQL query and drag a query node of type Business Service onto the editing pane.
2. Right-click the Business Service query node and select Subgraph Definition to open the
Subgraph Definition dialog box.
3. Click the Add
button. In Enrichment Manager and Impact Analysis Manager, the Add
Triplet dialog box opens. In the Modeling Studio, a row is added to the table. Make the following
selections:
n
From the Source drop-down list, select Managed Object.
n
From the Target drop-down list, select Managed Object.
n
From the Relationship drop-down list, select Containment.
n
Set the direction of the relationship as left to right.
In Enrichment Manager and Impact Analysis Manager, click OK to save your changes.
The Subgraph Definition dialog box now looks like this.
4. Set the Depth setting to 3.
5. Click OK in the Subgraph Definition dialog box.
Go to the required view in IT Universe Manager to view the results.
Page 38 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
The results show the Business Service CI aaa and all of the CIs linked to it in succession by
Containment relationships down to three levels.
Page 39 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Shortcut Menu Options
This section includes a list of TQL query shortcut menu options (listed alphabetically):
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Add Calculated
Relationship
Enables you to create a calculated relationship.
Add Compound
Relationship
l
For details on how to create a calculated relationship, see "Triplets
Page" on page 397.
l
For details about Impact Modeling, see "Impact Modeling" on page
100.
Enables you to define the connection between two query nodes using a
compound relationship.
For details, see "Add/Edit Compound Relationship Dialog Box" on page
53.
Add Join
Relationship
Enables you to define join relationships. You create them by defining an
attribute for each query node. These query node values are used for
comparison during federation.
For details, see "Add/Edit Join Relationship Dialog Box" on page 56.
Add Related Query
Node Wizard
Displays the Add Related Query Node Wizard which enables you to build
a TQL query. For details, see "Add Related Query Node Wizard" on page
61.
Add Relationship
Enables you to create a relationship for your query nodes by selecting it
from a predefined list. Displays the Add Relationship dialog box.
For details, see "Add/Edit Relationship Dialog Box" on page 59.
Note: In Enrichment Manager, this option adds an Enrichment
relationship to the rule when working in Enrichment mode. Applicable for
regular and Enrichment query nodes. For details, see "Enrichment
Manager" on page 409. Added relationships are denoted by an added
indicator.
Add to Hierarchy
Adds the selected query node to the hierarchy as a separate query node.
Note: Only relevant for the Modeling Studio.
Add to Model
Output
Designates the selected query node as output for the pattern-based
model.
Note: Only relevant for pattern-based models in the Modeling Studio.
Page 40 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Change Query
Node/Relationship
Type
Displays the Change Query Node Type dialog box. Enables you to
change the CI type of the query node after you have created it. For
details, see "Change Query Node/Relationship Type Dialog Box" on page
279.
Note: Only relevant for the Modeling Studio.
Clear
Available by right-clicking a query node or relationship when working in
Enrichment mode in the Enrichment Manager. Clears the query
node/relationship's Enrichment rule definition. For details, see
"Enrichment Manager" on page 409.
Appears only if you have updated or deleted a query node/relationship
using an Enrichment rule.
Note: Only relevant for Enrichment Manager.
Copy/Paste
Copy/paste an existing TQL query node/relationship in the same query or
into another TQL query.
The copied TQL query node/relationship includes all TQL definitions.
You can copy and paste relationships provided that the TQL query nodes
to which the relationships are connected are also selected. A relationship
on its own cannot be copied without its connecting TQL query nodes.
You can select multiple TQL query nodes/relationships as well.
Note: The Copy and Paste options are only available in the Modeling
Studio. The Paste option is available only after using the Copy option to
copy an existing TQL query node/relationship.
Define Impacted
Define which query node in the TQL query is the trigger Impact Analysis
query node and which query nodes are impacted by the changes that
occur in the system. For details, see "Impacted Query Nodes Dialog
Box" on page 366.
Note: Only relevant for Impact Analysis Manager.
Delete
Deletes the selected query node/relationship/CI.
Note: This option is not available for calculated relationships.
Page 41 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Delete
Available by right-clicking a query node or relationship when working in
Relationship/Query Enrichment mode.
Node
Creates a specific Enrichment rule that is designed to delete
CIs/relationships from the RTSM. Applicable to regular query nodes and
relationships only. You can use this option, for example, for removing
unnecessary data from the RTSM. For details, see "Enrichment
Manager" on page 409.
Deleted query nodes and relationships are denoted by a removed
indicator.
Note: Only relevant for Enrichment Manager.
Edit Relationship
Displays the Refine Relationship Type dialog box. For details, see
"Refine Query Node Type Dialog Box" on page 89.
Note:
Hide Element in
Query Results
l
Not relevant in the Modeling Studio.
l
This option appears only when the selected relationship has
descendants.
When this option is selected, a Hidden in Query Results indicator
appears to the right of the selected TQL query node in the editing pane.
Any query results pertaining to that TQL query node are not displayed in
the topology map. This can be useful when certain relationships or TQL
query nodes are required to build the query but are not needed in the
results. At least one query node must be visible for the view to be valid.
Note: Only relevant for the Modeling Studio.
Query
Node/Relationship
Properties
Displays the Query Node/Relationship Properties dialog box, enabling
you to define the attribute conditions for the selected TQL query
node/relationship. For details, see "Query Node/Relationship Properties
Dialog Box" on page 76.
Note: This option is not available for calculated relationships.
Refine Query Node
Type
Displays the Refine Query Node Type dialog box. Enables you to change
the CI type of the query node after you have created it. For details, see
"Refine Query Node Type Dialog Box" on page 89.
Note: This option only appears if a child of the CI type exists. Only
relevant for Impact Analysis Manager and Enrichment Manager.
Remove Subgraph
Page 42 of 446
Only appears if you have defined a subgraph definition. For details, see
"Subgraph Definition Dialog Box" on page 92.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Reset Impacted
Removes the Define Impacted definition applied to that query node. For
details on the Define Impacted definition, see ""Impacted Query Nodes
Dialog Box" on page 366.
Note: Only relevant for Impact Analysis Manager.
Reset Inner
Relationship
Redraws a self-referential relationship in the Topology map as a square
for ease of viewing.
Note: Only relevant for self-referential relationships that are not square.
Select All
Selects all query nodes and relationships in the TQL query.
Note: Only relevant for the Modeling Studio.
Set As Contact
Query Node
Designates the selected query node as a contact query node for the
perspective.
Note: Only relevant for perspectives in the Modeling Studio.
Set Integration
Points
Opens the Select Integration Points dialog box which enables you to
select the required data sources for a TQL query node.
Note: Only relevant for the Modeling Studio.
Show Element in
Query Results
When this option is selected, the results pertaining to the TQL query node
are displayed in the topology map.
Note: Only relevant for the Modeling Studio.
Show Element
instances
Displays the Element Instances dialog box which displays all the
instances found for each query node in a table. For details, see "Element
Instances Dialog Box" on page 70.
Show Node
Parameters
Opens the Template Parameter Values dialog box, which enables you to
set the values of the query node's parameters.
Note: Only relevant for template-based views in the Modeling Studio.
Subgraph
Definition
Displays the Subgraph Definition dialog box, where you can create a
graph that represents additional TQL query data related to a specific
query node. For details, see "Subgraph Definition Dialog Box" on page
92.
Update
Use an Enrichment rule to update the value of CI attributes in the RTSM,
Relationship/Query or to add data to attributes that currently do not have values. Opens the
Node
Query Node Definition - Attributes dialog box. For details, see "Query
Node/Relationship Definition Dialog Box" on page 427. This is applicable
for both regular and Enrichment query nodes.
Updated query nodes are denoted by an updated
indicator.
Note: Only relevant for Enrichment Manager.
Page 43 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Attribute Operator Definitions
This section contains a list of operators used to define attribute conditions in various dialog boxes,
such as the Subgraph Condition dialog box, Impact Rules Definition dialog box, or the Query
Node/Relationship Properties dialog box.
Operator
Description
Changed
during
(Displayed only when you select an attribute of type Date.) Displays only the
instances that changed during the period specified in the Value box.
Equal
Checks whether the attribute value is equal to the value specified in the Value
box.
Equal
ignore
case
Checks whether the attribute value is equal to the value specified in the Value box
regardless of the case.
Greater
Checks whether the attribute value is greater than the value specified in the Value
box.
Note: When comparing attributes of type string, the comparison is based on the
ASCII values of the string characters.
Greater
than or
equal
Checks whether the attribute value is greater than or equal to the value specified
in the Value box.
In
Displays only the instances where this attribute value equals one of the selected
values. For example, for CIs that have a Change state that equals Plan and New,
select the operator In from the Operator list and select both Plan and New from
the Value box.
Is null
Checks whether the attribute value is null.
Less
Checks whether the attribute value is less than the value specified in the Value
box.
Note: When comparing attributes of type string, the comparison is based on the
ASCII values of the string characters.
Less than
or equal
Checks whether the attribute value is less than or equal to the value specified in
the Value box.
Like
Uses a wildcard (%). Use Like when you are not sure of the complete name for
which you are searching.
Like ignore
case
Uses a wildcard (%). Use Like ignore case when you are not sure of the
complete name for which you are searching. The case of the string is ignored.
Not equal
Checks whether the attribute value is not equal to the value specified in the Value
box.
Unchanged (Displayed when you select a date type attribute.) Displays only the instances
during
that did not change during the period specified in the Value box.
Page 44 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Note:
l
For the Not equal operator, query results do not include data from the CI instances that are
not assigned a value. For example, a system contains three nodes: Node1 is assigned the
value A, Node2 is assigned the value B, and Node3 is not assigned a value. If you create a
query to retrieve all nodes that are Not equal to A, the results of your query include Node2
only, because Node3 is not assigned a value.
l
HP Business Service Management supports both Microsoft SQL Server and Oracle Server
databases. Microsoft SQL Server is not case sensitive by default (unlike Oracle database
which is case sensitive). Consequently, if you are using Microsoft SQL Server, the Equal
operator retrieves the same query results as the Equal ignore case operator. For example,
if you select the attribute City, the operator Equal, and type NEW YORK in the Value
comparison box, case differences are ignored and query results include NEW YORK,
New York and new york.
Page 45 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
TQL Logs
This section contains definitions for TQL parameter log files.
This section includes the following topics:
l
"Pattern Log" below
l
"Pattern Statistics Log" on next page
l
"Audit Short/Detailed Log (TQL Perspective)" on page 48
l
"Incremental Statistics Log" on page 49
l
"Incremental Splitter Log" on page 49
l
"Incremental Detailed Log" on page 49
Pattern Log
The log name is cmdb.pattern.log.
Log File
Description
Purpose
Information about the lifecycle of a TQL query that is handled and calculated in
the RTSM.
Only TQL queries stored in the RTSM are included. Information about ad hoc
TQL queries is not included.
Information
Level
Not available.
Error Level
Not available.
Debug Level
Possible actions performed on each TQL query include:
Page 46 of 446
l
Status changes. Each TQL query has an internal state during its lifecycle.
For example, all inactive queries are always in the INACTIVE state. Active
queries begin in the NEW state. When they are first calculated, they move
to the IN_CALC state. When a query is removed, it moves to the WAIT_
FOR_DELETE state until it is removed completely.
l
Model changes. Whenever a change occurs in the CMDB model, the TQL
determines if it is relevant to its results. If so, it calculates the required
change in the query results. The log displays the number of changes
processed by this TQL.
l
Query changes. When the TQL is modified, the log indicates that the query
was modified and displays its new priority.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Log File
Description
Basic
Check if a TQL query has the same status for a long time:
Troubleshooting
l new – the query is in lazy loading
l
inactive
l
calculation – the calculation may have failed but the scheduler was not
informed
You can also view the number of notifications that a TQL query received.
Examples of typical log entries:
The TQL query named TQL1 is added and is in NEW state:
2011-01-25 07:44:48,763 DEBUG - TQL1 [NEW] State
change NEW --> NEW
TQL1 is asked to be calculated and is moved to IN CALCULATION state:
2011-01-25 07:44:48,763 DEBUG – TQL1 [NEW] State
change NEW --> IN_CALC
The calculation finishes and moves to IDLE state (waits for changes):
2011-01-25 07:44:48,778 DEBUG - TQL1 [IN_CALC] State
change IN_CALC --> IDLE
Changes took place in the model (total of 5 changes):
2011-01-25 07:44:49,544 DEBUG - TQL1 [IDLE] Model
Change Recieved 5 model changes.
Moving to a state that checks whether these change are relevant for this TQL query:
2011-01-25 07:44:49,544 DEBUG - TQL1 [IDLE] State
change IDLE --> IN_IMMEDIATE_1
The pattern is changed. The new priority is medium:
2011-01-25 07:45:39,647 DEBUG - TQL1 [IDLE] Pattern
change New priority MED_PRIORITY
Pattern Statistics Log
The log name is cmdb.pattern.statistics.log.
Log File
Description
Purpose
General calculation data for each TQL query, updated at predefined
intervals.
Page 47 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Log File
Description
Information Level
The following information is given for each TQL query:
l
name
l
average, minimum, and maximum calculation times
l
number of calculations
l
last calculation time
l
result size
Error Level
Not available.
Debug Level
Not available.
Basic Troubleshooting
l
Verify that a specific TQL query was updated.
l
Evaluate a TQL query's calculation time.
l
Evaluate a TQL query's result size.
Audit Short/Detailed Log (TQL Perspective)
The log name is cmdb.audit.short.log.
Log File
Description
Purpose
RTSM state changes, CI Type changes, and TQL query results.
You can use this log to follow the results of TQL queries.
Information Level
Not available.
Error Level
Not available.
Debug Level
l
Final calculation for TQL queries is logged.
l
If the final TQL query calculation is unchanged from the previous
calculation, this is noted.
l
If the final TQL query calculation is changed from the previous
calculation, results of the CIs and relationships are recorded in the
detailed log. The number of CIs and relationships are recorded in the
short log.
l
Use this log to verify which notifications are published by the TQL
query subsystem.
l
Check the section at the end of each result. This section includes
added, removed, and updated CIs and relationships.
l
Track the CIT changes and see if the query results also change. You
can thus correlate the CIT changes to the results of the query
calculations.
Basic
Troubleshooting
Page 48 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Incremental Statistics Log
The log name is cmdb.incremental.statistics.log.
Log File
Description
Purpose
Traces the calculation procedure, full or incremental, of every query.
Information
Level
Not available.
Error Level
Not available.
Debug Level
l
Gives the date, time, query name, and whether an incremental statistic
calculation was performed (yes/no).
l
If an incremental statistic calculation was not performed, states the reason,
the number of subcalculations (relevant for incremental calculations only),
and the complete calculation time.
Basic
Monitors the calculation process.
Troubleshooting
If a specific query calculation takes a long time, check if it is a full or
incremental calculation:
l
If full, check whether a full calculation is necessary.
l
If incremental, check how many subcalculations have been performed.
Incremental Splitter Log
The log name is cmdb.incremental.splitter.log.
Log File
Description
Purpose
Monitors the incremental splitter result made during an incremental
calculation.
Information
Level
Not available.
Error Level
Not available.
Debug Level
Gives the set of query node numbers of each query graph created by the
incremental splitter.
Basic
Troubleshooting
If the TQL result calculated by the incremental calculator is wrong, verify that
the splitter result is correct.
Incremental Detailed Log
The log name is cmdb.incremental.detailed.log.
Page 49 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Log File
Description
Purpose
Monitors the incremental calculation process.
Information
Level
Not available.
Error Level
Not available.
Debug Level
Each incremental subcalculation entry includes the following:
Basic
Troubleshooting
Page 50 of 446
l
the trigger query node
l
the number of elements classified to the trigger query node
l
whether the subcalculation step is driven by new elements added to the
model or by existing elements
l
the calculated query graph
Follows the basic steps of an incremental calculation.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Topology Query Language User Interface
This section includes (in alphabetical order):
l
"Add/Edit Calculated Relationship Dialog Box" below
l
"Add/Edit Compound Relationship Dialog Box" on page 53
l
"Add/Edit Join Relationship Dialog Box" on page 56
l
"Add/Edit Relationship Dialog Box" on page 59
l
"Add Related Query Node Wizard" on page 61
l
"Add Triplet Dialog Box" on page 67
l
"Conditions Preview Dialog Box" on page 69
l
"Element Instances Dialog Box" on page 70
l
"Element Layout Preview Dialog Box" on page 73
l
"Filter CI Instances Dialog Box" on page 73
l
"Join Relationship Condition Dialog Box" on page 74
l
"Layout Settings Dialog Box" on page 75
l
"Query Node/Relationship Properties Dialog Box" on page 76
l
"Refine Query Node Type Dialog Box" on page 89
l
"Select Relationship Type Dialog Box" on page 90
l
"Subgraph Condition Definition Dialog Box" on page 90
l
"Subgraph Definition Dialog Box" on page 92
l
"User Preferences Dialog Box" on page 94
Add/Edit Calculated Relationship Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define the connection between two query nodes using a calculated
relationship from the CI Type model.
Page 51 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
To
access
To access in Enrichment Manager, Impact Analysis Manager, and the Modeling
Studio:
Right-click the required query node in the editing pane in Enrichment Manager,
Impact Analysis Manager, or the Modeling Studio and select Add Calculated
Relationship.
Note: If you are using Enrichment Manager, select Query mode at the top of the
editing pane to display the Add Calculated Relationship option.
To access in Adapter Management in Data Flow Management (DFM):
1. Select an adapter in the Resources pane.
2. In the Adapter Definition tab, click the Edit Input Query button
of the Input Query box to open the Input Query Editor.
to the right
3. Right-click the required query node and select Add Calculated Relationship.
Relevant
tasks
See also
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
l
"Impact Modeling" on page 100
l
"CI Type Relationships" on page 375
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click Expand All to expand all the folders in the tree.
Click Collapse All to collapse all the folders in the tree.
Tree View
Page 52 of 446
Click Tree View to select the display format of the calculated relationship tree.
The following options are available:
l
Display label
l
Class name
l
Legacy class name
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element
(A-Z)
<Calculated
relationship
tree>
Description
Select the calculated relationship that defines the connection between two query
nodes.
Relationship The direction of the relationship that indicates which query node is dependent on
Direction
the other.
Relationship The name of the calculated relationship.
Name
Relationship Select an option to define how to handle relationships between identical query
Restrictions nodes or self relationships in the query results. A self relationship is a
relationship that leads from a query node to itself.
Note: This list appears only when you select one query node or two identical
query nodes.
l
Allow All Relationships. All relationships appear in the query results.
l
Allow Self Relationships Only. Only self-relationships (a relationship that
leads to itself) appear in the query results.
l
Allow Non Self Relationships Only. Self-relationships do not appear in the
query results.
Add/Edit Compound Relationship Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define the connection between two query nodes using a compound
relationship.
To access
To access in Enrichment Manager, Impact Analysis Manager, and the Modeling
Studio:
Right-click the required query nodes in the editing pane in Enrichment Manager,
Impact Analysis Manager, or the Modeling Studio and select Add Compound
Relationship.
Note: If you are using Enrichment Manager, select Query mode at the top of the
editing pane to display the Add Compound Relationship option.
To access in Adapter Management in DFM:
1. Select an adapter in the Resources pane.
2. In the Adapter Definition tab, click the
Edit Input Query button to the
right of the Input Query box to open the Input Query Editor.
3. Right-click the required query node and select Add Compound
Relationship.
Page 53 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Important
You can create as many compound definitions as necessary.
information
Relevant
tasks
See also
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
l
"Compound Relationship" on page 22
l
"Define a Compound Relationship – Scenario" on page 33
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Add a compound definition.
In Impact Analysis Manager and Enrichment Manager, it opens the Add Triplet
dialog box. In the Modeling Studio, it enters a default compound definition in
the table. Click the Edit buttons to edit the definition components.
Delete the selected compound definition.
Edit the selected compound definition.
In Impact Analysis Manager and Enrichment Manager, it opens the Add Triplet
dialog box. In the Modeling Studio, it opens the Compound Relationship
Condition Definition dialog box.
Max steps
The longest path allowed between the two CIs in the RTSM to be included in
the discovery process.
Default is: 5
Min steps
The shortest path allowed between the two CIs in the RTSM to be included in
the discovery process.
Default is: 1
Relationship
The relationship connecting the two query nodes.
Relationship
Direction
The direction of the relationship that indicates which query node is dependent
on the other.
Relationship
Name
The name of the compound relationship.
Page 54 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (AZ)
Relationship
Restrictions
Description
Select an option to define how to handle relationships between identical query
nodes or self relationships in the query results. A self relationship is a
relationship that leads from a query node to itself.
Note: This list appears only when you select one query node or two identical
query nodes.
l
Allow All Relationships. All relationships appear in the query results.
l
Allow Self Relationships only. Only self-relationships (a relationship that
leads to itself) appear in the query results.
l
Allow Non Self Relationships only. Self-relationships do not appear in
the query results.
Show element
in query
results
Select Show element in query results to include query results relating to a
join or compound relationship. By default, this option is selected. When the
check box is cleared, a Hidden in Query Results indicator appears to the
left of the relationship's name in the editing pane, denoting that any query
results pertaining to the relationship are not displayed in the topology map.
Show full path
between
source and
target CIs
If you select this option, then the query results display the actual names of the
relationships that link the CIs and the full path between the source and target
CIs.
Source
The required source query node.
Page 55 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (AZ)
Stop at first
compound
level
Description
Select this option if you want the system to stop looking for TQL query results
once it reaches the first target in the path.
In the following sample compound link definition, Depth is defined as 10 and
Stop at first compound level is selected.
The TQL query results include the Target 1, Target 3, and Target 4 because
they are all at level 1 (the first CI found in the path). Target 2 is not included in
the TQL results because it is at level 2 (the second CI found in the path).
Target
The required target query node.
Add/Edit Join Relationship Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define join relationships.
To access
To access in Enrichment Manager, Impact Analysis Manager, and the Modeling
Studio:
Right-click the required query nodes in the editing pane in Enrichment Manager,
Impact Analysis Manager, or the Modeling Studio and select Add Join
Relationship.
Note: If you are using Enrichment Manager, select Query mode at the top of the
editing pane to display the Add Join Relationship option.
To access in Adapter Management in DFM:
1. Select an adapter in the Resources pane.
2. In the Adapter Definition tab, click the
Edit Input Query button to the
right of the Input Query box to open the Input Query Editor.
3. Right-click the required query node and select Add Join Relationship.
Page 56 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Important
When you access the dialog box from the Modeling Studio, you select the
information attributes and operator within the dialog box itself. When you access the dialog
box from Impact Analysis Manager or Enrichment Manager, you select the
attributes and operator from the Join Relationship Condition dialog box.
Relevant
tasks
See also
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
l
"Join Relationship" on page 23
l
"Define a Join Relationship – Scenario" on page 36
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Define a join definition. In Impact Analysis Manager and Enrichment Manager, it
opens the Join Relationship Condition dialog box. In the Modeling Studio, it adds
the selected attributes and operator to the list.
Delete the selected join definition.
Edit the join definition. Opens the Join Relationship Condition dialog box.
Note: This option is not relevant in the Modeling Studio.
<Query
node1
Attribute>
box
Select an attribute for the <end_1> query node.
<Query
node2
Attribute>
box
Select an attribute for the <end_2> query node.
<Selected
query
node1>
column
A selected query node. The first attribute applies to <end_1>.
Page 57 of 446
Note: This option is only available in the Modeling Studio.
Note: This option is only available in the Modeling Studio.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
<Selected
query
node2>
column
A selected query node. The second attribute applies to <end_2>.
And
All join definitions are linked by the And operator.
Note: This is not relevant in the Modeling Studio.
Operator
box
Select an operator. For details on the available operators, see "Join Relationship
Condition Dialog Box" on page 74.
Note: This option is only available in the Modeling Studio.
Operator
column
The operator selected in the Join Relationship Condition dialog box. For details
about operator definitions, see "Attribute Operator Definitions" on page 44.
Relationship The direction of the relationship that indicates which query node is dependent on
Direction
the other.
Relationship The name of the join relationship.
Name
Relationship Select an option to define how to handle relationships between identical query
Restrictions nodes or self relationships in the query results. A self relationship is a
relationship that leads from a query node to itself.
Note: This list appears only when you select one query node or two identical
query nodes.
Page 58 of 446
l
Allow All Relationships. All relationships appear in the query results.
l
Allow Self Relationships only. Only self-relationships (a relationship that
leads to itself) appear in the query results.
l
Allow Non Self Relationships only. Self-relationships do not appear in the
query results.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element
(A-Z)
Show
relationship
in query
results
Description
Select Show relationship in query results to include query results relating to a
join or compound relationship. By default, this option is selected. When the
check box is cleared, a Hidden in Query Results indicator appears to the left
of the relationship's name in the editing pane. Any query results pertaining to the
relationship are not displayed in the topology map.
Add/Edit Relationship Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define the connection between two query nodes in a TQL query.
To access
To access in Enrichment Manager, Impact Analysis Manager, and the Modeling
Studio, do one of the following:
l
Right-click the required query node in the editing pane in Enrichment Manager,
Impact Analysis Manager, or the Modeling Studio and select Add
Relationship.
l
Click the Create Relationship
icon and draw a line between the required
query nodes. The Select Relationship Type dialog box opens. Select Regular
Relationship.
Note: If you are using Enrichment Manager, select Query mode at the top of the
editing pane to display the Add Relationship option.
To access in Adapter Management in DFM:
1. Select an adapter in the Resources pane.
2. In the Adapter Definition tab, click the
Edit Input Query button to the
right of the Input Query box to open the Input Query Editor.
3. Right-click the required query node and select Add Relationship.
Important
This option does not appear when two selected query nodes (or a single selected
information query node) do not have a valid relationship between them.
Page 59 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Relevant
tasks
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click Expand All to expand all the folders in the relationship tree.
Click Collapse All to collapse all the folders in the relationship tree.
Tree View
Click Tree View to select the display format of the relationship tree. The
following options are available:
l
Display label
l
Class name
l
Legacy class name
<Relationship Select the relationship that defines the connection between two query nodes.
tree>
Relationship
Direction
The direction of the relationship that indicates which query node is dependent
on the other.
Relationship
Name
The name of the relationship.
Relationship
Restrictions
Select an option to define how to handle relationships between identical query
nodes or self relationships in the query results. A self relationship is a
relationship that leads from a query node to itself.
Note: This list appears only when you select one query node or two identical
query nodes.
Page 60 of 446
l
Allow All Relationships. All relationships appear in the query results.
l
Allow Self Relationships only. Only self-relationships (a relationship that
leads to itself) appear in the query results.
l
Allow Non Self Relationships only. Self-relationships do not appear in
the query results.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Add Related Query Node Wizard
This wizard enables you to build a TQL query.
To access
To access in Enrichment Manager, Impact Analysis Manager, and the Modeling
Studio:
In the editing pane, right-click the required query node and select Add Related
Query Node.
Note: If you are using Enrichment Manager, select Query mode at the top of the
editing pane to display the Add Related Query Node option.
To access in Discovery Control Panel in DFM:
1. Select a job in the Discovery Modules pane.
2. Select a Trigger Query in the Properties tab. Click the Open the Query Editor
button to open the Trigger Query Editor.
3. Right-click the required query node and select Add Related Query Node
Wizard.
To access in Adapter Management in DFM:
1. Select an adapter in the Resources pane.
2. In the Adapter Definition tab, click the
Edit Input Query button to the
right of the Input Query box to open the Input Query Editor.
3. Right-click the required query node and select Add Related Query Node
Wizard.
Important
If the TQL query is empty, drag the required TQL query nodes on to the editing
information pane from the tree displayed in the CI Type Selector or the CI Types tab of the left
pane.
Relevant
tasks
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
Wizard
map
The Add Related Query Node Wizard contains:
See also
"Topology Query Language (TQL) Overview" on page 18
Page 61 of 446
"Related Query Node Type Page" > "Relationship Type Page" > "Related Query
Node Properties Page" > "Related Query Node Instances Page"
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Related Query Node Type Page
This wizard page enables you to add a query node to the TQL query.
Important
If the TQL query is empty, drag the required TQL query node on to the editing pane
information from the tree displayed in the Configuration Item Types pane.
For general information on the Add Related Query Node Wizard, see "Add Related
Query Node Wizard" on previous page.
Wizard
map
The "Add Related Query Node Wizard" contains:
"Related Query Node Type Page" > "Relationship Type Page" > "Related
Query Node Properties Page" > "Related Query Node Instances Page"
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click Expand All to expand all the folders in the tree.
Click Collapse All to collapse all the folders in the tree.
Tree View
Click Tree View to select the display format of the CI type tree. The following
options are available:
l
Display label
l
Class name
l
Legacy class name
Note: This feature is only available in the Modeling Studio.
<query
node> is
required
Page 62 of 446
Define the relationship cardinality. For details, see "Query Node/Relationship
Properties Dialog Box" on page 76.
l
Select the <query node> is required check box for each query node to include
a minimum of one instance of the query node at the other end of the relationship
in the query results. Selecting the check box gives the relationship a cardinality
value of 1..*.
l
Clear the <query node> is required check box to give the relationship a
cardinality value of 0..*.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI
Element
(A-Z)
<TQL
Query
Node
hierarchy
tree>
Description
Select the required query node. The query node you select appears in the Element
name box.
This list only includes the query nodes of the CI type that have valid relationships to
the selected (source) query node.
To the right of each query node, the number of CI instances that exist in the RTSM
for that CI type is displayed. The number of instances is only updated after you
close the Add Related Query Node Wizard and open it again.
Note: The first query node in the hierarchy tree is selected by default.
Element
name
(Optional) Contains the name of the selected query node. By default, the CI type is
assigned as the element's name.
You can rename a TQL query node in the Element name box giving it a unique
label. This can be helpful when there is more than one query node of the same CI
type in the TQL query.
Show
only CITs
with
instances
Select this check box to display only the CITs of which there are instances in the
RTSM. If this box is not selected, the tree includes all CITs with a valid link to the
source query node.
Note: The Show only CITs with instances check box is selected by default.
Relationship Type Page
This wizard page enables you to add a relationship to a TQL query.
Wizard The "Add Related Query Node Wizard" contains:
map
"Related Query Node Type Page" > "Relationship Type Page" > "Related Query
Node Properties Page" > "Related Query Node Instances Page"
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (AZ)
Tree View
Description
Click Tree View to select the display format of the Relationship tree. The
following options are available:
l
Display label
l
Class name
l
Legacy class name
Note: This feature is only available in the Modeling Studio.
Page 63 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (AZ)
Description
<TQL Query
Relationship
hierarchy tree>
Select the required relationship.
Relationship
Direction
Select the required relationship direction. The direction indicates which query
node is dependent on the other.
Relationship
Name
The name of the relationship.
Relationship
Restrictions
Select an option to define how to handle relationships between identical query
nodes or self relationships in the query results. A self relationship is a
relationship that leads from a query node to itself.
Note: This feature is only available in the Modeling Studio.
Note: This feature is only available in the Modeling Studio.
Relationship
Type
A valid relationship that defines the connection between the selected query
nodes. The box displays the relationship you selected in the relationship
hierarchy tree.
Note: This feature is only available in Enrichment Manager and Impact
Analysis Manager.
Show only
relationships
with instances
Display only the relationships of which there are instances in the RTSM. If
this box is not selected, the tree includes all valid relationships between the
selected query nodes.
Related Query Node Properties Page
This wizard page enables you to create an expression that restricts the number of query nodes that
appear in the query by adding an attribute condition to a query node or relationship.
Important
When you access the wizard from the Modeling Studio, this wizard page has three
information tabs: Attribute, Element Type, and Element Layout. The Attribute tab includes
the elements described below. For details on the Element Type tab, see
"Element Type Tab" on page 82. For details on the Element Layout tab, see
"Element Layout Tab" on page 84.
Wizard
map
The "Add Related Query Node Wizard" contains:
"Related Query Node Type Page" > "Relationship Type Page" > "Related Query
Node Properties Page" > "Related Query Node Instances Page"
User interface elements are described below:
Page 64 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Add an attribute condition.
Delete an attribute condition.
Move a selected row up.
Move a selected row down.
View the condition definition.
And/Or
Click inside the And/Or field and select either And or Or to link multiple conditions.
Attribute
name
Choose an attribute from the list.
Brackets
Click inside the Brackets box to display a list of brackets you can use to build more
complex, logical statements.
Criteria
Contains the attribute condition definition as defined in the Element Instances Dialog
Box.
Include
Display both the selected CI and its children in the topology map.
subtypes
Note: This check box is only available in the Enrichment Manager and Impact
Analysis Manager.
NOT
Select NOT if you want the condition statement to do the opposite of what is defined.
Note: If you select NOT, query results do not include data from the CI instances that
were not assigned a value. For example, your system contains three nodes: Node1
is assigned the value A, Node2 is assigned the value B and Node3 is not assigned a
value. You create a query to retrieve all nodes that are equal to A and select NOT;
the results of your query only include Node2 because Node3 is not assigned a value.
Operator
Page 65 of 446
Select the required operator. For details, see "Attribute Operator Definitions" on page
44.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Show
element
in query
results
Description
Select Show element in query results to display the selected TQL query node in
the editing pane. When the check box is cleared, a Hidden in Query Results
indicator appears to the right of the selected TQL query node in the editing pane.
Any query results pertaining to that TQL query node are not displayed in the topology
map. This can be useful when certain relationships or TQL query nodes are required
to build the query but are not needed in the results. For example, Windows are
connected to the network by defining specific IP Addresses, but in any query results
you may want to view the IP Address elements only and not the Windows elements.
Value
Enter or select the value of the attribute. The Value options vary according to the
attribute type you select.
Related Query Node Instances Page
This wizard page displays all the instances found for the selected TQL query node in a table.
Important
The columns displayed in the report vary according to the CI type selected.
information
By default, only columns corresponding to attributes that have been defined with
the Asset Data, Change Monitored, and Comparable attribute qualifiers in the
CI Type Manager are displayed as columns in the dialog box. For details, see
"Attributes Page" on page 393.
If required, you can click the Display Hidden Columns button to display the
attributes that are defined as Visible but not Static. For details on Static attributes,
see "Attributes Page" on page 393.
Note: For information on the elements included in the Related Query Node
Instances page, see "Element Instances Dialog Box" on page 70.
Wizard
map
Page 66 of 446
The "Add Related Query Node Wizard" contains:
"Related Query Node Type Page" > "Relationship Type Page" > "Related Query
Node Properties Page" > "Related Query Node Instances Page"
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Add Triplet Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define the allowed steps in a path in the topology graph leading from
the source CI to the target CI when creating a subgraph definition, a compound relationship, or a
calculated relationship.
To access
l
In the Add Compound Relationship dialog box, click the Add
button. For
details, see "Add/Edit Compound Relationship Dialog Box" on page 53.
l
In the Subgraph Definition dialog box, click
Add. For details, see
"Subgraph Definition Dialog Box" on page 92.
l
In CI Type Manager, select Calculated Relationships from the drop-down list
in the CI Types pane. In the editing pane, select the Triplets page and then
click
Add.
Important
Select the query nodes and relationships to be included in the topology graph.
information
Important: The Condition fields are displayed only when you access the Add
Triplet dialog box from the Subgraph Definition dialog box.
Relevant
tasks
See also
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
l
"Compound Relationship" on page 22
l
"Define a Compound Relationship – Scenario" on page 33
l
"Subgraph Definition" on page 28
User interface elements are described below:
Page 67 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Define attribute conditions for the source and target query nodes you selected.
When the Add Triplet dialog box is opened from the Subgraph Definition dialog
box, it opens the Subgraph Condition Definition dialog box. When the Add Triplet
dialog box is opened from the Add Compound Relationship dialog box, it opens
the Compound Relationship Condition Definition dialog box.
The Condition button is enabled only after you select a query node from the
Source or Target lists.
Note: You cannot define attribute conditions for the source and target query
nodes in the CI Type Manager.
Relationship Select an available relationship connecting the two query nodes. The list of
available relationships appears only after defining both query nodes.
Relationship Select the required direction. Setting different relationship directions can achieve
Direction
different query results. For an example, see "Setting Different Relationship
Directions for Compound Definitions" below.
Note: The Relationship list remains empty until you have selected a source and
target.
Source
Select the required source query node.
Target
Select the required target query node.
Setting Different Relationship Directions for Compound Definitions
You can achieve different TQL results by setting different relationship directions. For example, in
your business world, as illustrated below, you want to create a compound relationship that
connects between a query node of the CIT a and a query node of the CIT b. Depth is defined at 5
(for details, see "Depth" on page 94).
Page 68 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
In the Add Triplet dialog box, you can create compound definitions to link query nodes a and b using
different relationship directions.
Compound
Definition
Source
#1
query node a query node c
#2
query node c query node b <relationship> source --> target
#3
query node c query node b <relationship> source <-- target
Target
Relationship
Relationship
Direction
<relationship> source --> target
l
Compound definitions 1 and 2 result in the following query:
l
Compound definitions 1 and 3 result in the following query:
l
Compound definitions 1, 2, and 3 result in the following query:
Conditions Preview Dialog Box
This dialog box displays the conditions selected when selecting a complex type condition in the
Element Type tab of the Query Node Properties dialog box.
To access
Click the Preview button
Properties dialog box.
from the Element Type tab of the Query Node
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
CI Type
Displays the subtypes for which you defined conditions.
Page 69 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Condition
Displays the icon of the selected condition, as defined in the Legend.
Filter by
Specifies the selected condition (i.e. by CI type or by qualifier and by
which qualifiers).
Element Instances Dialog Box
This dialog box displays all of the CI instances found for the selected TQL query node in a table.
To access
To access in Enrichment Manager, Impact Analysis Manager, and the
Modeling Studio:
In the editing pane, right-click the required query node and select Show Element
Instances.
Note: If you are using Enrichment Manager, select Query mode at the top of the
editing pane to display the Show Element Instances option.
To access in Adapter Management in DFM:
1. Select an adapter in the Resources pane.
2. In the Adapter Definition tab, click the Edit Input Query button
right of the Input Query box to open the Input Query Editor.
to the
3. Right-click the required query node and select Show Element’s Instances.
To access in Integration Studio:
Create an integration point based on a discovery jython adapter. In the Trigger CI
Instance menu, choose Select Existing CI.
Important
The columns in the table display the attributes of the selected CI type. The
information attributes displayed vary according to the CI type selected.
By default, only columns corresponding to attributes that have been defined with
the Asset Data, Change Monitored, and Comparable attribute qualifiers in the
CIT Manager are displayed as columns in the dialog box. For details, see
"Attributes Page" on page 393.
Relevant
tasks
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
"Create a Template" on page 266
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
"Work with Population Jobs" in the Data Flow Management Guide
"Work with Data Push Jobs" in the Data Flow Management Guide
Page 70 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
.
Specify the CIT you want displayed in the table. The table
also includes the children of the selected CIT.
Click to delete the selected CI.
Click Show CI Properties to open the Configuration Item
Properties dialog box for the selected CI.
Click to refresh the list of CI instances.
Filters the CI instances you want to display for the selected
query node. Opens the Filter CI Instances dialog box.
Clears the filter definitions you created in the Filter CI
Instances dialog box.
Enables you to select the columns to be displayed. For
details, see "Select Columns Dialog Box" on page 443.
Enables you to set the sort order of the CI instances. For
details, see "Sort Column Content Dialog Box" on page 443.
Click Find to display the Find toolbar.
Click Send Mail to send the table data in an email.
Page 71 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Choose the export format for the table data. The available
options are:
l
Excel. The table data is formatted as an .xls (Excel) file
that can be displayed in a spreadsheet.
l
PDF. The table data is exported in PDF format.
Note: When exporting to PDF, select a reasonable
number of columns to display to ensure that the report is
legible.
l
CSV. The table data is formatted as a comma-separated
values (CSV) text file that can be displayed in a
spreadsheet.
Note: For the CSV formatted table data to display
correctly, the comma (,) must be defined as the list
separator. In Windows, to verify or modify the list
separator value, open Regional Options from the Control
Panel, and on the Numbers tab ensure that the comma is
defined as the List Separator value.
l
XML. The table data is formatted as an XML file that can
be opened in a text or XML editor.
Tip: To extract HTML code from the report:
Rows per page
n
Save the file as HTML
n
Open the file in an HTML editor
n
Copy the relevant table into the target file
Select the number of rows to be displayed on each page. You
can also manually enter value for the number of rows per
page.
Click to navigate through the results page by page or to jump
to the first or last page.
<Element Instances>
The CI instances found for the selected TQL query node. You
can double-click an instance to open the Configuration Item
Properties dialog box for that CI.
<Element instances shortcut
menu>
For details, see "IT Universe Manager Shortcut Menu" on
page 231.
Display Label
The name of the CI instance as it appears in the topology
map.
Page 72 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Element Layout Preview Dialog Box
This dialog box displays the attributes selected in the Element Layout tab of the Query Node
Properties dialog box to be included in the query results for the selected element.
To access
Click the Preview button
Properties dialog box.
from the Element Layout tab of the Query Node
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Attributes Mode
Displays the Attributes condition selected in the Element Layout tab of
the Query Node Properties dialog box.
CI Type
Displays the CIT of the selected query node or relationship.
Excluded Attributes
Displays the attributes appearing in the Excluded Attributes pane in
the Element Layout tab of the Query Node Properties dialog box.
Qualifier Marked
Attributes
Displays the qualifiers selected in the Element Layout tab of the Query
Node Properties dialog box.
Specific Attributes
Displays the attributes appearing in the Specific Attributes pane in the
Element Layout tab of the Query Node Properties dialog box.
Filter CI Instances Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to reduce the number of CI instances to be displayed in a list by
selecting a condition and a value for a specific CI.
To access
Click the Filter
button in the Element Instances dialog box.
Important
A description of the filter condition you defined appears above the table columns in
information the Element Instances dialog box. For example, the following illustration shows
that a filter condition was created to display only CI instances whose CI type is
Windows.
Page 73 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Relevant
tasks
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Attribute
Displays all the attributes of the CI type to which the CI belongs.
Condition
Select the required operator. For details, see "Attribute Operator Definitions" on
page 44.
NOT
Select to filter the results by the negation of a condition and value.
Value
Select or enter the required value.
Join Relationship Condition Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define the connection between two query nodes using a join
relationship.
To access
In Enrichment Manager or Impact Analysis Manager, click the Add
in the Add Join Relationship dialog box.
Relevant tasks
button
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference
Guide.
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
<Selected A selected query node. The first attribute applies to <end_1>.
query
node1>
Page 74 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
<Selected A selected query node. The second attribute applies to <end_2>.
query
node2>
Operator
Select one of the following operators:
l
Equal. The system checks whether two selected attributes are equal.
l
Not equal. The system checks whether two selected attributes are not equal.
l
Sub string. The system checks whether the value of the first attribute is a
substring of the value of the second attribute.
l
Sub string ignore case. The system checks whether the value of the first
attribute is a substring of the value of the second attribute regardless of the
string's case.
Important: When using the operator Not equal, ensure that both sides of the join
relationship have a limited result size. It is recommended to define more specific
conditions so as not to overload the system with large results.
Layout Settings Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to determine which attributes are used in the calculation of the TQL
query when using the UCMDB API. For details, see "RTSM (HP Universal CMDB) Web Service
API" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide.
To access
Click Advanced layout settings in the Query Node/Relationship Properties
dialog box in Enrichment Manager or Impact Analysis Manager.
Important
Since this option is only relevant when querying the CMDB API, the query results
information in the user interface are not impacted by the attributes you select in this dialog
box.
Relevant
tasks
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
User interface elements are described below:
Page 75 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Attribute name
The name of the attribute.
Calculate
Select this check box to include the attribute in the query's calculation.
Query Node/Relationship Properties Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define the attribute conditions for the selected TQL query
node/relationship.
To
access
To access in Enrichment Manager, Impact Analysis Manager, and the Modeling
Studio:
In the editing pane, right-click the required query node and select Query
Node/Relationship Properties.
Note: If you are using Enrichment Manager, select Query mode at the top of the
editing pane to display the Query Node Properties option.
To access in DFM:
1. To access from the Adapter Definition tab, select an adapter. Click the
Edit
Input Query button to the right of the Input Query box to open the Input Query
Editor.
2. Right-click the required query node/relationship and select Query Node
Properties or Relationship Properties.
Relevant
tasks
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Element
name
Page 76 of 446
Description
(Optional) The Element name box contains the name of the selected query
node/relationship. By default, the CI type is assigned as the element's name. You
can rename a TQL query node in the Element name box giving it a unique label. This
can be helpful when there is more than one query node of the same CI type in the
TQL query.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Element
type
Displays the CI type of the selected query node. If you want to change the query
node type to a child of the original type, select a subtype from the drop-down list.
Note:
l
If you have already defined a complex type condition for the query node, the
condition is lost when you change the query node type.
l
This feature is only available in the Modeling Studio.
Include
Select to display both the selected CI and its children in the topology map.
subtypes
Note: This feature is only available in Enrichment Manager and Impact Analysis
Manager.
Query
Result
Click Query Result to display a topology map of the TQL query showing the number
of instances of each query node/relationship.
Note: This feature is only available in the Modeling Studio.
Show
element
in query
results
Select Show element in query results to display the selected TQL query node in
the editing pane. When this option is cleared, a Hidden in Query Results indicator
appears to the right of the selected TQL query node in the editing pane.
Any query results pertaining to that TQL query node are not displayed in the topology
map. This can be useful when certain relationships or TQL query nodes are required
to build the query but are not needed in the results. For example, Windows are
connected to the IP Subnet by defining specific IP Addresses, but in any query
results you may want to view the IP Address elements only and not the Windows
elements.
Attribute Tab
This area enables you to create an expression defining conditions that restrict the number of query
nodes that appear in the query. You can add an attribute condition to a query node or relationship
and filter the query results.
Page 77 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
To access
Click the Attribute tab in the Query Node/Relationship Properties dialog
box.
Important
information
This tab is not available for calculated relationships.
Relevant tasks
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference
Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Add the attribute condition you have defined.
Delete an attribute definition.
Move a selected row up.
Move a selected row down.
Display the criteria in a popup dialog box.
Advanced
layout
settings
Opens the Layout Settings dialog box which enables you to determine which
attributes are used in the calculation of the TQL query when querying the
RTSM using third-party or custom tools.
Note: This feature appears only in Enrichment Manager and Impact Analysis
Manager.
And/Or
Click inside the And/Or field and select either And or Or to link multiple
conditions.
Attribute
name
Select an attribute from the drop-down list.
Brackets
Click inside the Brackets box to display a list of brackets you can use to build
more complex, logical statements.
Page 78 of 446
Note: When you select one of the following attribute types: float, double, or
long, the In operator is not available.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Criteria
Contains the attribute condition definition as defined in the Element Instances
dialog box.
Default Value
For parameterized attributes, enter a default value for the parameter.
Not
Select NOT if you want the condition statement to do the opposite of what is
defined.
Note: If you select NOT, query results do not include data from the CI
instances that were not assigned a value. For example, your system contains
three nodes: Node1 is assigned the value A, Node2 is assigned the value B
and Node3 is not assigned a value. You create a query to retrieve all nodes that
are equal to A and select NOT; the results of your query only include Node2
because Node3 is not assigned a value.
Operator
Select the required operator. For details, see "Attribute Operator Definitions" on
page 44.
Note: When you select one of the following attribute types: float, double, or
long, the In operator is not available.
Parameterized Select Yes to define a parameterized value for the attribute. Select No to
define a fixed value for the attribute.
Note: This feature is only available in the Modeling Studio.
Parameter
Name
If you are defining a parameterized value for the attribute, you must enter the
parameter name.
Note: This feature is only available in the Modeling Studio.
Value
Enter or select the value of the attribute. The Value options vary according to
the attribute type you select.
Note: You can paste a copied value into the window by pressing CTRL+V on
the keyboard.
Cardinality Tab
In this area, you can define a relationship cardinality, which enables you to define how many CI
instances you expect to have at the end of a relationship in your query result.
To access
Page 79 of 446
Click the Cardinality tab in the Query Node Properties dialog box.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Important
Select the required relationship to which the selected query node is attached.
information Then define the lower and upper limits for including the query node at the other end
of the relationship in the query results.
You can define relationship conditions that enable the relationship's connecting
query node to be included in the TQL query results by creating an expression
defining that condition. For an example, see "Example of a Relationship
Condition" on next page.
Note: This tab only appears when a query node is selected.
Relevant
tasks
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Add the cardinality definition you have defined.
Delete a cardinality definition from the Cardinality area.
Move a selected row up.
Move a selected row down.
Display the criteria in a popup dialog box.
Inserts 1 in the Min box and * in the Max box.
Note: Only relevant for the Modeling Studio.
Inserts 0 in the Min box and * in the Max box.
Note: Only relevant for the Modeling Studio.
And/Or
Click inside the And/Or field and select either And or Or to link multiple
conditions.
Brackets
Click inside the Brackets box to display a list of brackets you can use to
build more complex, logical statements.
Page 80 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Criteria
Contains the cardinality condition definition as defined in the Element
Instances Dialog Box.
Max
Enter the value that defines the upper limits for including the query node
at the other end of the relationship in the query results.
Note: You can use an asterisk (*) in the Max box to represent an infinite
value.
Min
Enter the value that defines the lower limits for including the query node
at the other end of the relationship in the query results.
For example, if <end_1> is IpAddress and <end_2> is Windows,
entering 1 in the Min box and asterisk (*) in the Max box instructs the
system to retrieve only those IP Addresses that are connected to at
least one Windows operating system. (The asterisk indicates an infinite
value.) Entering 3 in the Min box and asterisk (*) in the Max box
instructs the system to retrieve only those Windows operating systems
that are connected to at least three IP Addresses.
Query Node
Select the required relationship to which the selected query node is
attached. The list contains all the relationships that are linked to the
selected query node.
Not
Select NOT if you want the condition statement to do the opposite of
what is defined.
Note: If you select NOT, query results do not include data from the CI
instances that were not assigned a value. For example, your system
contains three nodes: Node1 is assigned the value A, Node2 is
assigned the value B and Node3 is not assigned a value. You create a
query to retrieve all nodes that are equal to A and select NOT; the
results of your query only include Node2 because Node3 is not assigned
a value.
Example of a Relationship Condition
The example of relationship conditions is based on the following TQL query:
Page 81 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
In the Relationship Cardinality dialog box, the following relationship conditions are defined for the
query:
l
Containment – Min: 2, Max: 4
l
Membership – Min: 1, Max: *
Using the OR operator, the definitions appear in the Cardinality section, as follows:
l
[Containment (Node, IP Address)] OR [Membership (IP Subnet, Node)]
means that the node must either have between two and four IP Addresses OR be a member of
the IP Subnet.
Using the AND operator, the definitions appear in the Cardinality section, as follows:
l
[Containment (Node, IP Address)] AND [Membership (IP Subnet, Node)]
means that the node must have between two and four IP Addresses AND also be a member of
the IP Subnet.
Element Type Tab
This area enables you to specify subtype conditions for the selected query node or relationship.
To access
Click the Element Type tab in the Query Node/Relationship Properties
dialog box.
Important
information
This tab is only available in the Modeling Studio.
Relevant tasks
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
l
"Define a Complex Type Condition - Scenario" on page 37
This tab is not available for calculated relationships.
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
Page 82 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
<Legend>
Indicates the icons displayed next to the subtypes based on the
selected conditions:
l
Include the subtype without its descendants.
l
Include the subtype with its descendants.
l
Exclude the subtype without its descendants.
l
Exclude the subtype with its descendants.
CI
When Customize subtypes is selected, the CI Types pane displays a
Types/Relationships tree with all subtypes of the selected CI type (for relationships, the
pane
Relationships pane displays a tree with all subtypes of the selected
relationship). After selecting conditions in Conditions pane, click the
Preview button
Conditions pane
to open the Conditions Preview dialog box.
For details, see "Conditions Pane" below.
Customize subtypes Select Customize subtypes to set a complex type condition. Select the
required subtypes from the tree in the CI Types/Relationships pane and
select conditions for them in the Conditions pane, as described below.
Element type
Select Element type to set a simple type condition. If you want to
include all subtypes of the selected CI type, select the Include
subtypes check box. If you do not want to include all subtypes, clear
the check box.
Conditions Pane
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Apply this condition Select this check box to apply the specified condition for the selected CI
recursively on all
type to all of that CI type's descendants, recursively.
subtypes of
<selected CI type>
By CI types
Select By CI types to include or exclude all instances of the selected CI
type in the query results.
By qualifiers
Select By qualifiers to include or exclude instances of the selected CI
type with specific qualifiers in the query results. A popup appears with a
list of qualifiers. Select the required qualifiers for the selected subtype.
For details on the qualifiers, see "Qualifier Tab" on page 86.
Page 83 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Condition
Select a condition for the selected CI type. The following options are
available:
l
None. No condition is selected for this CI type. Instances of this CI
type and all its descendants are included in the query results, unless
a parent CI type of this CI type was selected for exclusion and the
Apply recursively check box was selected.
l
Include <selected subtype> in the query. Includes instances of
the selected CI type in the query results (according to the condition
selected). An example of a situation where this option is relevant is
where a parent of the CI type was selected to be excluded and the
Apply recursively check box was selected. You can select certain
subtypes to be included, so the query results exclude all subtypes of
the parent CI type except for the specified ones.
l
Exclude <selected subtype> from the query. Excludes instances
of the selected CI type from the query results (according to the
condition selected).
Element Layout Tab
This area enables you to select the attribute values returned in the query results for the selected
query node or relationship.
To access
Click the Element Layout tab in the Query Node/Relationship Properties dialog
box.
Important
When you make a selection of the attributes to include in the query results for a
information particular CIT, the selection also applies to all of its descendant CITs. You can
manually exclude specific attributes for descendant CITs in the Conditions pane.
This option is only relevant when querying the CMDB API. The query results in
the user interface are not impacted by the attributes you select in this dialog box.
This tab is only available in the Modeling Studio.
This tab is not available for calculated relationships.
Relevant
tasks
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
l
"Define a Complex Type Condition - Scenario" on page 37
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
Page 84 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
<Legend>
Indicates the icons displayed next to the subtypes based on the
selected attributes condition:
l
Include all attributes for this subtype.
l
Include only the selected attributes for this subtype.
CI
When Select attributes for layout is selected, the CI Types pane
Types/Relationships displays a tree with all subtypes of the selected CI type (for
pane
relationships, the Relationships pane displays a tree with all subtypes of
the selected relationship). After selecting conditions in Conditions pane,
click the Preview button
box.
to open the Element Layout Preview dialog
Conditions pane
For details, see "Conditions Pane" below.
No attributes
If you select No attributes, no attribute values are returned in the query
results for the selected query node or relationship.
Select attributes for
layout
If you select Select attributes for layout, you can select the attributes
to be included in the query results for the selected query node or
relationship.
Conditions Pane
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Attributes condition
Select one of the following options:
Attributes with the
following qualifiers
l
None. No attributes are included in the query results for the selected
element.
l
All. All attributes defined for the selected element are included in the
query results.
l
Specific Attributes. Only the selected attributes are included in the
query results for the selected element.
You can include attributes with specific qualifiers. Click the ellipsis
button to open a dialog box with the available qualifiers and select the
required qualifiers.
Note: This feature only appears when you select Specific Attributes
for the Attributes condition.
Available Attributes
Page 85 of 446
Displays all of the available attributes for the selected element.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Excluded Attributes
When All is selected as the Attributes condition, you can exclude
selected attributes by moving them into the Excluded Attributes pane.
When Specific Attributes is selected as the Attributes condition for a
CIT that has inherited an attribute selection from its parent CIT, you can
exclude specific attributes from the selection by moving them to the
Excluded Attributes pane.
Alternatively, if you select attributes with selected qualifiers for a CIT,
you can exclude some attributes from that selection by moving then to
the Excluded Attributes pane.
You can move attributes into and out of the pane using the arrow
buttons.
Exclude Specific
Attributes
Select this check box to enable the Available Attributes and Excluded
Attributes panes and the arrow buttons.
Note: This feature only appears when you select All for the Attributes
condition.
Specific Attributes
Displays the attributes to be included in the query results for the
selected element. Move attributes into and out of the pane using the
arrow buttons.
Note: This feature only appears when you select Specific Attributes
for the Attributes condition.
Qualifier Tab
This area enables you to define qualifier conditions for the selected query node or relationship. For
example, you can use a qualifier to define a CIT as abstract, meaning you cannot create instances
from it.
To access
Click the Qualifier tab in the Query Node/Relationship Properties dialog
box.
Important
information
By default, multiple selection links the conditions with the OR operator.
Page 86 of 446
Note: This tab is only available in the Enrichment Manager and Impact
Analysis Manager.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Relevant tasks
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference
Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (AZ)
Description
ABSTRACT_
CLASS
You cannot create instances of this CIT.
ALLOW_
VOLATILITY
Used to mark attributes that enable minor deviations to their value. For
example, there is probably no need to report a small disk size change (from
8.00008 to 8.00009 GB).
By default, ALLOW_VOLATILITY is enabled for the following numeric or
date attributes only:
l
CIT: Node
n
MemorySize
n
SwapMemorySize
These attributes also include comparable and static qualifiers.
l
CIT: Host
n
l
CIT: CPU
n
l
HostLastBootTime
CpuClockSpeed
CIT: Filesystem
n
Disk_size
For details of this qualifier's attributes and the procedure for activating and
deactivating this feature, see "The ALLOW_VOLATILITY Qualifier" on page
29.
BLE_LINK_
CLASS
Page 87 of 446
A relationship that has been assigned this qualifier is loaded by an online BLE
engine TQL and becomes part of the Dashboard status calculations.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element (AZ)
Description
CALCULATED_ This qualifier is assigned to calculated relationships
LINK
CONTAINER
This qualifier is assigned to relationships that signify a containment
relationship, such as Membership, Composition, Containment.
HIDDEN_
CLASS
Instances of this CIT do not appear anywhere in the application.
ID_CLASS_
NAME_
OVERRIDE
Indicates that the class ID is calculated based on another class.
ITU_HIDDEN_
CLASS
Instances of this CIT do not appear in the topology map application.
MAJOR_APP
CI types that are assigned this qualifier appear in the Application Breakdown
overview report.
MODELING_
ENABLED
Enables a CIT to act as a model in Modeling Studio. For details, see
"Business CI Models" on page 255.
NETWORK_
DEVICES
A qualifier common to all the CI types that represent a network device. It can
be used for TQL queries related to network devices and serves as a
replacement for CI types in a query.
Negate
Qualifiers
If this check box is selected, then the element is included in the query results
only if it has no qualifier in the list of selected qualifiers.
RANDOM_
GENERATED_
ID_CLASS
Indicates that the RTSM ID of the CIs is randomly generated rather than
being based on the key attributes of the class.
READ_ONLY_
CLASS
This CIT cannot be edited.
RECURSIVE_
DELETE
Relevant for relationships. When the CI at one end of a relationship is
deleted, the system checks the CI at the other end of the relationship. If it is
not related to any other CIs, it is also deleted.
TRACK_LINK_
CHANGES
Changes that occur in the specified relationship appear in Change reports.
Identity Tab
This area enables you to filter the TQL query results according to the element ID of the instances
found for the selected TQL query node.
To access
Page 88 of 446
Click the Identity tab in the Query Node Properties dialog box.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Important
Move the required element from the Optional identities pane on the left to the
information Selected identities pane on the right to define what you want included in the TQL
query results using the left and right arrows.
Note: This tab only appears when a query node is selected.
Relevant
tasks
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
The following elements are included (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
<Toolbar>
For descriptions of the toolbar buttons, see "Element Instances Dialog
Box" on page 70.
Optional identities
pane
Displays all the instances found for the selected TQL query node.
Selected identities
pane
Displays the elements that are used to define what should be included in
the TQL query results.
Refine Query Node Type Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to change the CI type of a TQL query node after you have created a
TQL query.
To access
In Impact Analysis Manager or Enrichment Manager, right-click the required query
node and select Refine Query Node Type.
Note: If you are using Enrichment Manager, select Query mode at the top of the
editing pane to display the Refine Query Node Type option.
Important
information
Page 89 of 446
You can change the CI type to a type from one of the CI type's children, if one
exists. If no such CI type exists, this option does not appear.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Relevant
tasks
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
Select Relationship Type Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to select the type of TQL relationship to be created.
To access
In the editing pane of Impact Analysis Manager, Enrichment Manager, and the
Modeling Studio, click the Create Relationship
button in the toolbar and
draw a line between two query nodes. The Select Relationship Type dialog box
opens automatically.
Important
information
Relevant
tasks
Select one of the following relationship types:
l
Regular Relationship. For details, see "Add/Edit Relationship Dialog Box"
on page 59.
l
Join Relationship. For details, see "Add/Edit Join Relationship Dialog Box"
on page 56.
l
Compound Relationship. For details, see "Add/Edit Compound
Relationship Dialog Box" on page 53.
l
Calculated Relationship. For details, see "Add/Edit Calculated Relationship
Dialog Box" on page 51.
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
Subgraph Condition Definition Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to create conditions that restrict the number of query nodes that appear
in the query.
Page 90 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
To access
In Impact Analysis Manager and Enrichment Manager, click Condition
Add Triplet dialog box.
In the Modeling Studio, click Condition
in the
in the Subgraph Definition dialog box.
Important
Contains the following tabs:
information
l Attribute. Enables you to define attribute conditions for query nodes and
relationships. See a description of the elements in the Attribute tab in the table
below.
Relevant
tasks
l
Qualifiers (for Enrichment Manager and Impact Analysis Manager). Enables
you to define qualifier conditions for the selected query node or relationship.
For details, see "Qualifier Tab" on page 86.
l
Element Type (for the Modeling Studio). Enables you to define subtype
conditions for the selected query node or relationship. For details, see
"Element Type Tab" on page 82.
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Add the subgraph condition definition.
Delete the subgraph condition definition.
Move a selected row up.
Move a selected row down.
View the subgraph condition definition.
Page 91 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Advanced Opens the Layout Settings dialog box which enables you to determine which
layout
attributes are used in the calculation when querying the RTSM using third-party or
settings
custom tools.
Note: This option is only relevant when accessing the dialog box from the Modeling
Studio.
And/Or
Click inside the And/Or field and select either And or Or to link multiple conditions.
Attribute
name
Choose an attribute from the list.
Brackets
Click inside the Brackets box to display a list of brackets you can use to build more
complex, logical statements.
Criteria
Contains the attribute condition definition as defined in the Element Instances
Dialog Box.
Element
Name
Contains the CIT selected from the Source and Target lists.
Not
Select NOT if you want the condition statement to do the opposite of what is
defined.
Note: If you select NOT, query results do not include data from the CI instances
that were not assigned a value. For example, let us assume that your system
contains three nodes. Node1 is assigned the value A, Node2 is assigned the value
B and Node3 is not assigned a value. If you create a query in which you want to
retrieve all nodes that are equal to A and you select NOT, the results of your query
only include Node2 because Node3 is not assigned a value.
Operator
Select the required operator. For details, see "Attribute Operator Definitions" on
page 44.
Value
Enter or select the value of the attribute. The Value options vary according to the
attribute type you select.
Subgraph Definition Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to create a graph that represents additional TQL query data related to a
specific CI.
Page 92 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
To access
To access in Enrichment Manager, Impact Analysis Manager, and the Modeling
Studio:
In the editing pane, right-click the required query node and select Subgraph
Definition.
Note: If you are using Enrichment Manager, select Query mode at the top of the
editing pane to display the Subgraph Definition option.
To access in Adapter Management in DFM:
1. Select an adapter in the Resources pane.
2. In the Adapter Definition tab, click the
Edit Input Query button to the
right of the Input Query box to open the Input Query Editor.
3. Right-click the required query node and select Subgraph Definition.
Important
information
The following icon is displayed next to the query node for which you define a
subgraph:
Relevant
tasks
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
l
"Subgraph Definition" on page 28
l
"Create a Subgraph Definition – Scenario" on page 38
See also
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Add a subgraph definition. In Enrichment Manager and Impact Analysis
Manager, click to open the Add Triplet dialog box. In the Modeling Studio, click to
add a row to the table.
Delete a subgraph definition.
Edit a subgraph definition. In Impact Analysis Manager and Enrichment
Manager, click to open the Edit Triplet dialog box. In the Modeling Studio, click to
open the Subgraph Condition Definition dialog box.
Page 93 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element
(A-Z)
Depth
Description
A number that represents the longest path (that is, the maximum connecting
query nodes) allowed between two CIs in the RTSM that should be included in
the DFM process.
Default: 5
Element
condition
exists
A green asterisk appears next to either the source, relationship, or target in the
subgraph definition if an attribute condition has been defined for one of them in
the Subgraph Condition Definition dialog box. For details, see "Subgraph
Condition Definition Dialog Box" on page 90.
Relationship The relationship selected connecting the source to the target query node.
Relationship The direction of the relationship selected, indicating which query node is
Direction
dependent on the other.
Source
The required source query node selected.
Target
The required target query node selected.
User Preferences Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to reset system preferences.
To access
Select Tools > User Preferences or click the Configure User Preferences
button
in the Status Bar.
Important
All the preferences you select (such as whether to display certain wizard pages or
information warning message preferences) are stored in the system. This dialog box enables
you to reset those preferences.
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
Page 94 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
<Left pane>
Select the preferences page to edit. The following options are available:
l
Wizard Preferences. Enables you to define whether to hide or display
certain wizard pages.
l
Optional Messages Preferences. Enables you to define whether to hide or
display certain messages.
l
Discovery Preferences. Enables you to define:
l
n
Whether to hide or display certain Discovery warning messages
n
The required default external editor (such as Notepad)
n
Whether to use Basic or Advanced Discovery mode
General. Enables you to define general application preferences.
<Preferences
list>
The list of warning messages and their user-selected preferences.
Filter by
Enter a search word to filter the list of options.
Reset All
Click to reset all the preferences to their default values.
Reset Page
Click to reset the selected preference to its default value.
Page 95 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Troubleshooting and Limitations
This section describes troubleshooting and limitations for Topology Query Language.
l
If you get an error while working with views in the Modeling managers, when adding CIs to the
CMDB, or when updating existing CIs, and the error log indicates that objects are missing in the
database, access the JMX console and run the following methods under service = DAL
services:
n rebuildModelViews
n
l
rebuildModelDBSchemaAndViews
For TQL queries to be valid, they must comply with certain restrictions.
Understanding Validation Restrictions
For Impact Analysis, Discovery, and Enrichment TQL query types to be valid, they must comply
with the following restrictions:
n
Unique Names. TQL query elements must have unique names.
n
Self Relationships. A TQL query must not contain self relationships, that is, a relationship
must not lead from a query node to itself, as the following example illustrates:
n
Cyclic Graph. The TQL query structure cannot be a closed circle, as shown in the following
example:
Page 96 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
n
Separate Query Nodes and Groups. All the TQL query nodes must be linked to one
another, that is, the TQL query cannot contain separate query nodes or groups, as the
following example illustrates:
Impact Analysis TQL Query Validation
Impact Analysis TQL queries must also comply with the following restrictions:
n
Number of query nodes. An Impact Analysis TQL query must consist of at least two query
nodes.
n
Trigger and affected query nodes must be connected. There must be a path of
relationships from the triggered query node to the affected query nodes.
n
Selecting query nodes to function as Impact Analysis triggers. When selecting query
nodes to function as Impact Analysis triggers, the query nodes must comply with the
following restrictions:
o
You can select more than one query node as a trigger. However, you cannot define a query
node both as affected and as a trigger.
Page 97 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
o
If a query node has a relationship whose minimum limit is 0 (meaning that one of its ends
does not necessarily have a query node linked to it), the query node that is linked to its
other end cannot be a root cause query node (because it may or may not exist in the TQL
query). For details about minimum limits, see "Cardinality Tab" on page 79. For example,
Configuration Item cannot be either a root cause or affected query node because it is
connected to the query node with a Min limit of 0.
Note: A query node that is hidden cannot be a root cause or an affected query node.
n
The connection between trigger and affected query nodes. The trigger query node and
affected query nodes you define must be connected by a path of relationships from the
triggered query node to the affected query nodes.
Enrichment TQL Query Validation
Enrichment TQL queries must comply with the following restriction:
n
Required elements. You cannot perform Enrichment on a non-required query node, that is, a
query node that does not necessarily appear in the TQL query results.
Example 1. In this example, the TQL query results can be either A and B or A and C.
Therefore, you cannot add an Enrichment query node to query nodes B or C because they are
not required elements. You can add an Enrichment query node to query node A because it
always appears in the TQL query results. For details on how to add Enrichment query nodes
and relationships, see "Add Enrichment Query Nodes and Relationships to an Enrichment
TQL Query" on page 416.
Page 98 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 1: Topology Query Language
Example 2. In this example, both A and B are required elements that always appear in the
TQL query results. Only C is not a required element because it has a cardinality of 0.
Therefore, you cannot add an Enrichment query node to it.
Page 99 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 2
Impact Modeling
This chapter includes:
Impact Modeling Overview
101
Impact Layer
102
Impact Rules
103
Propagation Reversal
104
Calculated Relationship Types
105
Creating Views Based on the Impact Model
106
Page 100 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 2: Impact Modeling
Impact Modeling Overview
The impact model enables you to determine the direction of the propagation of the IT infrastructure
CIs in your business world. The direction of the impact is not always the same direction as the
physical relationships taken from the CI Type model.
The impact model uses the impact layer to change the propagation direction. The impact layer is
used in the applications where propagation occurs. You change the direction of the impact using the
impact layer, regardless of the direction of the physical relationships.
All KPI propagation is affected by the impact model. For details on KPI propagation in Service
Health, see "Propagation Rules" in the BSM User Guide. For details on KPI propagation in Service
Level Management, see "Propagation Rules" in the BSM User Guide.
Page 101 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 2: Impact Modeling
Impact Layer
The impact layer changes the direction of the impact. The impact layer separates the impact
direction from the CI Type model, creating an independent layer on top of the CI Type model. This
means that components affected by the impact model are no longer relying on the physical
relationships as defined in the CI Type model. As a result, the impact direction is no longer
necessarily identical to the direction of the physical relationships in the CI Type model.
Page 102 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 2: Impact Modeling
Impact Rules
The impact layer consists of impact rules. The impact rules are defined in the CI Type Manager. For
details, see "Triplets Page" on page 397.
An impact rule is defined by one or more triplets. Each triplet is defined by the following
components:
l
One source CI type
l
One target CI type
l
A physical relationship type (for example, Containment) that links the two CI types
l
The required impact direction. The direction of the impact can be identical to or opposite from the
direction of the physical relationship between the source and target CIs.
BSM implements the impact layer by creating calculated relationships that are defined by impact
rules. Once one of the triplets fulfills the impact rule condition, BSM automatically creates the
calculated relationship based on the triplet definition.
Since calculated relationships are defined by physical relationships from within the class model,
their lifetime is determined by the lifetime of the physical relationships defined in the impact rule.
When the physical relationship in the class model is removed, the corresponding calculated
relationship is removed from all view results as well.
Note: If you create a new CI type or relationship in the CI Type Manager, you need to define
the required triplets. For example, to enable the impact model to properly affect KPI
propagation. If the triplets are not defined, the required KPIs are not included in the Dashboard
views and SLA agreements.
You can use calculated relationships to create TQL queries just like any other relationship in the CI
Type model. This enables you to base Enrichment rules, Impact rules, and views on calculated
relationships. Calculated relationships affect the results of all TQLs that use that calculated
relationships since calculated relationships are part of the class model.
Example of an Impact Rule Definition:
Page 103 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 2: Impact Modeling
Propagation Reversal
The following example illustrates a scenario in which propagation is reversed.
Based on the impact rules defined in the CI Type Manager, the impact is propagating from the
Business2 CI to Business1, the same direction as the physical relationship that is connecting the
Running Software CI to Business2.
According to the direction of the physical relationship between the Running Software CI and the
Node, the Running Software CI should impact the Node.
But based on the following impact rule, a calculated relationship is automatically created and BSM
reverses the impact of the propagation.
The impact is now propagated from the Node to the Running Software.
Page 104 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 2: Impact Modeling
Calculated Relationship Types
There is one out-of-the-box calculated relationship called Impacted By. Impacted By contains two
subtypes, each one representing a different type of dependency relationship (complete dependency
vs. potential dependency.)
l
Impacted by (Directly). Represents the fact that one CI that is linked to another CI using an
Impacted By (Directly) relationship is part of that CI. You use an Impacted By (Directly)
relationship for those CIs that you want to see in your model. The ownership of the two CIs may
be the same, but this is not always the case.
l
Impacted By (Potentially). Represents the fact that one CI consumes the products of another.
CIs that are linked by an Impacted By (Potentially) relationship are not part of that model, but are
listed as related CIs. For details, see "Model Editor" on page 290.
Page 105 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 2: Impact Modeling
Creating Views Based on the Impact Model
As a best practice, you should use Modeling Studio to create a view of calculated relationships
based on a model. Modeling Studio enables you to create perspective based views that use
calculated relationships instead of physical relationships. For details, see "Modeling Studio" on
page 246.
For details on how to create and edit models, see "Model Editor" on page 290.
Note: For an in-depth description of the Impact Modeling Solution, see "Best Practices for
Modeling" on page 181.
Page 106 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 3
Create a URL for a Direct Link
This chapter includes:
Generate a Direct Link – Overview
108
Generate a Direct Link – Scenario
109
Create a Direct Link to a Template with Parameter Values
110
Encrypt the Password of a Direct Link Using the JMX Console
111
Generate a Direct Link User Interface
112
Page 107 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
Generate a Direct Link – Overview
Direct Links enables you to create a URL that guides another user to a specific target view or CI in
BSM.
You can create a URL that:
l
Opens a specific BSM view or CI directly in BSM. This enables users to retrieve information
from BSM without being located in the BSM context.
Note: To open a specific view or CI directly in BSM, use the Open in context links option.
For details, see "Select Command Page" on page 113.
l
Enables integration with BSM:
n
If you create a URL using the Embedded links option, the URL takes you first to the BSM
login page. After you enter your login name and password, the target page opens in your
browser.
Note: To open the target page in your browser, use the Embedded links option. For
details, see "Select Command Page" on page 113.
When you create a URL, you can:
l
Send the URL to an email recipient
l
Copy the URL to the clipboard
l
Test the URL to ensure that the target application page can be found
The user to whom you are sending the URL must have an account with sufficient privileges to open
the target page. You must apply the appropriate viewing and editing permissions to the users and
user groups that want to access the target view. You set permissions in Admin > Platform >
Users and Permissions, select a user or a group and select Permissions. For details, see "How
to Assign Permissions" in the BSM Platform Administration Guide.
Note: You can use Link to this Page function to open a target BSM page in your browser.
While the Link to this Page function enables you to access another application page in BSM,
it does not enable you to access a specific CI or view. For details, see "Linking to a Specific
Page" in the BSM Platform Administration Guide.
Page 108 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
Generate a Direct Link – Scenario
This scenario describes how to generate a direct link to email the URL of a specific CI to another
person.
Jane Harrison is a senior engineer in the ABC Software company. She has encountered a
problematic CI in a view she has created. She wants to inform Henry Jones, who is working with
the same view through HP ServiceCenter, about the problematic CI. Since the view Jane has
created contains many hundreds of CIs, she decides to email Henry the URL of the CI so that he
does not have to spend a lot of time searching for that specific CI.
In IT Universe Manager, Jane selects Generate Direct Link from the Edit menu. In the Select
Command page, she selects Open in context links and then the Show view option, and clicks
Next.
In the Direct Link Parameters — Show View page, she selects the view she created, the
problematic CI, and View topology as the mode in which Henry should open the CI. When the
URL is created, she emails Henry the link to the problematic CI.
For details, see "Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
Page 109 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
Create a Direct Link to a Template with Parameter
Values
This task describes how to create a direct link to a template by including the parameter values in the
URL.
1.
Create a Direct Link to a Template
In IT Universe Manager, select Edit >Generate Direct Link to run the Generate Direct Link
wizard. On the Select Command page, select Embedded links. Select Show view topology
from the list of options. On the Direct Link Parameters page, select the required template from
the drop-down list.
2.
Edit the URL
When the wizard finishes, click Copy URL and paste the URL into a text editor such as
Notepad.
Append the following text to the end of the URL:
&params=[parameter1=value1,parameter2=value2]
where parameter1 and parameter2 are the parameter names for the selected template and
value1 and value2 are the values you want to enter for the parameters.
Note: Any special characters must be entered using the URL encoding. In the above
example, the URL encoding for the [ character is %5B, the URL encoding for the ]
character is %5D, and the URL encoding for the comma is %2C. Thus, the actual text to
enter is:
&params=%5Bparameter1=value1%2Cparameter2=value2%5D
3.
Paste the URL into a Browser
Paste the URL into a browser. BSM opens to the selected template with the parameters
assigned the specified values.
Page 110 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
Encrypt the Password of a Direct Link Using the
JMX Console
This task describes how to encrypt the password contained within a direct link using the JMX
console.
To encrypt the password of a direct link using the JMX console:
1. Launch your Web browser and enter the following address: http://<server_name>:<port
number>/jmx-console, where <server_name> is the name of the machine on which HP
Universal CMDB is installed.
2. Under UCMDB-UI, locate UCMDB Integration.
3. Under encryptString, enter your password in the Value box.
4. Click Invoke to view the encrypted string.
Page 111 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
Generate a Direct Link User Interface
This section includes:
l
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" below
l
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" below
Generate Direct Link Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to create a URL to send to users so that they can access BSM.
To
access
From the Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling main menu, select Edit >
Generate Direct Link. After you configure the Direct Link parameters in the
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" below, click Finish in the Finish page.
Alternatively, click the Generate Direct Link to View button
toolbar in IT Universe Manager.
in the CI Selector
Relevant "Generate a Direct Link – Scenario" on page 109
tasks
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Advanced
Description
Enables you to build a direct link and choose specific elements such as views or
CIs, for the end user to access. For details, see "Generate Direct Link Wizard"
below.
Note: This feature is only relevant when accessing the Generate Direct Link
dialog box from the CI Selector toolbar in IT Universe Manager.
Copy URL
Copies the URL to the clipboard.
Description Describes the parameters that are included in the URL. For details on selecting
the parameters, see "Select Command Page" on next page.
Link URL
The created URL that accesses the specified BSM function.
Mail URL
Opens an email containing the URL of the link.
Test URL
Checks the URL to ensure that the specified application page can be found.
Generate Direct Link Wizard
This wizard enables you to create a URL that guides another user to a specific target view or CI in
BSM.
Page 112 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
To access
From theAdmin > RTSM Administration > Modeling main menu, select Edit
> Generate Direct Link.
Important
By default, this wizard is set to display a Welcome page. You can choose not to
information display the Welcome page by selecting the Do not show this page again check
box.
Relevant
tasks
"Generate a Direct Link – Scenario" on page 109
Wizard
map
The Generate Direct Link wizard contains:
"Select Command Page" (<Open in context links options> and <Embedded links
options>) > "Finish Page"
Select Command Page
This wizard page enables you to select the required parameters that must be added to the URL.
You can create two types of links:
l
Open in context links. Creates a URL that opens a specific view or CI directly in BSM without
having to be in the BSM context:
l
Embedded links. Creates a URL that enables you to embed an RTSM applet into external
applications.
Important
By default, this wizard is set to display a Welcome page. You can choose not to
information display the Welcome page by selecting the Do not show this page again
check box.
Wizard
map
The Generate Direct Link wizard contains:
See also
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on previous page
"Select Command Page" (<Open in context links options> and <Embedded
links options>) > "Finish Page"
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
<Left
pane>
A graphic illustration of the selected command.
CII Grid
Creates a URL that displays all the CI instances found in the RTSM for a selected
CI type and its children. For details, see "Direct Link Parameters – CII Grid Page"
on page 117.
Note: Available when you select the Embedded links option.
Page 113 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
UI Element
(A-Z)
CI Selector
Description
Creates a URL that embeds the CI Selector displaying the CIs of a selected view,
into external applications. For details, see "Direct Link Parameters – CI Selector
Page" on next page.
Note: Available when you select the Embedded links option.
CI Type
Selector
Creates a URL that embeds the CI type selector into external applications. For
details, see "Direct Link Parameters – CI Type Selector Page" on page 116.
Note: Available when you select the Embedded links option.
Description A description of the selected command.
Impact Map Creates a URL that embeds an impact map into an external application. For
details, see "Direct Link Parameters – Impact Map Page" on page 117.
Note: Available when you select the Embedded links option.
Model
Editor
Creates a URL that embeds the Model Editor into an external application,
highlighting the selected CIs in the CI Selector in the Model Editor. For details,
see "Direct Link Parameters – Model Editor" on page 118.
Note: Available when you select the Embedded links option.
Query
Editor
Creates a URL that embeds the Model Editor into an external application,
displaying the selected TQL query. For details, see "Direct Link Parameters –
Query Editor" on page 119.
Note: Available when you select the Embedded links option.
Related CIs Creates a URL that opens a topology map displaying the selected CI and its
immediate neighbors within the selected view. For details, see "Direct Link
Parameters – Related CIs Page" on page 120.
Note: Available when you select the Embedded links option.
Report
Viewer
Creates a URL that opens a specific report. For details, see "Direct Link
Parameters – Report Viewer Page" on page 120.
Note: Available when you select the Embedded links option.
Report
Viewer Saved
Report
Creates a URL that opens a saved topology or custom report. For details, see
"Direct Link Parameters – Report Viewer – Saved Report Page" on page 121.
Show CI
properties
Creates a URL that displays a CI's properties. For details, see "Direct Link
Parameters – Show CI Properties Page" on page 121.
Note: Available when you select the Embedded links option.
Note: Available when you select the Embedded links option.
Page 114 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
UI Element
(A-Z)
Show view
Description
Creates a URL that displays the selected view and optionally preselects a query
node in it. For details, see "Direct Link Parameters – Show View Page" on page
123.
Note: Available when you select the Open in context links option.
Show view
topology
Creates a URL that displays the topology map of the selected view and embeds it
in an external application. For details, see "Direct Link Parameters – Show View
Topology Page" on page 122.
Note: Available when you select the Embedded links option.
Start in
mode
Creates a URL that opens BSM at the selected page. For details, see "Direct Link
Parameters – Start in Mode Page" on page 124.
Note: Available when you select the Open in context links option.
Steps
The current step in the procedure.
View Editor Creates a URL that opens a specific view in the Pattern View Editor in Modeling
Studio. For details, see "Direct Link Parameters – View Editor Page" on page 122.
Note: Available when you select the Embedded links option.
Views
Selector
Creates a URL that embeds the View Selector in an external application, enabling
you to select and display a view in that application. For details, see "Direct Link
Parameters – Views Selector Page" on page 123.
Note: Available when you select the Embedded links option.
Direct Link Parameters – CI Selector Page
This wizard page enables you to create a URL that embeds the CI Selector displaying the CIs of a
selected view, into external applications.
Wizard map
"Select Command Page" (Embedded links > CI Selector) > "Finish Page"
Important
information
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Allow multi
selection
Allow single or multiple selection of CIs.
Page 115 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Selected view
Select the required view from which you want to select the required
CIs.
l
Click
to open the View Selector dialog box. Select the view you
want to appear in the CI Selector.
l
Click
to delete the selected view.
Direct Link Parameters – CI Type Selector Page
This wizard page enables you to create a URL to a hierarchical tree or list of selected CI types,
which can be embedded into an external application.
Important
information
Wizard map
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
"Select Command Page" (Embedded links > CI Type selector) > "Finish Page"
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
CI type selector
mode
View the selected CI types in either a hierarchical tree or list.
Invisible CITs (tree
only)
Select the CI types you do not want to appear in the tree.
Root CI Type (tree
only)
Selection mode
Page 116 of 446
l
Click
to open the CI Type Selector dialog box. Select the CI
types you want to appear in the tree.
l
Click
to delete the selected CI types.
Select the CI type you want to use as the root CI type in a hierarchical
tree.
l
Click
to open the CI Type Selector dialog box. Select the CI type
you want to use as the root CI type in the tree.
l
Click
to delete the selected CI type. The default is
Configuration Item.
Allow single or multiple selection of CI types.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Unselectable CITs
(tree only)
Select the CI types which cannot be selected in the tree.
Visible CITs (list
only)
l
Click
to open the CI Type Selector dialog box. Select the CI
types which cannot be selected in the tree.
l
Click
to delete the selected CI types.
Select the CI types which you want to appear in the CI type list.
l
Click
to open the CI Type Selector dialog box. Select the CI
types which you want to appear in the CI type list.
l
Click
to delete the selected CI types.
Note: If you choose to view the CITs in a list, then you are required to
select at least one CI type.
Direct Link Parameters – CII Grid Page
This wizard page enables you to display all of the CI instances found in the RTSM for selected CI
type, and its children.
Important
information
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
Wizard map
"Select Command Page" (Embedded links > CII Grid) > "Finish Page"
See also
"Element Instances Dialog Box" on page 70
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Class type
Select the required CI type.
l
Click
l
Click
to select the required CI type.
to clear the box.
Direct Link Parameters – Impact Map Page
This wizard page enables you to run an Impact Analysis rule defined in Impact Analysis Manager.
The URL you create enables you to embed a topology map showing a simulation of all the CIs that
are affected by the selected trigger CI for the selected severity and state. For details, see "Run
Impact Analysis Dialog Box" on page 240.
Page 117 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
Important
information
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
Wizard map
"Select Command Page" (Embedded links > Impact map) > "Finish Page"
See also
"IT Universe Manager" on page 191
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Filter
by CI
types
Rule
bundle
Select the CI types you do not want to appear in the impact analysis results.
l
Click
l
Click
to select the required CI types.
to delete the selected CI types.
Enables you to define where you can run Impact Analysis rules.
Severity Select the required severity from the drop-down list.
Note: The severity list was defined for the state in the System Type Manager. For
details, see "System Type Manager" on page 377.
For example, you can create an Impact rule in the Impact Analysis Manager (see the
"Impact Rules Definition Dialog Box" on page 366, that defines the severity of the
trigger query node as other than No Change. If you select a severity other than No
Change, for example, Plan, the condition is met and the simulated changes in the
system are triggered.
For details, see "Run Impact Analysis Dialog Box" on page 240.
Trigger
CIs
l
Click
to select the CIs that are used as the triggers in an impact map. These
CIs represent the simulated changes to be made to the system. Opens the CI
Selector dialog box. For details on how to use the CI Selector pane, see "CI
Selector" on page 139.
l
Click
to delete the selected CIs.
Direct Link Parameters – Model Editor
This wizard page enables you to embed the Model Editor into an external application, highlighting
the selected CIs in the CI Selector in the Model Editor.
Page 118 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
Important
information
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
Wizard map
"Select Command Page" (Embedded links > Model Editor) > "Finish Page"
See also
"Business CI Models" on page 255
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Model name
Select the model you want to display in the Model Editor.
Selected CI in
search
l
Click
to open the Select Model dialog box. Select the model you
want to appear in the Model Editor.
l
Click
to delete the selected model.
Select the CIs you want to appear highlighted in the CI Selector in the
Model Editor.
l
Click
to open the CI Selector.
l
Click
to delete the selected CIs.
Direct Link Parameters – Query Editor
This wizard page enables you to embed the Model Editor into an external application, displaying the
selected TQL query.
Important
information
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
Wizard map
"Select Command Page" (Embedded links > Query Editor) > "Finish Page"
See also
"Business CI Models" on page 255
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z) Description
Query name
Page 119 of 446
Select the model you want to display in the Model Editor.
l
Click
to open the Select Query dialog box. Select the query you
want to appear in the Model Editor.
l
Click
to delete the selected query.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
Direct Link Parameters – Related CIs Page
This wizard page enables you to embed into an external application, a topology map that displays a
specific CI, and all the CIs that are linked to it by a distance of no more than one relationship.
Important
information
Wizard map
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
"Select Command Page" (Embedded links > Related CIs) > "Finish Page"
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
CIs
Select the CI type you want to appear in the topology map.
Filter by CI
types
l
Click
box.
l
Click
to select the required CI types. Opens the CI Selector dialog
to delete the value in the CIs box.
Restrict the results of the topology map to related CIs of one or more CI
types.
Restrict to view
l
Click
l
Click
to select the required CI types.
to delete the value in the Filter by CI types box.
Restrict the results of the topology map to related CIs from a specific view.
l
Click
box.
l
Click
to select the required view. Opens the View Selector dialog
to delete the selected view in the Restrict results to view box.
Direct Link Parameters – Report Viewer Page
This wizard page enables you to create a URL that opens a specific report.
Important
information
Wizard map
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
"Select Command Page" (Embedded links > Report Viewer) > "Finish Page"
User interface elements are described below:
Page 120 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
UI Element
(A-Z)
Report type
Description
Select the required report type. For information about the different report types,
see "Reports" on page 330.
Direct Link Parameters – Report Viewer – Saved Report
Page
This wizard page enables you to create a URL that opens a saved topology or custom report.
Important
information
Wizard map
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
"Select Command Page" (Embedded links > Report Viewer - Saved Report) >
"Finish Page"
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Report
Select the required saved report.
l
Click
to open the Select Report dialog box. Select the required
topology or custom report.
l
Click
to delete the selected report.
For information about saved reports, see "Reports" on page 330.
Direct Link Parameters – Show CI Properties Page
This wizard page enables you to view basic information for an existing CI.
Important
information
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
Wizard map
"Select Command Page" (Embedded links > Show CI properties) > "Finish
Page"
See also
"Configuration Item Properties Dialog Box" on page 219
User interface elements are described below:
Page 121 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Source CI object ID
Select the required CI.
l
Click
to select the source CI and retrieve its object ID. Opens the
Select Source CI dialog box. For details, see "CI Selector" on page
139.
l
Click
to delete the value in the Source CI object ID box.
Direct Link Parameters – Show View Topology Page
This wizard page enables you to display the topology map of the selected view and embed it in an
external application.
Important
information
Wizard map
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
"Select Command Page" (Embedded links > Show view topology) > "Finish
Page"
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Show topology of
view
l
Click
to select the required view to be opened by the URL.
Opens the View Selector dialog box.
l
Click
box.
to delete the selected view in the Show topology of view
Direct Link Parameters – View Editor Page
This wizard page enables you to create a URL that opens a specific view in the Pattern View Editor
in Modeling Studio.
Important
information
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
Wizard map
"Select Command Page" (Embedded links > View Editor) > "Finish Page"
See also
"Building a Business View" on page 249
User interface elements are described below:
Page 122 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
View name
l
Click
to select the required view to be opened by the URL.
Opens the View Selector dialog box.
l
Click
to delete the selected view in the View name box.
Direct Link Parameters – Views Selector Page
This wizard page enables you to embed into an external application, the View Selector, that enables
you to select, and display a view in that application.
Important
information
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
Wizard map
"Select Command Page" (Embedded links > Views Selector) > "Finish Page"
See also
"Building a Business View" on page 249
Direct Link Parameters – Show View Page
This wizard page enables you to create a URL to a specific view and optionally select a specific
query node in that view. When the view opens, the CI you chose is selected in the view. The view
opens in IT Universe Manager.
Important
information
Wizard map
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
"Select Command Page" (Open in context links > Show view) > "Finish Page"
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (AZ)
Description
<Left pane>
A graphic illustration of the selected option.
Advanced pane
(visibility)
Hide or display the Advanced pane in IT Universe Manager.
Page 123 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Select CI from
view result
(Optional) Click to select a CI and retrieve its object ID. When the view
opens, the CI you chose is selected in the view.
Selected View
l
Click
to choose the CI you want selected in the target view and
retrieve its object ID. Opens the Select CI dialog box. For details, see "CI
Selector" on page 139.
l
Click
to delete the object ID for the selected CI in the Select CI from
view result box.
The target view to be opened by the URL.
View mode
l
Click
to select the target view to be opened by the URL. Opens the
Select View dialog box.
l
Click
to delete the selected view in the Selected view box.
The view options are:
l
View Topology. Displays an entire layer within a view.
l
Related in View. Displays the selected CI and its immediate neighbors
within the current view.
l
Related in CMDB. Displays the selected CI and its immediate neighbors
in the RTSM.
Direct Link Parameters – Start in Mode Page
This wizard page enables you to start the RTSM application at the selected page, for example, in
the Modeling Studio page.
Important
information
Wizard map
l
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see
"Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
l
Click Finish to close the wizard and create a URL. For details, see
"Generate Direct Link Dialog Box" on page 112.
"Select Command Page" (Open in context links > Start in mode page) >
"Finish Page"
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
<Left pane>
A graphic illustration of the selected mode.
Initial mode
Starts the RTSM application in the selected mode.
Page 124 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 3: Create a URL for a Direct Link
Finish Page
This is the final page of the Generate Direct Link wizard. Click Finish to close the wizard and
create a URL. Opens the Generate Direct Link dialog box.
Important
information
For general information about the Generate Direct Link wizard, see "Generate
Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
Wizard map
"Select Command Page" (<Open in context links options> and <Embedded
links options>) > "Finish Page"
Page 125 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 4
Embedding RTSM Applets Using Direct Links
This chapter includes:
Using the Direct Link Functionality to Embed RTSM Applets
127
RTSM Applet Tag – Overview
128
Direct Link Operation Flow
129
Note: This chapter is relevant to integration developers only.
Page 126 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 4: Embedding RTSM Applets Using Direct Links
Using the Direct Link Functionality to Embed
RTSM Applets
You can directly embed RTSM applets into external applications using a direct link. A direct link is a
URL that you create using the Direct Links wizard. For details, see "Generate Direct Link Wizard"
on page 112.
You can embed RTSM applets in the following ways:
l
Using the URL itself to display RTSM content in an external application. For example, you can
create a URL in the Direct Links wizard to display the properties of a certain CI. The login page
opens if you are not already logged into BSM or if Lightweight Single Sign-On Authentication
Support (LW-SSO) is not enabled for BSM.
Note: Using the URL to enable the integration requires opening the link in an IFrame or a
new window. This does not allow you to manage the resulting RTSM applet using
Javascript due to cross-site scripting issues. For example, if you use a URL that displays
the properties of a specific CI using the object ID, you cannot use the same URL to display
the properties of another CI.
l
Using the RTSM applet tag to embed the RTSM applet in an external application. This enables
integration developers to display a part of the BSM user interface as part of their own application.
In addition, this enables interaction with the embedded BSM user interface using Javascript.
Page 127 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 4: Embedding RTSM Applets Using Direct Links
RTSM Applet Tag – Overview
The RTSM Applet tag creates the environment needed for the RTSM applet to run (HTML,
Javascript, and server session parameters). The code behind the tag can log into the BSM server in
one of the following cases:
l
The login parameters are specified and the user is not already logged in (or if Lightweight Single
Sign-On Authentication Support (LW-SSO) is not enabled for BSM).
l
The clear session parameter is true.
Once a user session is established, the tag continues to write the required applet environment
(HTML and Javascript code) to the result of the JSP processor. The resulting HTML page includes
the required Javascript code to load the RTSM applet from the specified server. On error, the
specified error string is printed to the page. This string can be customized using the
userErrorMessage parameter and may include HTML elements and HTML wrapped Javascript
code to initiate error handling scenarios.
Example of the Usage of an RTSM Applet Tag
<ucmdb:ucmdb_applet
serverConnectionString="http://labm3mam17.devlab.ad:8080"
serverType="UCMDB"
directLinkParameters="initViewName=NetworkTopology"
userName="user-name"
userPassword="password"
customerId="1"
encoded="false"
printDebugLogs="true"
userErrorMessage="This is your general error"
navigation="false"
clearSessionCookies="false"
command="ShowCISelector"/>
Caution: You retrieve the directLinkParameters from the URL created in the Direct Links
wizard. Insert the values for each parameter in the tag as displayed. If the URL contains values
for parameters not displayed above, copy them into the directLinkParameters line of the tag.
For details on how to create a direct link, see "Generate Direct Link Wizard" on page 112.
The RTSM applet tag is located at <BSM>\odb\deploy\ucmdb-ui\WEB-INF\tags\ucmdb_
applet.tag on the Gateway Server machine.
You can copy the RTSM applet tag to an external application server. The RTSM applet tag requests
the login data from the BSM server provided that:
l
The external application server can communicate with JSP tags.
l
The BSM server is accessible to the external application server and to the browser.
Page 128 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 4: Embedding RTSM Applets Using Direct Links
Direct Link Operation Flow
This section describes different scenarios in which direct links are used to embed RTSM applets
into external machines.
This section includes the flow descriptions:
l
"Regular Login" below
l
"An Embedded RTSM Applet Using a Direct Link URL" on next page
l
"An Embedded RTSM Applet Using an RTSM Applet Tag" on page 131
Regular Login
This flow describes a regular login to the BSM server. It serves as a base reference for the direct
link flows.
1. The user enters the direct link URL (into the browser) to log into the BSM server.
2. The browser sends the login request to the BSM server.
3. The server checks the user credentials and creates a user session if required.
Page 129 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 4: Embedding RTSM Applets Using Direct Links
4. The server returns the requested first page of BSM.
Note: This can be any page. For this flow, we assume that it is the Admin > RTSM
Administration > Modeling page in which the RTSM applet is loaded.
5. The browser loads the Java virtual machine (JVM) with the code base location parameter
(which instructs the JVM from where to load the RTSM applet files) as the BSM server.
6. RTSM applet files (jars) and data are transferred between the BSM server and the JVM loaded
in the browser.
At this point, the RTSM applet is loaded and regards BSM as the server with which it should
communicate.
An Embedded RTSM Applet Using a Direct Link URL
This flow shows how to use the direct link to open an RTSM applet (opened to a specified context)
in a new browser frame.
1. The external application has a page that needs to show the RTSM applet.
2. The returned page includes a directive to open the direct link in an IFrame or new browser
window.
3. The browser opens a new frame (IFrame or new window) with the direct link as the frame URL.
4. The new frame sends the direct link to the BSM server.
Page 130 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 4: Embedding RTSM Applets Using Direct Links
5. If the user is not already logged into BSM, or if Lightweight Single Sign-On Authentication
Support (LW-SSO) is not enabled for BSM, BSM displays the login page and waits for the user
to enter credentials and click the login button.
6. The user session is created, if required.
7. The BSM server returns a page that includes the directive to load the RTSM applet.
8. The browser processes the page. When the browser encounters the directive to load the
RTSM applet, it starts the JVM. The browser then passes the needed parameters to the JVM,
including the BSM server location as "code base."
9. RTSM applet files (jars) and data are transferred between the BSM server and the JVM loaded
in the browser.
Caution: The BSM server must be accessible from the browser machine.
An Embedded RTSM Applet Using an RTSM Applet Tag
This flow shows how to use the RTSM applet tag in conjunction with direct links to embed the
RTSM applet (opened to a specified context) in an external application page.
1. The RTSM applet tag is included in the processed JSP in the external application.
2. The RTSM applet tag uses the parameters given to it to create an HTTP/HTTPS connection to
the BSM server and requests the applet HTML snippet code.
Page 131 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 4: Embedding RTSM Applets Using Direct Links
3. If the user is not already logged in, the parameters from the RTSM applet tag are used (see the
tag itself for reference information regarding this step). If login fails, the RTSM applet tag
returns an error message, either the preset one or the one specified in the RTSM applet tag
parameters.
4. The BSM server returns the HTML snippet code (with embedded Javascript) that loads the
RTSM applet. The external application can now incorporate this snippet code into the page,
and send the page to the browser.
5. The external application sends the complete page that includes the HTML snippet code to the
browser.
6. The browser processes the page. When the browser encounters the HTML snippet code that
loads the RTSM applet, the JVM is started. The browser then passes the needed parameters
to the JVM, including the BSM server location as "code base".
7. RTSM applet files (jars) and data are transferred between the BSM server and the JVM loaded
in the browser.
Caution: The BSM server must be accessible from both the browser machine as well as
the external application machine.
Page 132 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 5
Working with the CI Selector
This chapter includes:
CI Selector Overview
134
Display a View in Browse Mode
135
Search for CIs in Search Mode
136
Modify CI Selector Display Options
137
CI Selector User Interface
138
Troubleshooting and Limitations
150
Page 133 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
CI Selector Overview
Note: The CI Selector was known as View Explorer in earlier versions of BSM.
The CI Selector presents the elements of the IT universe model in BSM through the medium of
views. BSM displays the CI Selector in the left pane of IT Universe Manager and the Modeling
Studio.
When you select a view in the CI Selector, the configuration items (CIs) contained in the view are
displayed in a hierarchical tree format according to the relationships defined between the CIs. A
view may be empty if no CIs were found matching the TQL query. For details on views, see "View
Formats" on page 248.
You can use the CI Selector to select views and to locate CIs. You can select a view and browse
through the list of CIs, or you can search for a specific CI by name or by CI type. You can also save
the search criteria for future use.
For information on the components of the CI Selector, see "CI Selector User Interface" on page
138.
Page 134 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
Display a View in Browse Mode
When the CI Selector is set to Browse mode, you can display the contents of a selected view. For
details on the CI Selector user interface in Browse mode, see "CI Selector" on page 139.
1.
Prerequisites
In the CI Selector pane, select Browse Views mode.
2.
Select a View to Display
Click the ellipsis button
to open the View Selector dialog box and select the view you want
to display. The name of the selected view is shown in the View box. The CIs in the view
appear in the CI tree in the lower part of the CI Selector pane. The view remains selected when
you move to other applications in BSM.
Page 135 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
Search for CIs in Search Mode
The CI Selector search tool enables you to locate a specific CI. The search is executed on the
entire RTSM. For details on the CI Selector search tool user interface, see "CI Selector" on page
139.
This task includes the following steps:
Prerequisites
In the CI Selector pane, select Search CIs mode and select the Simple tab.
Search by CI Name
To search for CIs by name, enter a string in the CI Name box, representing the name of the CI, or
part of the name. The search returns all CIs that contain the entered string somewhere in their
names (within the boundaries of the other search criteria that you define).
Note: The search by CI name option is not case sensitive.
Search by Configuration Item Type
You can search for CIs using the CI Type box. This search returns CIs of the type specified in the
CI Type box.
Click the ellipsis button
CI Type box.
and select the required CI type. You cannot manually enter a CIT in the
After defining a CI in the CI Type box, HP Business Service Management remembers your
selection until you move to a different application, or until you define a different value.
Run the Search and Sort the Results
Run the search. The results appear in the lower part of the CI Selector pane, showing the CI name
and type for each entry. You can sort the search results by clicking the appropriate heading.
When you select the required CI from the results list, the right pane displays details for the CI you
selected, in the context in which you are working. To see a CI in the context of its view, right-click
the CI and select Locate CI in View. The CI Selector reverts to Browse mode and displays the
view that contains the CI, with the CI selected in the view tree.
When you select a CI in the search results, the CI appears in the topology map with its related CIs
in the RTSM.
Optionally, save the search criteria by clicking the Save button
and entering a name for the
search. For details, see "Save Search Criteria Dialog Box" on page 148.
Run an Advanced Search
You can select the Advanced tab for other search options. For details on the CI Conditional
search, see "CI Conditional Search Dialog Box" on page 138. For details on the Running Software
search, see "Running Software Search Dialog Box" on page 148.
Page 136 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
Modify CI Selector Display Options
You can modify the display options for the CI Selector. These options are configured in the
Infrastructure Settings Manager.
Caution: Modifying certain settings in the Infrastructure Settings Manager can adversely
affect the performance of BSM. Do not modify settings without first consulting HP Software
Support or your HP Professional Services representative
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Prerequisites
Access the Infrastructure Settings Manager by selecting Admin > Platform > Setup and
Maintenance > Infrastructure Settings.
2.
Modify Selected Settings
The following settings under RTSM - General properties can be modified:
n
Immediate Children Count. Number of children immediately displayed when expanding
their parent's query node in the CI Selector.
n
Maximal Children Count. Maximum number of children displayed under their parent's
query node in the CI Selector.
n
Maximal search results size. Maximum number of CMDB instances that can be returned
in one search operation.
n
Recently Used Views List size. Maximal number of recently used views to store per user.
Page 137 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
CI Selector User Interface
This section includes (in alphabetical order):
l
"CI Conditional Search Dialog Box" below
l
"CI Selector" on next page
l
"Organize Searches Dialog Box" on page 147
l
"Running Software Search Dialog Box" on page 148
l
"Save Search Criteria Dialog Box" on page 148
CI Conditional Search Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to search for CIs by attribute conditions, by related CIs, and by
attribute conditions of related CIs.
To
In the CI Selector, select the Advanced tab in Search mode and click the ellipsis
access button next to CI Conditional Search.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click to add an attribute condition.
Click to delete a selected row.
Click to move a selected row up.
Click to move a selected row down.
Click to display a preview of the attribute condition list.
Attribute
name
Select an attribute from the drop-down list.
CI Name
Enter a CI name for which to search.
Note: If you select Display Label from the Attribute name list, the operator
Like ignore case does not appear in the Operator list since a Display Label
Like ignore case condition can be added using the CI name/Related CI Name.
CI Type
Click the ellipsis button
Page 138 of 446
to select a CI type from the tree.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Integration
Points
If you want to run your search over federated CIs also, click the ellipsis button
to select the target integration points for the CIs.
Note: If you select a disconnected integration point for your search, an error
message appears when the search is run, asking if you want to see local search
results.
Operator
Select an operator from the drop-down list.
Related CI
Name
Enter the name of a related CI for the search.
Related CI
Type
Click the ellipsis button
related CI.
Relationship
Click the ellipsis button
Type
related CI.
to select a CI type from the tree for a search by
to select a relationship from the tree for a search by
Search by
CI
conditions
Select to run a search for CIs with the specified conditions.
Search by
related CI
conditions
Select to run a search for CIs related to CIs with the specified conditions.
Search by
related CI
criteria
Select to run a search for CIs related to the specified CIs or CI types.
Value
Enter a value for the attribute condition.
Note: If you select Display Label from the Attribute name list, the operator
Like ignore case does not appear in the Operator list since a Display Label
Like ignore case condition can be added using the CI name/Related CI Name.
CI Selector
This feature enables you to select views and to locate CIs.
To access
Page 139 of 446
Appears in the left pane of the IT Universe Manager page and the Modeling
Studio.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
Important
The CI Selector consists of two functional formats: Browse Views mode and
information Search CIs mode.
l
In Browse Views mode, you can search for and display a view, and browse
through the view to locate a particular CI. You can also perform operations on
the CI from a shortcut menu.
l
In Search CIs mode you can search for one or more CIs in the RTSM by name
or by CI type.
Note: Many of the features of the CI Selector are only relevant in the RTSM and
not in other BSM modules.
Relevant
tasks
"Display a View in Browse Mode" on page 135
"Search for CIs in Search Mode" on page 136
Browse Views Mode
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Click to refresh the data content of the hierarchical tree structure
that may have been modified by other users.
Click Show Template Parameters to open the Template
Parameter Values dialog box, which enables you to edit the
parameters of the selected template.
Note: This button is only active when a template is selected.
Click Add selected CIs to model/view to add the selected CIs
to the current model or view.
Note: This button only appears in the Modeling Studio.
Click Add to model as related CIs to add the selected CI to the
model as a related CI.
Note: This button is only active in the Model Editor of the
Modeling Studio.
Click Open selected model in a new tab to open the selected
model in the Model Editor.
Note: This button is only active when a model is selected in the
Modeling Studio.
Click Show models containing selected CI to display a list of
models containing the selected CI.
Note: This button only appears in the Modeling Studio.
Page 140 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
In IT Universe Manager, this represents Show View Definition,
which takes you directly to the view definition in the Modeling
Studio for the current view.
In the Modeling Studio, this represents Open selected view,
which opens the selected view in the Editor pane.
Click Show views containing selected CI/model to display a
list of views containing the selected CI or model.
Note: This button only appears in the Modeling Studio.
Click Generate view for selected model to open the Creating
New View dialog box which enables you to build a view based on
the selected model.
Note: This button is only active when a model is selected in the
Modeling Studio.
Click Show Discovery and Changes Summary to rediscover
all the CIs in a selected view by manually starting the DFM jobs
that originally discovered them. For details, see "Show
Discovery Status and Changes Dialog Box" on page 242.
Note: This button only appears in IT Universe Manager.
Click Generate Direct Link to View to create a direct link to the
view using the Direct Links wizard.
Note: This button only appears in IT Universe Manager.
Page 141 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Choose the export format for the browse results. The available
options are:
l
Excel. The table data is formatted as an .xls (Excel) file that
can be displayed in a spreadsheet.
l
PDF. The table data is exported in PDF format.
Note: When exporting to PDF, select a reasonable number of
columns to display to ensure that the report is legible.
l
RTF. The table data is exported in Rich Text Format.
l
CSV. The table data is formatted as a comma-separated
values (CSV) text file that can be displayed in a spreadsheet.
Note: For the CSV formatted table data to display correctly,
the comma (,) must be defined as the list separator. In
Windows, to verify or modify the list separator value, open
Regional Options from the Control Panel, and on the Numbers
tab ensure that the comma is defined as the List Separator
value.
XML. The table data is formatted as an XML file that can be
opened in a text or XML editor.
l
Tip: To extract HTML code from the report:
n
Save the file as HTML
n
Open the file in an HTML editor
n
Copy the relevant table into the target file
Click the Snapshot button to work with snapshots. The following
options are available:
l
Save Snapshot. Select to open the Save Snapshot dialog
box, which enables you to save a snapshot of the view. For
details, see "Save Snapshot Dialog Box" on page 242.
l
Compare Snapshots. Select to run the Compare Snapshots
Report. For details, see "Compare Snapshots Report" on
page 340.
l
Schedule Snapshot. Select to open the Schedule Job dialog
box. For details, see "Schedule Snapshot Dialog Box" on
page 348.
Note: This button only appears in IT Universe Manager.
Page 142 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Click View Based Report to display the topology report for the
selected view.
Note: This button only appears in IT Universe Manager.
Click Asset Report to open the Asset report for the selected
view. For details, see "Asset Report" on page 335.
Note: This button only appears in IT Universe Manager.
Click the ellipsis button to the right of the View box, to open the
View Selector dialog box. You can browse through the folder tree
to locate the view you want to display.
Enables you to move to the next or previous result of the search
for the string entered in the Find box.
<CIs>
The CIs contained in the currently selected view.
<Tooltip>
Hold the cursor over a CI to display a tooltip with the relevant CI
type.
Find
Enter a CI name or a portion of a CI name in the Find box to
locate a CI in the CI tree.
View
The View box displays the currently selected view. To select a
view to display, click the down arrow on the right side of the View
box; this displays an abridged list of views, containing the most
recently accessed views. Click the arrow at the bottom of the list
to scroll through the entire list. The recently accessed views
appear at the top of the drop-down, above the dividing line. The
complete list of views appears below the line.
Alternatively, place the cursor in the list and begin typing the view
name. If the first few letters that you type match an existing
entry, BSM completes the view name. If the names of several
views begin with those letters, all matching views are displayed
in the list.
Note: If the selected view in the View box fails to load, the value
in the View box is set to the default (empty) selection.
Search CIs Mode
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
Page 143 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Click Show Search Results in Table to open a separate pane
with a table of the CIs in the search results.
Note: This button only appears in IT Universe Manager.
Click Add selected CIs to model/view to add the selected CIs
to the current model or view.
Note: This button only appears in the Modeling Studio.
Click Add to model as related CIs to add the selected CI to
the model as a related CI.
Note: This button is only active in the Model Editor of the
Modeling Studio.
Click Open selected model in a new tab to open the selected
model in the Model Editor.
Note: This button is only active when a model is selected in the
Modeling Studio.
Click Show models containing selected CI to display a list of
the models containing the selected CI.
Note: This button only appears in the Modeling Studio.
Click Show views containing selected CI/model to display a
list of the views containing the selected CI or model.
Note: This button only appears in the Modeling Studio.
Click Generate view for selected model to open the Creating
New View dialog box which enables you to build a view based
on the selected model.
Note: This button is only active when a model is selected in the
Modeling Studio.
Page 144 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Choose the export format for the search results. The available
options are:
l
Excel. The table data is formatted as an .xls (Excel) file that
can be displayed in a spreadsheet.
l
PDF. The table data is exported in PDF format.
Note: When exporting to PDF, select a reasonable number
of columns to display to ensure that the report is legible.
l
RTF. The table data is exported in Rich Text Format.
l
CSV. The table data is formatted as a comma-separated
values (CSV) text file that can be displayed in a spreadsheet.
Note: For the CSV formatted table data to display correctly,
the comma (,) must be defined as the list separator. In
Windows, to verify or modify the list separator value, open
Regional Options from the Control Panel, and on the
Numbers tab ensure that the comma is defined as the List
Separator value.
XML. The table data is formatted as an XML file that can be
opened in a text or XML editor.
l
Tip: To extract HTML code from the report:
n
Save the file as HTML
n
Open the file in an HTML editor
n
Copy the relevant table into the target file
Click to open the Organize Searches dialog box, where you can
edit or delete searches from the list of saved searches.
Click to collapse or expand the search criteria area.
Click to run the search. The search results are displayed in the
lower part of the CI Selector pane.
Click to save the current search criteria for future use.
Enables you to move to the next or previous result of the search
for the string entered in the Find field.
Page 145 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
<Search results>
After you run the search, the results are listed in the lower part of
the CI Selector pane. The results are shown in two columns:
l
Name. Contains the name of the CI.
l
CI Type. Contains the CI type of the CI.
If the CI or view name is abbreviated, hold the pointer over the
entry to see the full name. You can sort the search results by
clicking the appropriate heading.
Advanced tab
The following detailed search options are available:
l
CI Conditional Search. Enables you to search for CIs by
attribute conditions, by related CIs, and by attribute
conditions of related CIs.
l
Running Software Search. Enables you to search for hosts
by the applications running on them and for applications by
the host on which they are running.
For each of the searches, click the ellipsis button
to open
the search dialog box. After running a search, click the Save
button
to save the search for future use.
CI Name
To search for a CI by name, enter the name of the CI for which
to search.
CI Type
To search for CIs by CI type, click the ellipsis button to select a
CI from the Select Configuration Item Type dialog box.
Find
Enter a CI name or a portion of a CI name in the Find box to
locate a CI in the search results.
Searches
Select a search from the drop-down list of saved searches.
Search results count
The Search results count below the Find box displays the total
number of CIs found in the search.
Simple tab
The Simple tab includes the standard search functionality. Click
the Advanced tab for more detailed search options.
Shortcut Menu Options
Menu Item
Description
<IT Universe
Manager
shortcut menu
options>
The regular shortcut menu for the topology map in IT Universe Manager is
also available from the CI Selector. For details on the menu options, see "IT
Universe Manager Shortcut Menu" on page 231.
Page 146 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
Menu Item
Description
Add
Adds the selected CI to the current model or view.
Note: This feature only appears in the Modeling Studio.
Add to model as
related CIs
Adds the selected CI as a related CI to the current model.
Generate view
for selected
model
Select to create a view based on the current model. The Creating New View
dialog box opens which enables you to select a perspective to apply.
Open selected
model in a new
tab
Opens the selected model in a new tab in the Model Editor.
Note: This feature only appears in the Modeling Studio.
Note: This feature only appears in the Modeling Studio.
Note: This feature only appears in the Modeling Studio.
Show containing Select Show models containing selected CI to display a list of the
models
models containing the selected CI.
Note: This option only appears in the Modeling Studio.
Show containing Select Show views containing selected CI/model to display a list of the
views
views containing the selected CI or model.
Note: This option only appears in the Modeling Studio.
Organize Searches Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to edit or delete searches from the list of saved searches.
To access
Click the Manage the list of saved searches button
Selector.
in the CI
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click to edit the selected search. For simple searches, the CI Simple Search dialog
box opens, which enables you to edit the name and type of the CI. For CI
Conditional searches, the CI Conditional Search dialog box opens.
Click to delete the selected search.
Click to expand the search tree.
Click to collapse the search tree.
Page 147 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
<Searches Displays all the saved searches in tree format.
tree>
Find
Enter a search name or a portion of a search name in the Find box to locate it in the
list.
Find Next
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list.
Find
Previous
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list.
Running Software Search Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to search for hosts by the applications running on them and for
applications by the host on which they are running.
To
In the CI Selector, select the Advanced tab in Search mode and click the ellipsis
access button next to Running Software Search.
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Host
name
Description
Enter the name of the node for which you are searching.
Running Select a running software CI from the drop-down list.
Software
Note: The drop-down list may not display an accurate list of available running
software CI types (only the option Any appears). In this event, perform the Host
name search only.
Search
for
Select RunningSoftware or Node.
Note: To search for a running software CI running on a specific node, enter a node
name, select the required running software CI and search for it.
Save Search Criteria Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to save the current search criteria for future use.
To access
Click the Save button
from Search mode in the CI Selector.
User interface elements are described below:
Page 148 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Existing
Queries
Displays a list of existing searches in tree format.
Name
Enter a name for the current search.
Find
Enter a search name or a portion of a search name in the Find box to locate it in
the list.
Find Next
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list.
Find Previous
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list.
Page 149 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 5: Working with the CI Selector
Troubleshooting and Limitations
This section describes troubleshooting and limitations for the CI Selector.
Unavailable Views and CIs
The View list in the CI Selector may not display all views in the RTSM, or it may not display the
contents of a view, for any of the following reasons:
l
The View list includes only the views for which you have the necessary permissions. Similarly,
Search mode is only available if you have CI Search permission. To set permissions, select
Admin > Platform > Users and Permissions, select a user or a group and select
Permissions. For more information, see "How to Assign Permissions" in the BSM Platform
Administration Guide.
l
Views that are currently inactive appear in red in the View list, but they cannot be selected. In IT
Universe Manager, inactive views appear in faded text.
l
Out-of-the-box views for which you do not have a license may appear in the View list, but these
views do not contain CIs. For information on the out-of-the-box views, see "Predefined Folders
and Views" on page 252.
Note: After deleting one or more query nodes from a TQL query, it can take time for changes
to be updated to the view; meanwhile, the removed CIs appear in the view. If you select one
of these CIs before it is updated, an error message is displayed. Click the Refresh button to
update the view.
Page 150 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 6
Working with Topology Map
This chapter includes:
Topology Map Overview
152
Handling Large Views
153
Topology Map User Interface
154
Page 151 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Topology Map Overview
The Topology Map provides a graphical display of a view. All the CIs in a given layer of the view are
represented by icons and the connecting lines represent relationships. You can select a CI in the
Topology Map or in the CI Selector in the left pane. You can also drill down in the CI Selector to
display different layers of the view in the Topology Map.
The label of a CI appears under the icon. You can set the maximum number of characters per line
and the maximum number of lines in a CI label in the User Preferences dialog box under General.
For details, see "User Preferences Dialog Box" on page 94.
If a CI icon appears with a downward arrow icon in the Topology Map, there is an additional CI layer
beneath it, created by the hierarchy set for the view. You can click the arrow to display the CIs
contained in the sublayer.
The topology map is automatically updated dynamically with changes in the IT Universe data, such
as new CIs discovered by the Data Flow Management process.
The toolbar and Main Menu above the Topology Map enable you to zoom in, change the layout of
the Topology Map, and print the Topology Map. Additional functionality is available from the
shortcut menu by right-clicking a CI in the Topology Map or in the CI Selector.
Page 152 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Handling Large Views
The Topology Map cannot display a view with more than 900 CIs in a single layer. When you select
a view which contains a layer with more than this number of CIs, the Topology Map appears empty.
A layer with more than 900 CIs can be displayed in a table in Text mode.
To display large views in the Topology Map, use one of the following methods:
l
Reduce the TQL query results by redefining the view in the Modeling Studio. For details, see
"Change Query Node/Relationship Type Dialog Box" on page 279.
l
Define a different hierarchy for the view to redistribute the CIs among the view's layers. For
details on defining hierarchy, see "Setting the View Hierarchy" on page 249.
l
Reset the maximum number of CIs allowed in the configuration parameters. Select the Max
Object Count GUI for TS parameter under RTSM - Viewing Settings in the Infrastructure
Settings Manager. However, be aware that increasing the maximum number of CIs per layer
may significantly slow down the redrawing of the Topology Map.
To modify the setting, select Admin > Platform > Setup and Maintenance > Infrastructure
Settings > Foundations > RTSM. Locate Max Object Count GUI for TS and change the value
to the required number.
Page 153 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Topology Map User Interface
This section includes (in alphabetical order):
l
"Export Map to Image Dialog Box" below
l
"Layout Properties Dialog Box" on next page
l
"Main Menu" on page 168
l
"Print Dialog Box" on page 169
l
"Print Preview Dialog Box" on page 170
l
"Print Setup Dialog Box" on page 170
l
"Toolbar Options" on page 171
l
"Topology Map Sidebar" on page 178
Export Map to Image Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to save a topology map to a file.
To access
From a topology map, select Operations > Export Map to Image.
Relevant tasks
"Print and Save a Topology Map to File" on page 214
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Actual
Size
Save the view so that the graph node sizes are at maximum.
Current
Zoom
Level
Save the view as you see it on the topology map. For example, if you have used the
Interactive Zoom mode to decrease the view magnification, the graph nodes also
appear smaller in the saved view. For details, see "Interactive Zoom" on page 174.
Custom
Specify the size of the view you want to save in the Width and Height boxes.
File
Name
Specify the required file name and location (or click Browse to search for the file and
location).
Fit in
Canvas
Expand or shrink the view so that it fits in the pane.
Image
Quality
The quality of the printed map. Select High, Medium, or Low.
Selected Saves only the graph nodes/CIs and their relationships that you selected in the map.
Objects
Only
Page 154 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Type
Select the required file format.
Visible
Window
Only
Saves only the part of the graph that appears in the pane.
Layout Properties Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to customize the layout of a specific layer in a view, to achieve the
clearest presentation possible and to better understand and monitor the managed data.
To access
Select Layout >Layout Properties.
Important
You define the layout of a view's layers by assigning logical positions for the
information graph's nodes and relationships that appear in a layer. You customize the layer
layouts by modifying the default values.
You set layout definitions for a specific layer only. The definitions cannot be saved
for a different layer or a different view.
Parameter values are in pixels.
Global Tab
This area enables you to define global layout parameters.
To access
Click the Global tab in the Layout Properties dialog box.
Important information
The Global tab enables you to define global settings for the layout.
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Drawing
Fitting
Description
Select one of the following options for fitting the layout:
l
Fit to Canvas. Fit the layout to the canvas on the screen.
l
Fit for Printing. Fit the layout to a page for printing.
l
No Fitting. Do not change the layout.
Labeling Select Perform Labeling to ensure that the labels appear when the layout is
redrawn. If this field is not selected, labels do not appear in the redrawn layout.
Style
Page 155 of 446
Select Apply Style Deeply to apply the layout selected to all nested layers of the
topology map.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
All Styles Tab
To access
Click the All Styles tab in the Layout Properties dialog box.
Important
The All Styles tab enables you to define general layout parameters for
information disconnected graph nodes and connected components.
l
A disconnected graph node is a node that is not connected to any other graph
node.
l
A disconnected component is a component that is not connected to any other
component. It contains a set of graph nodes that can be connected to each
other.
This illustrates a connected component with five graph nodes:
This illustrates a connected component with two graph nodes:
This illustrates four disconnected components, each made up of a single,
disconnected graph node:
User interface elements are described below:
Page 156 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Components
The spacing between the components in a disconnected graph consists of both
a constant value and a proportional value based on the sizes of the
components.
Select Detect Components to view the disconnected components. You can
specify that all components be laid out together or individually, regardless of the
other components. If the grouping for components is selected, each component
is laid out, and the resulting components are packed together.
When Detect Components is selected, enter values for the following settings:
l
Constant Spacing. Set constant spacing (horizontal and vertical) around
each disconnected component.
Default value: 20
l
Proportional Spacing. Set spacing (horizontal and vertical) that is
proportional to the size of the component around each disconnected
component.
Default value: 0.05
Disconnected The spacing between the graph nodes in a disconnected graph consists of both
Graph Nodes a constant value and a proportional value based on the sizes of the graph
nodes.
Select Detect Disconnected Graph Nodes to view the disconnected graph
nodes. You can specify that disconnected graph nodes be grouped into one
component or laid out individually.
When Detect Disconnected Graph Nodes is selected, enter values for the
following settings:
Margin
Spacing
l
Constant Spacing. Set constant spacing (horizontal and vertical) around
each disconnected graph node.
Default value: 20
l
Proportional Spacing. Set spacing (horizontal and vertical) that is
proportional to the size of the component around each disconnected graph
node.
Default value: 0.05
Enter values for the right, left, top, and bottom margin spacing for the layout.
Circular Tab
To access
To access: Click the Circular tab in the Layout Properties dialog box.
Important
The Circular tab enables you to group a graph's nodes into groups or clusters
information based on the grouping options you select. It is particularly suited for visualizing
ring and star network topologies, and for link analysis.
User interface elements are described below:
Page 157 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Clustering Set the values for the following settings:
Cluster
Layout
Style
Page 158 of 446
l
Cluster Size Factor. Specifies the ratio between the average cluster size and
the number of clusters. The size of a cluster is defined as the sum of the
weights of all graph nodes in the cluster. You can assign a weight value to each
graph node.
l
Min Number of Clusters. The minimum number of clusters in a layer.
l
Max Number of Clusters. The maximum number of clusters in a layer.
Displays clusters either in a symmetric or circular layout style.
Select one of the following options:
l
Symmetric. Displays clusters in a symmetric layout style.
l
Circular. Displays clusters in a circular layout style.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Layout
Quality
Description
Adjusts the quality of the layout produced to fit your application's needs. The
quality reflects the number of steps or the method used to produce the layout. For
example, high quality is sharper but takes more time to set the layout.
Select one of the following options:
l
Draft. Produces faster results (faster than Medium and Proof).
l
Medium. Produces a result that is a combination of Draft and Proof, that is, it
produces a more accurate graph layout than Draft, but not as accurate as Proof.
l
Proof. Produces a more refined result but takes more time.
Note: The differences between the speed and resulting layout of each quality
setting varies depending on the nature of the graph being laid out. You can try each
option to determine which works best for you.
Page 159 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Spacing
Description
Sets the spacing around each graph node within the same cluster and between
clusters.
Enter values for the following settings:
l
Between Graph Nodes. Sets the spacing around each graph node within the
same cluster. The larger the spacing, the more graph nodes there are on the
cluster boundary.
Default value: 50
This illustration shows smaller graph node spacing.
This illustration shows larger graph node spacing.
l
Between Clusters. Sets the spacing between clusters.
Default value: 50
This illustration shows smaller cluster spacing.
This illustration shows larger cluster spacing.
Hierarchical Tab
To access
Click the Hierarchical tab in the Layout Properties dialog box.
Important
The Hierarchical tab shows the precedence relationships that can represent
information organizational or information management system dependencies, as well as
process models, software call graphs, and work flows. The hierarchical layout
emphasizes dependencies by placing the graph nodes at different levels.
User interface elements are described below:
Page 160 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
UI Element
(A-Z)
Backward
Edges
Horizontal
Spacing
Description
Specifies how backward relationships are displayed in the hierarchical layout.
Select one of the following options:
l
Minimize Backward Edges. Sets the number of backward relationships
displayed in a layer to a minimum.
l
Optimize for Feedback Flow. Sets the number of backward relationships
displayed in a layer to a maximum. This mode is more appropriate for flow
charts.
Enables you to set the minimum horizontal distance between two neighboring
graph nodes at each level.
Enter values for the following settings:
Page 161 of 446
l
Between Graph Nodes. Sets a horizontal space around each graph node in
the layer.
Default value: 28
l
Between Edges. This setting is available only when you select Routing >
Orthogonal. It sets a horizontal space between edges in the graph.
Default value: 12
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
UI Element
(A-Z)
Layout
Quality
Description
Adjusts the quality of the layout produced to fit your application's needs. The
quality reflects the number of steps or the method used to produce the layout. For
example, high quality is sharper but takes more time to set the layout.
Select one of the following options:
l
Draft. Produces faster results (faster than Medium and Proof).
l
Medium. Produces a result that is a combination of Draft and Proof, that is, it
produces a more accurate graph layout than Draft, but not as accurate as
Proof.
l
Proof. Produces a more refined result but takes more time.
Note: The differences between the speed and resulting layout of each quality
setting varies depending on the nature of the graph being laid out. You can try each
option to determine which works best for you.
Page 162 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
UI Element
(A-Z)
Level
Alignment
Orientation
Description
Enables you to set the way graph nodes are vertically aligned.
Select one of the following options:
l
Top. This illustration shows that the top of the graph nodes at the same level of
the hierarchy are aligned.
l
Center. This illustration shows that the center of the graph nodes at the same
level of the hierarchy are aligned.
l
Bottom. This illustration shows that the bottom of the graph nodes at the same
level of the hierarchy are aligned.
Enables you to set the orientation of the hierarchy.
Select one of the following options:
Page 163 of 446
l
Top to Bottom. The children are located above the parent.
l
Left to Right. The children are located to the left of the parent.
l
Bottom to Top. The children are located below the parent.
l
Right to Left. The children are located to the right of the parent.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Orthogonal
Routing Fix Node
Sizes
This setting is available only when you select Routing > Orthogonal. Maintain
the size of a graph node. Clear this option if you want the layout to increase the
size of a graph node, if it is necessary to maintain the specified relationship
spacing, when more than one relationship is attached to the same side of the
graph node.
Polyline
Routing Spacing
Between
Bends
This setting is available only when you select Routing > Polyline. Polyline
routing routes edges (connecting lines) as one or more straight line segments with
arbitrary angles. Path nodes are added automatically to prevent the edges
(connecting lines) from overlapping.
Routing
Select the type of routing for the layout. The available options are:
Default Value: 12
l
Orthogonal
l
Polyline
Undirected
Layout
Edge direction is not used to build the levels of the hierarchical drawing.
Variable
Level
Spacing
Variable level spacing adjusts the spacing between pairs of neighboring levels
according to the density of edges between the levels.
If the drawing's edges are orthogonally routed, this ensures the desired vertical
spacing between horizontal edges (in a top-to-bottom or bottom-to-top layout)
routed between levels.
If the routing is polyline, variable level spacing makes it easier to distinguish
among edges in very dense drawings.
Page 164 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Vertical
Spacing
Enables you to set the minimum vertical distance between two neighboring graph
nodes on different levels.
Enter values for the following settings:
l
Between Graph Nodes. Sets a vertical space around each graph node in the
level.
Default value: 28
l
Between Edges. This setting is available only when you select Routing >
Orthogonal. It sets a vertical space between edges in the graph.
Default value: 12
Orthogonal Tab
To access
To access: Click the Orthogonal tab in the Layout Properties dialog box.
Important
The Orthogonal tab enables you to set orthogonal layout route relationships
information horizontally and vertically. This results in relationships bending at 90-degree
angles only.
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Fix Node
Sizes
Description
Maintain the size of a graph node. Clear this option if you want the layout to
increase the size of a graph node if it is necessary to maintain the specified
relationship spacing when more than one relationship is attached to the same side
of the graph node.
Horizontal Enables you to set the minimum horizontal distance between graph nodes.
Spacing
Select one of the following options:
l
Between Graph Nodes. Set a horizontal space around each graph node in the
layer.
Default value: 20
l
Between Edges. Set a horizontal space between elements in the layer.
Default value: 12
Page 165 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Layout
Quality
Description
Adjusts the quality of the layout produced to fit your application's needs. The
quality reflects the number of steps or the method used to produce the layout. For
example, high quality is sharper but takes more time to set the layout.
Select one of the following options:
Vertical
Spacing
l
Draft. Set the layout to draft quality.
l
Medium. Set the layout to medium quality.
l
Proof. Set the layout to proof quality.
Enables you to set the minimum vertical distance between graph nodes.
Select one of the following options:
l
Between Graph Nodes. Set a vertical space around each graph node in the
layer.
Default value: 100
l
Between Edges. Set a vertical space between elements in the layer.
Default value: 20
Symmetric Tab
To access
Click the Symmetric tab in the Layout Properties dialog box.
Important
The Symmetric tab displays a clear representation of complex networks. The
information symmetric layout emphasizes the symmetries that may occur in a graph.
User interface elements are described below:
Page 166 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Layout
Quality
Description
Adjusts the quality of the layout produced to fit your application's needs. The quality
reflects the number of steps or the method used to produce the layout. For example,
high quality is sharper but takes more time to set the layout.
Select one of the following options:
l
Draft. Produces faster results (faster than Medium and Proof).
l
Medium. Produces a result that is a combination of Draft and Proof, that is, it
produces a more accurate graph layout than Draft, but not as accurate as Proof.
l
Proof. Produces a more refined result but takes more time.
Note: The differences between the speed and resulting layout of each quality setting
varies depending on the nature of the graph being laid out. You can try each option to
determine which works best for you.
Spacing Allows you to set constant horizontal and vertical spacing around each graph node in
the layer. The value you specify is a guideline for the layout, so that it is possible that
the spacing for a particular pair of graph nodes might be different from the one you
specified. The larger the graph node spacing, the farther apart the graph nodes are
spaced in the final layout.
Default value: 50
The following figure illustrates smaller and larger spacing.
Page 167 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Routing Tab
To access
Click the Routing tab in the Layout Properties dialog box.
Important
information
The Routing tab enables you to produce drawings that leave graph nodes
essentially where they are, and reroute the lines orthogonally.
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Fix Node
Positions
Maintain the position of all the graph nodes in the display. Clear this option for the
layout to move the graph nodes if it is necessary to improve the layout. The
movement is minimal, avoids overlaps, and minimizes bend points.
Fix Node
Sizes
Maintain the size of a graph node. Clear this option if you want the layout to
increase the size of a graph node if it is necessary to maintain the specified
relationship spacing when more than one relationship is attached to the same side
of the graph node.
Horizontal Enables you to set the minimum horizontal distance between graph nodes.
Spacing
Select one of the following options:
l
Between Graph Nodes. Set a horizontal space around each graph node in the
layer.
Default value: 20
l
Between Edges. Set a horizontal space between elements in the layer.
Default value: 12
Vertical
Spacing
Enables you to set the minimum vertical distance between graph nodes.
Select one of the following options:
l
Between Graph Nodes. Set a vertical space around each graph node in the
layer.
Default value: 20
l
Between Edges. Set a vertical space between elements in the layer.
Default value: 12
Main Menu
This feature contains the options for working with the topology map.
To access
Page 168 of 446
Located in the upper left portion of the screen.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Important
information
The specific options contained within the Main Menu drop-downs are detailed
in "Toolbar Options" on page 171.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Edit
Contains selection options for the topology map.
Editor Item
Contains the topology map shortcut menu options for the current manager.
Note: This drop-down does not appear in CI Type Manager.
Layout
Contains options for changing the layout of the topology map.
Operations
Contains options for printing or exporting the topology map.
Resources
Contains the left pane shortcut menu options for the current manager.
Note: This drop-down does not appear in IT Universe Manager, and in CI Type
Manager it is called CI Types.
Tools
Contains the User Preferences, Log Configuration, and Screen Capture tools.
View
Enables you to hide or display the different panes of the module.
Print Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to print the contents of the topology map.
To access
Select Operations > Print.
Important
The results of printing a topology map is similar to a screen capture. Therefore,
information before printing, it is recommended to:
Relevant
tasks
l
Define your print settings and arrange the contents of the topology map
according to your requirements. For details, see "Print Setup Dialog Box" on
next page.
l
Arrange the contents of the topology map for print. You can use the Layout
option and Layout Properties. For details about the layout options, see
"Layout Properties" on page 175. For details about layout properties, see
"Layout Properties Dialog Box" on page 155.
"Print and Save a Topology Map to File" on page 214
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Number of copies
Enter the number of copies you want to print.
Properties
Define document properties as required.
Page 169 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Print Preview Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to preview the content of the topology map before printing.
To access
Select Operations > Print Preview.
Relevant tasks
"Print and Save a Topology Map to File" on page 214
User interface elements are described below:
Menu Item
Description
Print the map. For details, see "Print Dialog Box" on previous page.
Zoom out to view the map.
Zoom in to focus on specific details of the map.
Fit the complete view in the pane.
Print Setup Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define the print settings for a topology map.
To access
Select Operations > Print Setup.
Relevant tasks
"Print and Save a Topology Map to File" on page 214
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Actual Size
Print the view as it really is.
Color
Set the text color.
Font
Set the required font.
Page Setup
Set the printer settings.
Pages
Divide the map into rows and columns and print each section separately. Enter
the number of columns and rows in the Page Columns and Page Rows boxes.
Position
Select the position of the caption from the Position list.
Print
Print the background behind the view.
Background
Page 170 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Print
Border
Print the map with a border. Click Color to select the required border color.
Print
Caption
Enter the caption in the text area and click Font to select the required custom
font.
Print Crop
Marks
Print the crop marks.
Print
Current
Selection
Print the selected graph nodes and their relationships.
Print
Current
Window
Print the part of the view that appears in the pane.
Print Entire
Drawing
Print the complete view.
Print Page
Numbers
Print the page numbers.
Zoom Level
Print the view at the current zoom level.
Toolbar Options
The following table contains a description of each Topology Map toolbar option, organized
alphabetically.
Note: These toolbar options are relevant for RTSM applications.
Page 171 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Button Option Name
Additions Count
Use This Option to...
Calculate the number of instances that are created as a result of
an Enrichment Rule. The number of TQL query node instances
and relationships that are created appear next to the Enrichment
query nodes/relationships, as seen in the figure below.
Note: This option appears in the toolbar in Enrichment Manager
only.
Advanced Pane
Toggle between hiding and displaying the Advanced Pane at the
bottom center of the screen.
To access: Select View > Advanced Pane.
Calculate Query
Result Count
Calculate the number of instances found for each TQL query
node/relationship.
Change Label
Length/Properties
Enter the maximum number of characters that the labels should
contain.
To access: In IT Universe Manager and the Modeling Studio,
select Layout > Change Label Properties. In the other
managers, select Layout > Change Label Length.
CI Types Tree
Toggle between hiding and displaying the CI Type Selector at
the right of the screen.
To access: Select View > CI Types Tree.
Note: In the Modeling Studio, this option is called CI Types.
Create
Relationship
In most managers, create a relationship between two existing
TQL query nodes. For details, see "Add Query Nodes and
Relationships to a TQL Query" on page 32.
In IT Universe Manager, create a relationship between existing
CIs. For details, see "Attaching Existing CIs" on page 200.
Delete Selected
Item(s)
Page 172 of 446
Delete a CI from IT Universe Manager or a TQL query node from
Impact Analysis Manager or Enrichment Manager.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Button Option Name
Drag Map
Use This Option to...
Drag the view.
To access: Open the drop-down menu in the Mode box or
select View > Drag Map. In IT Universe Manager and the
Modeling Studio, select Layout > Dragging Mode.
Drill Down One
Layer
Move down one level in the topology map. This option is
enabled only if there is an additional CI layer below it, created by
setting the hierarchy of the view. For details on setting the
hierarchy, see "Setting the View Hierarchy" on page 249.
Note: This option appears only in IT Universe Manager.
Enable/Disable
Related CIs
Retrieval
Toggle between disabling and enabling the redrawing of the
topology map with related CIs when selecting a new CI in the CI
Selector.
Note: This option appears only in IT Universe Manager in the
Related CIs tab.
Entities Tree
Toggle between hiding and displaying the manager specific
entities tree at the left of the screen.
To access: Select View > Entities Tree.
Note: In the Modeling Studio, each of the tabs of the Left pane
(Resources, CI Types, CI Selector) is listed as a separate
option.
Export Map to
Image
Save the topology map to a file. For details, see "Export Map to
Image Dialog Box" on page 154.
To access: Select Operations > Export Map to Image.
Fit to Window
Fit the complete map in the pane.
To access: Select Layout > Fit to Window.
Generate Direct
Link
Generate a direct link to a view or CI.
Go Up One Layer
Move up one level in the topology map. This option is enabled
only if there is an additional CI layer above it, created by setting
the hierarchy of the view. For details on setting the hierarchy,
see "Setting the View Hierarchy" on page 249.
To access: Select Edit > Generate Direct Link.
Note: This option appears only in IT Universe Manager.
Page 173 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Button Option Name
Hide All
Inheritance From
Map
Use This Option to...
Toggle between showing and hiding Inheritance_f relationships
and their connecting query nodes.
To access: Select Layout > Hide All Inheritance From Map.
Note: This option is only active in the toolbar in CI Type
Manager.
Hide All Query
Node Labels
Toggle between showing or hiding the CI/CIT/query
node/pattern labels.
To access: Select Layout > Hide All Query Node Labels.
Note: This option is not available in IT Universe Manager and
the Modeling Studio.
Hide All
Relationship
Labels
Toggle between showing or hiding the relationship labels.
To access: Select Layout > Hide All Relationship Labels.
Note: This option is called Hide edges' labels in IT Universe
Manager and the Modeling Studio.
Hide All
Relationships
Toggle between showing and hiding the relationships in the
displayed map.
To access: Select Layout > Hide All Relationships.
Note: This option is not available in IT Universe Manager and
the Modeling Studio.
Hide/Show Get
Related CIs pane
Toggle between hiding and displaying the Get Related CIs
pane.
Note: This option appears only in IT Universe Manager in the
Related CIs tab.
Hide/Show Legend
Toggle between hiding and displaying the topology map legend.
Note: This option appears only in IT Universe Manager and the
Modeling Studio.
Interactive Zoom
l
Decrease the view magnification by clicking and pushing the
pointer upwards.
l
Magnify the view by clicking and pulling the pointer
downwards.
To access: Open the drop-down menu in the Mode box or
select View > Interactive Zoom.
Note: This option is not available in IT Universe Manager and
the Modeling Studio.
Page 174 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Button Option Name
Layout Properties
Use This Option to...
Define the view's layer layout, by assigning positions for the
query nodes and relationships of the view. For details, see
"Layout Properties Dialog Box" on page 155.
To access: Select Layout > Layout Properties.
Layout
Select the layout display from the list. The options are:
l
Hierarchical Layout. Enables you to display the
precedence relations in the topology map.
l
SymmetricLayout. Enables you to display clear
representations of complex networks.
l
Circular Layout. Groups a graph's nodes into groups or
clusters.
l
Orthogonal Layout. Enables you to display views of
outstanding clarity that are achieved by employing only
horizontal and vertical edge routing.
l
Manual Layout. Enables you to display the changes you
have made manually to the topology map.
For further details about each of the options, see "Layout
Properties Dialog Box" on page 155.
Note: These layout options are only relevant for Enrichment
Manager, CIT Manager, and Impact Analysis Manager.
Log Configuration
Open the Log Configuration dialog box.
To access: Select Tools > Log Configuration.
Map overview
Open a small box with a copy of the topology map. This is
useful in large views when zooming in.
To access: Select Layout > Map Overview. In IT Universe
Manager and the Modeling Studio, select Layout > Show Map
Overview.
Maximize
Toggle between the regular display and a full-screen display of
Workspace/Restore the topology map.
Workspace
Page 175 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Button Option Name
Navigation
Use This Option to...
Take the pointer to the next connected CI/CIT/TQL query node
in a clockwise direction.
l
Left-click to move in a clockwise direction.
l
Right-click to point to the next CI/CIT/query node/pattern in
a clockwise direction.
To access: Open the drop-down menu in the Mode box or
select View > Navigation.
Note:
New CI
l
You can use this option only on CI/CIT/query nodes/patterns
that are connected by relationships.
l
This option is not available in IT Universe Manager and the
Modeling Studio.
Define a new unrelated CI. For details, see "Working with CIs"
on page 196.
Note: This option appears in the toolbar in IT Universe Manager
only.
New Related CI
Define a new related CI. For details, see "Working with CIs" on
page 196.
Note: This option appears in the toolbar in IT Universe Manager
only.
Place in Center
Place the selected CI/CIT/query nodes/pattern in the center of
the map.
To access: Select Layout > Place in Center.
Note: This option is not available in IT Universe Manager and
the Modeling Studio.
Print
Print the contents of the topology map. For details, see "Print
Dialog Box" on page 169.
To access: Select Operations > Print...
Print Preview
Preview the contents of the map before printing.
To access: Select Operations > Print Preview.
Print Setup
Define print settings for printing the topology map. For details,
see "Print Setup Dialog Box" on page 170.
To access: Select Operations > Print Setup...
Page 176 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Button Option Name
Use This Option to...
Remove
Enrichment
Results
Remove the instances created from an Enrichment rule from the
RTSM.
Screen Capture
Take a snapshot of the screen using the Screen Capture tool.
Note: This option appears in the toolbar in Enrichment Manager
only.
To access: Select Tools > Screen Capture.
Select
Select a CI/CIT/TQL query node or multiple CIs/CITs/TQL
query nodes.
To access: Open the drop-down menu in the Mode box or
select View > Select. In IT Universe Manager and the Modeling
Studio, select Layout > Selection Mode.
Select All
Select all the CIs and relationships in a selected layer.
To access: Select Edit > Select All.
Note: This option is not available in IT Universe Manager and
the Modeling Studio.
Select All Query
Nodes
Select all the query nodes in a selected layer.
To access: Select Edit > Select All Query Nodes.
Note: This option is not available in IT Universe Manager and
the Modeling Studio.
Select Columns
Enables you to select the columns to be displayed. For details,
see "Select Columns Dialog Box" on page 443.
Note: This option is displayed in Text mode of IT Universe
Manager only.
Set Change
Timeframe
Open the Change Timeframe dialog box, which enables you to
set the period for the display of added or changed CI indicators.
Note: This option appears in the toolbar in IT Universe Manager
only.
Show Candidates
for Deletion
Identify the CIs in the current view which are candidates for
deletion with the following icon
.
Note: This option appears in the toolbar in IT Universe Manager
only.
Page 177 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Button Option Name
Show Schedule
Info
Use This Option to...
Display the scheduling information for the selected job. For
details, see "Discovery Scheduler Dialog Box" in the Data Flow
Management Guide.
Note: This option appears in the toolbar in the Dependency Map
tab of DFM. For details, see "Dependency Map Tab" in the Data
Flow Management Guide.
Sort Column
Content
Enables you to set the order of the visible columns. For details,
see "Sort Column Content Dialog Box" on page 443.
Note: This option is displayed in Text mode of IT Universe
Manager only.
Straighten
Straightens any selected relationship between two query nodes
that has angles.
To access: Select Layout > Straighten.
Note: This option is only available in Enrichment Manager and
Impact Analysis Manager.
User Preferences
Opens the User Preferences dialog box which enables you to
reset warning message preferences. For details, see "User
Preferences Dialog Box" on page 94.
To access: Select Tools > User Preferences.
User Profile
Opens the User Profile dialog box which displays the user
details for the user currently logged in.
To access: Select Tools > User Profile
Zoom In
Zoom in on a specific section of the topology map by clicking
and drawing a selection rectangle around the part to magnify.
The area you select is displayed at the highest percentage that
fits in the topology map.
To access: Open the drop-down menu in the Mode box or
select View > Zoom In. In IT Universe Manager and the
Modeling Studio, select Layout > Zoom in.
Topology Map Sidebar
The following table contains a description of each Topology Map sidebar option. The Topology Map
sidebar appears in IT Universe Manager and the Modeling Studio.
Page 178 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 6: Working with Topology Map
Button Option Name
Use This Option to...
Move Layout
Toolbar to
Right/Left
Move the sidebar to the right or left side of the screen.
Zoom In/Out
Zoom in or out on the topology map.
Selection Mode
Enable selection mode in the topology map.
Dragging Mode
Enable dragging mode in the topology map.
Refresh to get an
optimal layout
Refresh the topology map to optimize the layout.
Fit to Window
Fit the complete map in the pane.
Hide Edges' Labels
Hide the labels of all relationships.
Change label
properties
Open the Map Label Properties dialog box which enables you to
set the maximum label length per line and maximum number of
lines per label.
Show Map
Overview
Open a small box with a copy of the topology map. This is
useful in large views when zooming in.
Hierarchical Layout
Display the topology map in a layout displaying the precedence
relations.
Hierarchical Layout
with Orthogonal
Routing
Display the topology map in a layout displaying the precedence
relations using only horizontal and vertical edge routing.
Circular Layout
Display the topology map in a layout that groups a graph's
nodes into groups or clusters.
Orthogonal Layout
Display the topology map in a layout using only horizontal and
vertical edge routing.
Symmetric Layout
Display the topology map in a layout showing clear
representations of complex networks.
Print
Print the topology map.
Export Map to
Image
Save the topology map to a file.
Page 179 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Part 2
Modeling
Page 180 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 7
Best Practices for Modeling
This chapter includes:
Using Modeling Studio
182
Models and Perspectives
183
Building Models
184
Model Dependencies on Other CIs in the RTSM
188
Modeling an Application with Running Software
189
Creating Views Using the Modeling Studio
190
Page 181 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 7: Best Practices for Modeling
Using Modeling Studio
The Modeling Studio is the RTSM module for building and modeling views for display in Service
Health. This document details the required flow to create Service Health views using the Modeling
Studio.
The motivation behind developing the Modeling Studio is to create a separation between the need to
change the RTSM content by creating CIs and relationships and the need to consume (view) the
RTSM content. In earlier versions, altering the RTSM content was part of the view creation
workflow. Hence, users were unintentionally changing the RTSM and influencing other users'
views. In the Modeling Studio, you build models and transform your content into views to be
consumed by BSM.
Page 182 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 7: Best Practices for Modeling
Models and Perspectives
A model is a CI collection that represents a managed business entity such as an application,
business service, or line of business. A model is usually created by solution or application
architects who are familiar with the content and hierarchy of the model. The model content can
include system CIs (typically nodes), running software CIs (such as web servers, databases, and
J2EE servers), end user monitoring components (Business Process Monitor or Real User Monitor
applications), business processes, groups, and other existing models.
To generate a view from a model, a perspective needs to be applied. A perspective is a TQL-based
tool that enriches the model content by adding additional CIs, thus creating a view. The default
perspectives that are applied to create Service Health views add all descendent CIs that are related
by impact links down to the level of monitor CIs. There are other perspectives provided out of the
box that can be used to address additional use cases.
The resulting view shows the model content as it is monitored by BSM.
Page 183 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 7: Best Practices for Modeling
Building Models
The information required to define a model includes the CI content, the hierarchy, and the
dependencies upon additional CIs.
BSM is configured with a predefined list of CI types that represent your business entities. When
creating a new model using the Modeling Studio, the following list of valid models appears:
The model CI types can be arranged in hierarchies to reflect the organization's specific needs. Here
is an example of a typical recommended model hierarchy:
Page 184 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 7: Best Practices for Modeling
A model can be nested in any logical hierarchy, but it is best to create a hierarchy that starts from
high level business entities down to more specific model types.
It is strongly recommended to build models in a way that allows them to be reused as components
of other models.
Building a model creates a contains link between the model and its CIs according to the defined
hierarchy.
The creation of a CI which is a model CI results in the creation of an empty model by default.
Therefore, if you want to create a model for a CI that does not yet exist, you create a new model and
thus, a new CI. If you want to model an existing CI for the first time, select the CI in the CI Selector,
drag it onto the canvas and select Create a New Model.
Page 185 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 7: Best Practices for Modeling
Preconfigured Models
BSM creates out-of-the-box models for applications monitored by Business Process Monitor and
Real User Monitor.
The Business Process Monitor model is of type business transaction flow and it contains business
transaction CIs.
The Real User Monitor model is of type application and contains the End User Management
Application related group and business process step CIs. The Real User Monitor model is also
impacted by the Real User Monitor Sessions monitor CIs, Real User Monitor Errors events CIs,
and Real User Monitor Informational events CIs, which are visible in the Related CIs pane.
Building Model Content
Create a model of the desired type and assign it a name. The new model appears as the top CI in
the content pane of the Model Editor. Drag and drop CIs from the CI Selector into the content pane
to build the model content.
A model can contain system CIs, running software CIs, SiteScope groups, and other models (both
existing models and new ones created during the modeling process).
The only CIs that cannot be part of a model containment tree are monitors. Monitor CIs are added to
a model after you generate a view from the model using one of the monitor perspectives. You can
include monitors in view by dragging them into the Related CIs pane when a model CI is selected in
the upper pane of the Model Editor. If you try to drop a monitor CI into the upper pane, a message
appears prompting you to add the monitor CI to the Related CIs pane.
The CI Selector pane offers two ways to search for a CI (both model CIs and non-model CIs):
Page 186 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 7: Best Practices for Modeling
Browse Views
l
Use this option when you are familiar with a view that contains the CI you are looking for. The
following out-of-the-box views can help you find commonly used CIs:
n
End User Monitors view - contains business process groups and their content.
n
System Monitors view - contains SiteScope groups hierarchy.
n
System Software Monitoring view - contains running software CIs and the servers on which
they are deployed.
In the CI Selector, select Browse Views and begin entering the view name or use the view tree
to look for a CI in a specific folder.
l
Search CIs
If you know the CI type you are looking for, select the Search CIs mode and use the quick
search dialog to locate the desired CI. Use the Advanced Search option for CIs that do not
appear in the quick search mode.
The search result appears in the left pane. After the list of CIs is refreshed, you can drag and
drop CIs into the model content pane. It is possible to drag and drop multiple CIs in a single
selection.
Models can be placed in a hierarchical mode. During the process of building the content you can
insert new models and create groups.
Hierarchies between CI types which are not models is not supported.
Grouping
In some cases, there is a need to divide the model into logical groups according to ownerships,
locations or any other custom representation.
In the following example the application contains two groups that represent data centers:
For details on creating groups in a model, see "Model Editor" on page 290.
Page 187 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 7: Best Practices for Modeling
Model Dependencies on Other CIs in the RTSM
Each model CI in the model can be dependent on other CIs that exist in the RTSM but are not part
of the model itself. Examples of such CIs include shared resources such as database servers and
storage devices.
The model structure may vary between organizations according to policies and responsibilities in
the IT department. There are organizations where shared resources are considered to be part of the
application and are monitored as part of it, while in other organizations they are considered external
to the application. In the first case, shared resources are part of the model and appear in the content
pane, whereas in the second case they appear as related CIs (in the lower pane of the Model
Editor).
To create a dependency between a CI in the model and another CI in the RTSM, search for a CI in
the left pane and drag it into the Related CIs tab. This operation creates a usage link in the RTSM.
In order to create a dependency relationship between two CIs, there must be a valid link in the
RTSM between the two CI types. By default, all business CIs can be dependent on other business
CIs.
The following example shows an application that depends on a web server and Oracle software
elements:
BSM offers a revised out-of-the-box impact model. The impact model describes the impact
relationships between CI types. For example, a running software CI is impacted by the node on
which it is deployed. In the Modeling Studio, when you include a running software CI as part of a
model, the node on which it is deployed appears in the Related CIs tab, since the running software
is dependent on the server.
Page 188 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 7: Best Practices for Modeling
Modeling an Application with Running Software
Running software CIs are CIs that describe the implementation components of an application.
Examples include web servers such as IIS or Apache, application servers such as Webshpere or
Weblogic, and databases.
To build the implementation model of a three tier application using its running software CIs, create
an application model.
You can use the Running Software search in the Advanced Search dialog or browse the System
Software Monitoring view to locate running software CIs. The names of the running software CIs
are formed by combining the running software CI type with the server name, for example,
Microsoft IIS web server (Server1).
Drag the relevant running software CIs into the modeling pane. The server on which the running
software was deployed as well as the monitor of the running software both appear automatically in
the Related CIs pane. This change derives from the new SiteScope monitoring model. In previous
versions, all monitors (of both hardware and software) were connected to the Server CI. The
SiteScope model was enhanced and now hardware monitors are connected to the server CI, while
software monitors are connected to the running software CIs.
Page 189 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 7: Best Practices for Modeling
Creating Views Using the Modeling Studio
There are two methods of creating perspective-based views using the Modeling Studio. The first
option is to create a view based on a model (or on several models); the second one is to create a
view out of CI collection that is not a model.
A view based on a model is updated automatically when the model content is updated. For
example, a view was generated using a business process group model that initially contained five
business process steps. The business process group was then updated to include additional
business process steps. Those changes are automatically reflected in the view.
This option is the recommended one, since it creates a dynamic view.
In a view based both on models and individual CIs, the view content is updated according to
changes in the models.
Generating a View from a Model
After building a model and saving the model definition, select the top model and select Generate
view for selected model. In the dialog box that opens, select the desired perspective according to
the desired view content.
The recommended perspective is the Impact Perspective. It creates a view with all the CIs in the
model and for each CI, it adds all the child CIs including the monitor CIs. Additional perspectives
that may be used for other purposes are described in "Predefined Folders and Views" on page 252.
If the selected model includes dependent CIs (which appear in the Related CIs tab), they are also
enriched by the perspective and become part of the view.
The Content Only perspective does not make any changes in the view, even for model CIs.
Hiding Irrelevant CIs from a View
The view result appears in the View Results pane. At this point, you may choose to hide CIs that
appear in the view.
Hiding CIs from a view does not change the status calculation of CIs in the view (the status
calculation is performed according to the RTSM hierarchy). For example, hiding two business
process steps from a business process group with five steps does not affect the business process
group status. If a hidden CI has a critical status and the remaining CIs are OK, the business
process group shows a critical status.
For details on hiding CIs and restoring them to a view, see "Building a Perspective Based View" on
page 257.
Page 190 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 8
IT Universe Manager
This chapter includes:
IT Universe Manager Overview
192
Working with Views in IT Universe Manager
193
View Tree Structure
195
Working with CIs
196
Working with Relationships
199
Create CIs and Relationships in the RTSM
204
View Related CIs
205
Check Status of Application Discovery (Rediscover a View)
206
Retrieve Impact Analysis Results – Scenario
208
Take a Snapshot of a View
213
Print and Save a Topology Map to File
214
IT Universe Manager User Interface
215
Page 191 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
IT Universe Manager Overview
IT Universe Manager enables you to manage the content of your IT Universe model. The following
tasks represent the basic functionality of the application:
l
Creating CIs without creating relationships. You can define new CIs that are added to the
RTSM individually, so that no new relationships are created. For details, see "Creating a NonRelated CI" on page 196.
l
Creating CIs with relationships for them. You can define new CIs and attach them to
existing CIs, so defining a new CI and a new relationship in the RTSM. For details, see
"Creating a Related CI" on page 196.
l
Adding existing CIs and creating relationships for them. You can attach CIs to an existing
CI, so creating new relationships for existing CIs. For details, see "Attaching Existing CIs" on
page 200.
l
Deleting CIs. You can delete CIs from the RTSM. For details, see "Deleting CIs" on page 196.
l
Getting Impact Analysis results. You can run the Impact rules you defined for a view to
simulate how certain defined changes impact your system, and to discover the root causes of
the changes. For more information about Impact rules, see "Impact Analysis Manager
Overview" on page 355.
Populating the IT Universe Model
The IT Universe model in the RTSM contains the CIs and relationships produced by the CIgenerating tools that operate within BSM. Most CIs and relationships originate from one of the
following sources:
l
Data Flow Management (DFM). Automatically creates CIs and relationships based on the
discovered IT resources and topology in your company's infrastructure. For details, see Data
Flow Management Overview in the Data Flow Management Guide.
l
IT Universe Manager. Enables you to manually create CIs and relationships that represent
logical and physical elements of the business. For details, see "Working with CIs" on page 196.
l
End User Management Administration and System Availability Management
Administration. Enables you to manually create relationships between the CIs for monitor
objects and CIs in the RTSM. For details, see "Integrating SiteScope Data with BSM's
Configuration Items" in the BSM User Guide.
l
Enrichment Manager. Enables you to add CIs and relationships to the RTSM by receiving data
from the attributes of Enrichment query nodes as defined in the Enrichment TQL query. For
details, see "Enrichment Manager" on page 409.
Page 192 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Working with Views in IT Universe Manager
In IT Universe Manager, you analyze data at the view level. Views are subsets of the IT Universe,
containing only those CIs relating to a specific area of interest. All views are based on a pattern
which determines the content of the view.
l
Pattern views and template-based views are built from a TQL (Topology Query Language) query
that defines the structure of the view. The view displays only those CIs and relationships that
satisfy the query definition.
l
Perspective-based views are built manually, by selecting a group of CIs and applying
perspectives to them. A perspective is a pattern used to define which related CIs are included in
the view.
You build all views in the Modeling Studio, using the appropriate editor for each view type. For
information on the different view types and how they function, see "View Formats" on page 248.
Note: You must have Change permissions for a view to edit the view. If you do not have the
necessary permissions, contact your BSM Administrator.
CIs created by DFM are automatically added to each view where the CIs (and their relationships) fit
the TQL definition for the view. When you open a view in the CI Selector, the TQL query for the view
queries the RTSM for CIs that match the defined pattern. If there are no matches (for example, in
the case of a view for a DFM process where the process has not yet run) then the view remains
empty.
You can also include CIs from external data sources (federated CIs) in your view, by defining the
query to run over integration points for federated data sources. The federated CIs appear in the view
with an arrow icon indicating that they are from a federated source.
For details on federated data sources, see "Integration Studio Overview " in the Data Flow
Management Guide.
When you define a new CI while working in any view in IT Universe Manager, the CI (and any
associated relationship) is created in the RTSM. The CI is added to your current view only if it
meets the view's TQL specifications.
If the created CI and relationship do not meet the TQL requirements, then the CI and relationship
are created in the RTSM but are not visible in the view. Similarly, if you attach an existing CI to a CI
in the view, and the new pattern does not meet the TQL requirements, then the attached CIs do not
appear in the view, but the relationship is still created.
Templates and Template-based Views
If you open a template in IT Universe Manager, it is displayed in the topology map like a pattern
view. Click the Show Template Parameters button
in the CI Selector toolbar to open the
Template Parameter Values dialog box, where you can change the values of the template
parameters and thereby affect the view results displayed in the topology map. You can try different
parameter values and see the resulting topology map, but you cannot save changes to the template
Page 193 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
itself. To save the view results as a template-based view with the selected parameters, click the
Save As View button in the Template Parameter Values dialog box.
You can also create a direct link to a template in IT Universe Manager and insert the parameter
values directly into the URL. For details, see "Create a Direct Link to a Template with Parameter
Values" on page 110.
View Lifecycle
If you do not access a view from the CI Selector for a specified period of time, the view is cleared
out, to save memory in the system. It is not deleted from the RTSM; the view can be retrieved by
clicking on it. The default time period for clearing out unused views is one hour.
Note: Views defined as persistent are not cleared out and always remain in the memory.
Hidden Views
You can designate a view as a hidden view that does not appear in IT Universe Manager by defining
a bundle for hidden views and assigning the view to that bundle.
To designate a view as a hidden view:
1. In the Infrastructure Settings Manager, select Hidden Bundles Names in CI Selector.
2. Enter the name of the new bundle as the default value and save the setting.
3. In the Modeling Studio, open the relevant view and click the View Definition Properties
button
in the toolbar.
4. In the View Definition Properties dialog box, select the hidden views bundle and assign the
view to it.
Page 194 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
View Tree Structure
Views are organized in a hierarchical tree format in the left pane of IT Universe Manager, which is
known as the CI Selector. The view name appears in the View box above the tree and acts as the
containing folder for the CIs in the view.
The first level of the CI Selector tree consists of the query nodes for the root CIs. A root CI is the
starting point for a view subtree. A view may contain any number of subtrees. Under the root CIs
come the branch CIs, expanding down to the leaf CIs as the last query nodes at the ends of each
branch.
The CIs at each level in a subtree are considered to be attached to the CI on the branch directly
above. This attachment generally depicts a dependent relationship, so that the higher branch
(closer to the root CI) represents a component of your business that depends on the CIs on the next
branch down (closer to the leaf CIs) in the business process. For example, an application depends
on the servers running the application.
The attachment between a higher and a lower query node is referred to as a parent-child
relationship. The parent CI may have many attached child CIs, and the child CIs pass operational
status to the parent. The status at each level is viewed in Service Health.
The tree topology is determined by the hierarchy defined for the view. In a pattern view, these are
defined for the specific view. In a template-based or a perspective-based view, the hierarchy is
defined as part of the template or perspective. For details on defining the hierarchy, see "Setting the
View Hierarchy" on page 249.
Page 195 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Working with CIs
In IT Universe Manager, you can create related and non-related CIs, delete CIs, edit the CI
properties, and remove out-of-date CIs using the aging mechanism.
This section includes the following topics:
l
"Creating a Non-Related CI" below
l
"Creating a Related CI" below
l
"Deleting CIs" below
l
"CI Properties" on next page
l
"Removing Out of Date CIs Using the Aging Mechanism" on next page
Creating a Non-Related CI
You can define a new CI in IT Universe Manager by clicking the New CI button
in the toolbar.
The New CI dialog box opens, which enables you to define the properties for the new CI. The CI is
created in the RTSM. For details, see "New CI/New Related CI Dialog Box" on page 236.
Note: The CI is added to the view only if it meets the specifications of the pattern of the view,
template, or perspective.
A CI created in this way is added as an independent entity without any relationship to any other
existing CI in the RTSM.
Creating a Related CI
You can define a new CI to be added as a parent, child, or sibling of an existing CI.
To define a new related CI:
1. Select the CI in your view to which you want to attach the new CI.
2. Click the New Related CI button
in the toolbar.
3. In the New Related CI dialog box, define the properties and relationship for the CI. For details,
see "New CI/New Related CI Dialog Box" on page 236.
The CI and relationship are created in the RTSM.
Note: The CI and relationship are added to the view only if they meet the specifications of
the pattern of the view, template, or perspective.
Deleting CIs
You can delete a CI by selecting Delete from CMDB from the shortcut menu in IT Universe
Manager. The CI is deleted from the RTSM and from all views. If the CI has children, they are not
automatically deleted when you delete the parent CI. If you delete a CI without first deleting the
relationship between the CI and any child CIs that appear with the parent CI in a view, the child CIs
are removed from the view.
Page 196 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
If the child CIs do not appear in any other view, they remain in the RTSM without appearing in a
view. The child CIs might appear in the future in views where they meet the pattern requirements.
One exception to this rule is when the relationship between a child and parent CI is a Composition
relationship; in that case, when the parent CI is deleted, the contained CI is also removed from the
RTSM. For example, if a node CI is the container for a child CPU CI, then when the node CI is
deleted, the CPU is also removed from the RTSM.
When you delete a CI that was created by the DFM process, the CI is restored the next time that
DFM runs (if the CI is still valid), and it reappears in all relevant views.
CI Properties
In IT Universe Manager, you can edit the properties of a CI. The CI properties are divided into
several categories which appear in the New CI dialog box:
l
The general properties of a CI are common to all CIs. Some general properties are defined
automatically during CI creation; others can only be defined manually in the New CI dialog box.
l
CIT-specific properties are created as part of the CIT definition in the CI Type Manager. The
values for the CIT-specific properties are taken from the CIs discovered during DFM. The values
can also be entered manually, when you manually create CIs to represent entities in your
infrastructure. For details, see "CI Type Manager" on page 371.
l
Key properties can be general or CIT-specific properties, which must be assigned a value to
create an instance of the CI type.
You can access the Configuration Item Properties dialog box to view the CI properties from IT
Universe Manager by right-clicking the CI and selecting Properties or by clicking the Properties tab
in the Advanced pane. You can also edit the CI properties if you have the necessary permissions
for editing CIs. For details on CI properties, see "Configuration Item Properties Dialog Box" on page
219.
The CIT-specific properties are displayed in the Specific Properties section of the Configuration
Item Properties dialog box when you sort the properties using the Categorized button. Some
properties for the automatically created CIs can be edited, however, if the CI is configured to Allow
CI Update (in the General Properties), then DFM may override your changes when it updates the
CI. A description of the selected property can be found in the Description area at the bottom of the
Configuration Item Properties dialog box.
Some of the CIT-specific properties for DFM CIs are set by default to be monitored for changes.
When one of these properties has been modified, information on the change can be viewed in a CI
change report, and in some cases, an icon is displayed in Service Health. For more information, see
CI Change Reports in the User Reports part of the BSM User Guide.
Removing Out of Date CIs Using the Aging Mechanism
If a CI or relationship is not updated or refreshed over a period of time (for example, a CI is not
rediscovered by DFM and no manual update occurs), an aging mechanism deletes the CI from the
RTSM. For details, see "CI Lifecycle and the Aging Mechanism" in the RTSM Administration
Guide.
Note: The following actions that apply to CIs cannot be performed on federated CIs:
Page 197 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
l
Editing the CI properties
l
Deleting the CI
l
Creating a relationship to another CI
l
Viewing the CI History
l
Adding the CI to a Discovery job
l
Removing the CI from a Discovery job
Page 198 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Working with Relationships
Many of the relationships between CIs in the RTSM are created automatically, for example, by
DFM. In addition, you can create relationships manually in IT Universe Manager, Enrichment
Manager, Impact Analysis Manager, or the Modeling Studio. You can also create relationships in
System Availability Management and End User Management Administration.
This section includes the following topics:
l
"Creating Relationships" below
l
"Creating Hierarchical Relationships" below
l
"Attaching Existing CIs" on next page
l
"Setting the View Hierarchy" on next page
l
"Viewing Related CIs" on page 201
l
"Deleting Relationships" on page 201
l
"Inter-Layer Relationships" on page 201
Creating Relationships
You can create relationships in IT Universe Manager by right-clicking a CI or multiple CIs in the CI
Selector pane or the Topology Map and selecting Relate to CI from the shortcut menu. In the
Topology Map, you can define a relationship between two CIs in the view by drawing a line between
the two, using the Create Relationship button
from the toolbar. Either of these actions opens
the Insert Relationship dialog box. For details, see "Insert Relationship Dialog Box" on page 224.
You can create as many relationships as necessary between a CI in the RTSM and other CIs. Each
new relationship exists as its own entity in the RTSM, and has its own properties that can be edited
in IT Universe Manager (as described in "Configuration Item Properties Dialog Box" on page 219).
You can also create more than one relationship between the same two CIs, when each relationship
is based on a different relationship type. In the following example, host7 has both a Backbone
and a Talk relationship with switch3.
Creating Hierarchical Relationships
By attaching one CI to another in IT Universe Manager or System Availability Management or End
User Management Administration you create a hierarchical relationship (parent-child) between
Page 199 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
them, so that one CI is influenced by the other.
Certain relationships defined in this way are restricted to the relationship type usage (if the
relationship is between two non-monitoring CIs), or the relationship type Monitored By (if the child
CI in the relationship is a monitor type CI); however, other relationship types are used between
specific types of CIs. For example, if a relationship is defined between two node CIs, there are
several possible relationship types.
Note: When you attach a child CI to a parent CI, you are creating that relationship in the
RTSM. The child therefore impacts on the parent CI in every view where the relationship
exists, and is displayed in every view where the child and relationship match the TQL query.
When performing status calculations, the Business Logic Engine only recognizes calculated
relationships. For details on calculated relationships, see "Impact Rules" on page 103
Attaching Existing CIs
You can attach existing CIs using the Insert Relationship dialog box. The dialog box has two
modes:
l
Selecting the CIs that you want to attach.
l
Defining the relationship between the original CI and the CIs to attach.
When selecting the CIs to attach, you can select multiple CIs from a view to attach to the original
CI. However, all CIs that you want to attach in one operation must have the same relationship type.
For example, you cannot attach a CI that uses the relationship usage in the same operation as a CI
that uses the relationship Monitored By.
Note: SiteScope monitor CIs should not be attached to other CIs from within the RTSM. You
should only create links to SiteScope monitor CIs from within SiteScope.
Setting the View Hierarchy
After setting the query node and relationship definitions of a view, you can set a hierarchy for the
view. This enables you to define the organizational structure of CIs in the view by displaying
Page 200 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
selected CIs at different levels. When no hierarchy is defined, the Topology Map or table displays
all CIs included in the query results on one level by default. For example, if the query results include
nodes and IP Subnets, both CI types are displayed on the same level in the Topology Map or table.
Note: The maximum number of CIs that can be displayed in a single layer of the Topology Map
is 900. If a view contains a layer with more than 900 CIs, the view is not displayed in the
Topology Map until the hierarchy is changed. However, a layer with more than 900 CIs can be
displayed in a table in Text mode.
For details on setting the hierarchy, see "Setting the View Hierarchy" on page 249.
Viewing Related CIs
You can view all the CIs related to a selected CI in the topology map. Select a CI in a view and then
select the Related CIs tab. The Get Related CIs pane enables you to select the scope of the
display. If you select View, the topology map displays only the selected CI and its related CIs in the
view (no matter where it is in the view hierarchy). If you select CMDB, it displays the selected CI
and all of its related CIs in the RTSM. You can also filter the results from the Get Related CIs pane
by CI type and apply perspectives to a CI. For details, see "Get Related CIs Pane" on page 234.
You can also display Related CIs using the Get Related CIs from CMDB dialog box. For details,
see "Get Related CIs From CMDB Dialog Box" on page 223.
Deleting Relationships
The Topology Map shows only the relationships for the CIs that are part of the current view;
however, the same relationships may also be part of other views. When you delete a relationship in
IT Universe Manager, it is deleted from the RTSM and from all views.
When a relationship is deleted, the CI on the other end of the relationship may remain in the view, if
it still matches the pattern of the view. However, if the deleted relationship is a composition link, the
target CI is deleted with it.
In a perspective-based view, you can remove the CI completely from the view (without deleting it
from the RTSM), by hiding it from the view in the Perspective-based View Editor in the Modeling
Studio.
When you delete a relationship that was created by the DFM process, the relationship is restored
the next time that DFM runs (if the relationship is still valid), and it reappears in all relevant pattern
views.
It can take a few minutes to delete subtrees, or multiple CIs and relationships, from a view.
Inter-Layer Relationships
In certain circumstances, IT Universe Manager displays a relationship between CIs in a layer of a
view that does not reflect an actual relationship between the CIs in that layer, but rather a
relationship between CIs on deeper layers of the view. Such a relationship is known as an interlayer relationship.
For example, in the following view, two node CIs are related to each other with a dependency
relationship. Each is also related to an IP Subnet by a membership relationship and the view
hierarchy is defined such that the nodes are on the layer beneath the IP Subnet.
Page 201 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
When you consume the view in IT Universe Manager, the relationship between the node CIs (which
are under different IP Subnets) is displayed in the higher layer of the view as a relationship between
the parent IP Subnets, even though the actual relationship only exists between the CIs in the lower
layer of the view. You can double-click the relationship to display the full path between the IP
Subnets.
Another form of inter-layer relationship occurs when the same CI appears under more than one
parent CI of the same type in the layer above it. In such a case, the child CI and its relationships are
duplicated in the view display, due to the hierarchy definition. The relationships of such child CIs
result in inter-layer relationships between the parent CIs. This type of inter-layer relationship is
known as a duplication metalink.
For example, in the following view, a single node CI appears under two IP Subnet CIs in the
hierarchy. The node and its children thus appear twice in the view - once under each IP Subnet.
Each node is effectively related to the child CIs of the node under the other IP Subnet, which
generates an inter-layer relationship between the two IP Subnets.
Page 202 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Inter-layer relationships and duplication metalinks are displayed in gray in the topology map. IT
Universe Manager provides the following options for viewing inter-layer relationships:
l
None. Hide all inter-layer relationships.
l
Inter Layer. Display inter-layer relationships of the first type, but not duplication metalinks.
l
Full. Display all inter-layer relationships, including duplication metalinks.
A tooltip for the inter-layer relationship displays the inner relationships which it represents. If there is
only one inner relationship, the relationship label displays that relationship type. If there are multiple
inner relationships, the label becomes Inter-layer and the tooltip displays a list of all the inner
relationships. If there are more than ten inner relationships, only the first ten are displayed, and a
note indicates that there are more inner relationships.
Page 203 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Create CIs and Relationships in the RTSM
This task describes how to create related and non-related CIs, as well as relationships between
CIs, in the RTSM.
Define a New Non-related CI
Click the New CI button
in the toolbar. In the New CI dialog box, select a CI type from the tree
and define the properties for the new CI. For details, see "New CI/New Related CI Dialog Box" on
page 236.
Define a New Related CI
Click the New Related CI button
in the toolbar. In the New Related CI dialog box, select a CI
type from the tree and define the properties for the new CI. On the Relationship page of the dialog
box, select the type of relationship and define its properties. For details, see "New CI/New Related
CI Dialog Box" on page 236.
Attach Existing CIs
Select a CI in a view. Right-click the CI and select Relate to CI. In the Insert Relationship dialog
box, select a target CI. On the Relationship page of the dialog box, select the type of relationship
and define its properties. For details, see "Insert Relationship Dialog Box" on page 224.
Page 204 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
View Related CIs
The following steps describe the options for viewing related CIs in IT Universe Manager.
Display Related CIs
In IT Universe Manager, select a CI in the Topology map or the CI Selector and select the Related
CIs tab. Click the Enable Related CIs Retrieval button
. The selected CI is displayed with its
related CIs. Select a different CI or multiple CIs from the CI Selector, and the display changes
accordingly.
Note: You can display the Related CIs content in map mode or in text mode.
For details on the Get Related CIs user interface, see "Get Related CIs Pane" on page 234.
Select the Scope of the Display
In the Get Related CIs pane, select the scope of the related CIs display. Click the Show Related
CIs button. The display changes according to your selection.
Filter the Related CIs
In the Filter Related CIs by CI Type section, select the CI types to appear in the related CIs
display. Click the Filter Related CIs button. The filtered results appear in the tab. The scope
selected above still applies and the display is reduced according to your filter selection.
Apply Perspectives to a CI
In the Apply Perspectives to CI section, select the perspectives to apply to your selected CI. Click
the Apply Perspectives button. The results are displayed in the tab.
Note: This feature is only relevant when CMDB is selected as the scope.
Page 205 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Check Status of Application Discovery (Rediscover
a View)
You, the application owner or administrator, need to be kept informed of any problems to your
application. So, for example, you need to know that discovery is working correctly and that its
current configuration can connect to the application database. This section explains how to run the
rediscovery procedure that enables you to check the current status of the discovery of an
application.
Note:
l
Set up and configuration is performed by the BSM administrator. For details, see
"Prerequisites" below.
l
Rediscovery is performed by the application owner/administrator. For details, see "Access
the View" below.
l
You do not need any knowledge of Data Flow Management (DFM) to run this procedure.
l
By default, you can run the rediscovery procedure on views that contain fewer than 10,000
CIs. For details on changing this number, see "Important information" on page 243.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Prerequisites
Note: This step is performed by the BSM administrator.
a. In DFM, create a module that contains the jobs that must discover the application. For
details, see "Discovery Control Panel – Advanced Mode Workflow" in the Data Flow
Management Guide.
b. Activate the module and all the jobs. The jobs must remain activated.
c. Verify that the module has run without errors. For details, see "Error Messages Overview"
and "Discovery Control Panel - Details Tab" in the Data Flow Management Guide.
d. Correct any errors in the application and confirm that DFM finds no errors during the next
run.
Caution: The application owner cannot rediscover a view if DFM is reporting errors.
You must set an error-free baseline.
e. In the Modeling Studio, define a view that includes the application CI or CIs to be
rediscovered. These are the CIs that are created when you activate the jobs that discover
the application. For details, see "Create a Pattern View" on page 265..
f. Notify the application owner of the name of the view.
2.
Access the View
Page 206 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Note: This step is performed by the application owner/administrator.
In IT Universe Manager, access the view that includes the application CIs to be rediscovered.
For details, see "Search for CIs in Search Mode" on page 136.
3.
View Results in the View
a. Check the complete application. Click the Show Discovery and Changes Summary
button
in the CI Selector toolbar. The Show Discovery Status and Changes of View
dialog box is displayed. The dialog box displays information about which jobs and trigger CI
discovered the CIs in the view, on the last occasion that DFM ran the discovery for the
jobs. For details, see "Show Discovery Status and Changes Dialog Box" on page 242.
To run the discovery, click the Rerun Discovery button. To view information about the jobs
and trigger CIs, use the links to drill down. For details, see "Error Messages Overview" in
the RTSM Developer Reference Guide.
b. Check specific components of your application. Select the component's CI in the
Topology Map pane and display the Discovery tab in the Advanced pane. For details, see
"Show Discovery Status and Changes Dialog Box" on page 242.
To rediscover several CIs, press CTRL, select the CIs and display the Discovery tab.
To run the discovery, click the Rerun Discovery button.
4.
Schedule the Rediscovery
You can schedule how often the rediscovery procedure should run. In the Job Definition
window, choose the Rerun Discovery on View action. For details, see "Job Definition Dialog
Box".
Page 207 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Retrieve Impact Analysis Results – Scenario
Impact Analysis Manager enables you to create an Impact rule that allows you to simulate the
impact certain infrastructure changes have on your system. The results of the Impact rule are
displayed in IT Universe Manager. The Impact Analysis results in this task describe how a change
in CPU operation impacts the node to which it is connected.
This task includes the following steps:
l
"Define an Impact Analysis TQL Query " below
l
"Define an Impact Rule" below
l
"Create a View in the Modeling Studio" on page 210
l
"Get Impact Analysis Results" on page 210
1.
Define an Impact Analysis TQL Query
To define an Impact Analysis TQL query, you need to create an Impact rule and then add the
TQL query nodes and relationships that define the query.
To create an Impact Analysis TQL query, select Admin > RTSM Administration >Modeling
> Impact Analysis Manager. For details about how to add query nodes and relationships to a
query, see "Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL Query" on page 32
Example of an Impact Analysis TQL Query:
In this Impact Analysis TQL query, a CPU and a node are linked by a Composition
relationship.
2.
Define an Impact Rule
When you define an Impact rule, you must specify the required causal relationship between the
query nodes. Define one query node as the trigger, or the query node that represents the
changes you want to make to the system, and another query node as the one that is impacted.
Right-click the query node you want to define as the trigger and select Define Impacted to
open the Impacted Query Nodes dialog box. Select the query node that you want the trigger
query node to impact and click Next. Then click the Add button to open the Impact Rules
Definition dialog box to set conditions for defining impacted query nodes. For details about how
to define an Impact rule, see "Impact Rules Definition Dialog Box" on page 366.
Page 208 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Note: The change state option in the Impact rule definition is no longer relevant for Impact
Analysis. The only supported state is operation.
Example of an Impact Rule:
The Conditions area in the Impact Rules Definition dialog box defines the conditions under
which the simulated change in the system is triggered. The Severity area defines the
severity of the impact on the impacted query node.
The Impact rule in this example states that when the CPU operation is not in the normal
state, the node is impacted. Since the severity is set to 100% of the trigger's severity, the
severity of the node is the same as the severity of the CPU, which is determined when
Impact Analysis is run.
In the resulting TQL query, an upward arrow appears next to the query node defined as the
trigger query node and a downward arrow appears next to the query node defined as the
impacted query node.
Page 209 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
3.
Create a View in the Modeling Studio
Go to the Modeling Studio and create a view matching the TQL query of the Impact rule you
defined. For details, see "Pattern View Editor" on page 303.
4.
Get Impact Analysis Results
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe Manager and select the
required view in the CI Selector. To get Impact Analysis results, you need to run the Impact
rule on a CI instance in the topology map that is a trigger. Right-click a trigger CI and select
Run Impact Analysis to open the Run Impact Analysis dialog box. For details on how to run
an Impact rule, see "Run Impact Analysis Dialog Box" on page 240.
Example for Getting Impact Analysis Results:
An Impact Analysis TQL query is created containing a CPU and node connected by a
Composition relationship. The CPU query node is defined as the trigger query node and
the query node of type node is defined as the impacted query node.
The following Impact rule is defined for the query.
Page 210 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Right-click a CPU CI in the view, and select Run Impact Analysis to open the Run
Impact Analysis dialog box. Set the trigger severity to a value other than Normal.
To see results, click one of the following:
n
Show in Views. This assigns a status to all the CIs in the view. Only the node CI
connected to the CPU CI (whose severity was changed), becomes impacted. The
trigger CI and the impacted CI turn orange because the trigger severity was set as
Major (7) on the scale in the Run Impact Analysis dialog box, which is assigned an
Page 211 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
orange color.
n
Show Map. A map appears in a separate window containing only the trigger CPU CI
and the node CI it impacted. The relationship connecting the two CIs contains the name
of the Impact rule defined in Impact Analysis Manager.
Note: Optionally, you can create a URL that enables you to embed the map. For
details, see "Direct Link Parameters – Impact Map Page" on page 117.
n
Generate Report. Generates an Impact Analysis report that displays a list of CIs that
are impacted in the system as a result of the simulated changes. For details, see "Run
Impact Analysis Dialog Box" on page 240
Page 212 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Take a Snapshot of a View
You can take a snapshot of a view in IT Universe Manager, save it, and then compare snapshots of
the same view taken at different times using the Compare Snapshots Report. For details on how to
take a snapshot of a view, see "Save Snapshot Dialog Box" on page 242. For details on how to
view actual differences in the compared views, see "Compare Snapshots Report" on page 340.
Page 213 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Print and Save a Topology Map to File
You can print the content of any topology map and then save it to file. Before printing, it is
recommended to define your print settings and arrange the contents of the topology map according
to your requirements. For details on how to define print settings, see "Print Setup Dialog Box" on
page 170. For details on how to preview the content of the topology map before printing, see "Print
Preview Dialog Box" on page 170. For details on how to print the content of a topology map, see
"Print Dialog Box" on page 169. For details on how to save a topology map to file, see "Export Map
to Image Dialog Box" on page 154.
Page 214 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
IT Universe Manager User Interface
This section includes (in alphabetical order):
l
"Add CIs to Model Dialog Box" below
l
"Add CIs to View Dialog Box" on next page
l
"Change Timeframe Dialog Box" on next page
l
"CI/Relationship History Dialog Box" on page 217
l
"Configuration Item Properties Dialog Box" on page 219
l
"Get Related CIs From CMDB Dialog Box" on page 223
l
"Insert Relationship Dialog Box" on page 224
l
"IT Universe Manager Page" on page 227
l
"New CI/New Related CI Dialog Box" on page 236
l
"Run Impact Analysis Dialog Box" on page 240
l
"Save Snapshot Dialog Box" on page 242
l
"Show Discovery Status and Changes Dialog Box" on page 242
l
"Show Impact Pane" on page 243
Add CIs to Model Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to add selected CIs to a model.
To access
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe Manager.
Right click a CI or multiple CIs in the CI Selector and select Add CIs to Model.
Important
This feature is only relevant for instance based models. You cannot add selected
information CIs to a pattern based model.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
<Model tree>
When Existing Model is selected, select a model from the tree.
Define New CI
Properties
When New Model is selected, define the name and properties of the
model.
Existing Model
Select Existing Model to add the selected CIs to an existing model.
New Model
Select New Model to add the selected CIs to a new model.
Select CI Type
When New Model is selected, select a CI type for the model.
Page 215 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Add CIs to View Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to add selected CIs to a perspective based view.
To
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe Manager.Right
access click a CI or multiple CIs in the CI Selector and select Add CIs to View.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (AZ)
Description
<View tree>
When Existing View is selected, select a view from the tree.
Existing View
Select Existing View to add the selected CIs to an existing perspective
based view.
New View
Select New View to add the selected CIs to a new perspective based view
View Name
When New View is selected, edit the name of the view.
Change Timeframe Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to display changes in the topology map and set the time frame for the
changes to display.
To access
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe Manager.
Click the Set Change Timeframe button
Universe status bar.
in the main toolbar or the IT
Important
When the change indicators are displayed in the topology map, a message
information appears in the IT Universe status bar Change Timeframe is Active.
To hide the indicators, open the dialog box and select Do not display changes,
or select the Reset Change Timeframe button
in the IT Universe status bar.
User interface elements are described below:
Page 216 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Display changes
according to the
selected timeframe
Select this option to display an indicator next to each CI that was
added or changed within the selected period as follows:
l
Indicator for an added CI
l
Indicator for a changed CI
Select a time period from the drop-down list. If you select Custom,
click the ellipsis button
to select the Date From and Date Until
fields. The changes to the CIs of the view within the selected period
are displayed in the map.
When the indicators are displayed, you can click the indicator to open
the CI History dialog box, which displays the history for the CI over
the selected period.
Do not display
changes
Select this option to hide the change indicators.
CI/Relationship History Dialog Box
This dialog box displays a list of CI or relationship attributes in which changes have occurred as
well as the differences between two configuration files.
To access
l
In IT Universe Manager, right-click the selected CI or relationship in the CI
Selector or the Topology Map and select CI History.
l
In Data Flow Management, in the Discovered by [Module or Job Name] CIs
dialog box, right-click a CI and choose CI History.
Note: CI and relationship history data is also available in the History tab of the
Advanced pane in IT Universe Manager.
Important
Only attributes marked with the Change Monitored or Comparable qualifiers are
information tracked in the CMDB History database. If you want an attribute to appear in the CI
history, select the Change Monitored or the Comparable qualifier for it in the
Attributes tab of the CI Type Manager. For CIs, some attributes are designated as
Change Monitored by default. For relationships the attributes must be designated
manually in the CI Type Manager.
In addition, to track history for a relationship, you must select the TRACK_LINK_
CHANGES qualifier for the relationship in the Qualifier tab of the CI Type
Manager.
User interface elements are described below:
Page 217 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click Refresh to refresh the data in the table.
View the difference between two history entries for the content of a configuration file.
This is relevant in the following situations:
l
Select two history entries for the Document Content attribute for CIs of the type
Configuration Document to compare to each other.
l
Select one history entry for the Document Content attribute for CIs of the type
Configuration Document to compare to the current content for that CI.
Click the Show difference button to open the Visualdiff report, which displays a
comparison of the two entries. Text added to the second entry appears highlighted in
yellow. Text removed from the first entry appears highlighted in red. Differences
between the entries appear highlighted in green.
Choose the export format for the table data. The available options are:
l
Excel. The table data is formatted as an .xls (Excel) file that can be displayed in a
spreadsheet.
l
PDF. The table data is exported in PDF format.
Note: When exporting to PDF, select a reasonable number of columns to display
to ensure that the report is legible.
l
RTF. The table data is exported in Rich Text Format.
l
CSV. The table data is formatted as a comma-separated values (CSV) text file
that can be displayed in a spreadsheet.
Note: For the CSV formatted table data to display correctly, the comma (,) must
be defined as the list separator. In Windows, to verify or modify the list separator
value, open Regional Options from the Control Panel, and on the Numbers tab
ensure that the comma is defined as the List Separator value.
l
XML. The table data is formatted as an XML file that can be opened in a text or
XML editor.
Tip: To extract HTML code from the report:
n
Save the file as HTML
n
Open the file in an HTML editor
n
Copy the relevant table into the target file
Attribute The name of the attribute.
Change
Date
Page 218 of 446
The date when the last change occurred.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Filter by
Filter the data in the table by one or more of the following filters:
l
Time Range. Select the time period for which the CI history is displayed.
l
Change Type. Select the type of changes displayed in the table.
l
Attribute. Select the attribute types displayed in the table.
Modified Indicates the cause of the change. For example, the field can contain the name of a
By
user or a DFM job.
New
Value
The new value of the attribute.
Old
Value
The previous value of the attribute.
Configuration Item Properties Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to view and edit basic information for an existing CI or relationship.
To access
Page 219 of 446
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe Manager
and use one of the following:
l
Select a CI in the topology map or the CI Selector. In the Advanced Pane,
select the Properties tab and click Edit.
l
Right-click a CI in the CI Selector or the Topology map and select Properties.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Important
The Configuration Item Properties dialog box contains two types of properties:
information
l General properties, which include general information about the CI or
relationship. These properties are common to all CITs and are documented
below.
l
CIT-specific properties, which include properties specific to that CI. These
properties vary according to the type of CI or relationship and are not
documented except in the case of TransactionVision Monitor CIs. For details
about TV Monitor CIs, see "Transaction Configuration Page, Tracing Tab" in
the BSM User Guide.
When you sort the properties by category, the CIT-specific properties appear at
the top of the list and the general properties appear at the bottom.
You can view a description of the selected property in the Description Area at the
bottom of the dialog box. Click the Show/Hide Description Area button to
display the Description Area.
When accessing the Configuration Item Properties dialog box from within certain
applications, the fields are not editable.
Mandatory fields are denoted by an asterisk.
Note: HP Universal CMDB does not fully support surrogate pairs and combining
characters.
See also
"CI Lifecycle and the Aging Mechanism" in the RTSM Administration Guide
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click to display the properties by category.
Click to display the properties alphabetically.
Toggles between showing and hiding the description area at the bottom of the CI
Properties dialog box.
Click Expand to expand the properties tree when the properties are displayed by
category.
Click Collapse to collapse the properties tree when the properties are displayed
by category.
Page 220 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Choose the export format for the table data. The available options are:
l
Excel. The table data is formatted as an .xls (Excel) file that can be displayed
in a spreadsheet.
l
PDF. The table data is exported in PDF format.
Note: When exporting to PDF, select a reasonable number of columns to
display to ensure that the report is legible.
l
RTF. The table data is exported in Rich Text Format.
l
CSV. The table data is formatted as a comma-separated values (CSV) text file
that can be displayed in a spreadsheet.
Note: For the CSV formatted table data to display correctly, the comma (,) must
be defined as the list separator. In Windows, to verify or modify the list separator
value, open Regional Options from the Control Panel, and on the Numbers tab
ensure that the comma is defined as the List Separator value.
XML. The table data is formatted as an XML file that can be opened in a text or
XML editor.
l
Tip: To extract HTML code from the report:
<Quick
filter>
Actual
Deletion
Period
Page 221 of 446
n
Save the file as HTML
n
Open the file in an HTML editor
n
Copy the relevant table into the target file
Enter a string in the Quick filter box to filter the property names and values. Click
the left end of the box to open the drop-down menu of filter options:
l
Select All to search for the filter string in both property names and property
values. Select Name to search for the filter string in property names only.
Select Value to search for the filter string in property values only.
l
Select Case sensitive to search for the filter string exactly as entered. Select
Case insensitive to ignore the case of the filter string.
l
Select Use wild cards to use the wildcard symbol * in the filter string.
l
Select Match from start to search for the filter string at the beginning of a
property name or value. Select Match exactly to search for the exact filter
string. Select Match anywhere to search for the filter string anywhere in the
properties.
The number of days after which the CI or relationship is deleted.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Allow CI
Update
Description
When selected, this option allows the DFM process to automatically update the
CI or relationship properties with information that it discovers. If you change the
value of a property supplied by the DFM process, the value is overridden by the
discovered value.
When this option is cleared, the CI or relationship properties are not overridden by
the DFM process.
Apply
Click Apply to save the changes made to the CI or relationship properties.
CI Type
The type of the CI or relationship (read-only value). For information about CITs in
BSM, see "CI Type Manager" on page 371.
Created By
The user name of the administrator who manually created the CI or relationship,
where applicable (read-only value).
Create
Time
The date and time when the CI or relationship was created.
Deletion
Candidate
Period
The period after which the CI becomes a candidate for deletion when the aging
mechanism is enabled.
Description A brief description of the CI or relationship.
Display
Label
The name of the CI or relationship as it appears in the CI Selector.
Edit
In the Properties tab of the Advanced pane, you can view a CI's properties but you
cannot edit them. Click Edit to open the Configuration Item Properties dialog box
where you can edit the properties.
Enable
Aging
If a CI or relationship is not updated or refreshed over a period of time (for
example, a CI is not rediscovered by DFM and no manual update occurs), an
aging mechanism deletes the CI from the RTSM. For details, see "CI Lifecycle
and the Aging Mechanism" in the RTSM Administration Guide.
True: the aging mechanism is enabled for this CI or relationship.
Default value: False. The default value for DFM CIs is True.
Note:
Global Id
Page 222 of 446
l
If the aging mechanism is disabled, this field is ignored.
l
This field is displayed for certain CIs only.
The internal ID of the CI or relationship in the RTSM (read-only value).
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Last
Access
Time
The time that the CI or relationship was last accessed, whether when being
updated or being discovered by DFM. This field is only displayed for certain CIs or
relationships.
This parameter is used by the aging mechanism. For details, see "CI Lifecycle
and the Aging Mechanism" in the RTSM Administration Guide.
Note: By default, this property is updated every time the CI is touched by a
running discovery job or integration. To prevent this property from being updated
by a discovery job or integration, go to the Data Flow Management module, and in
the Adapter Management > Adapter Configuration tab, clear the Update last
access time option. For more details, see "Adapter Configuration Tab" in the Data
Flow Management Guide.
Last
Modified
Time
The date and time when the CI or relationship properties were last updated.
Monitored
By
Indicates whether the CI is monitored by a SiteScope monitor or an EMS
Integration monitor.
Name
The name of the CI or relationship.
Note
Enables you to enter other information about the CI or relationship.
Origin
An ID for the source that automatically created the CI or relationship, or the
application where the CI or relationship was created (read-only value).
Reset
Click the Reset button to restore the original property settings of the CI or
relationship.
Updated by
The user name of the administrator who updated the CI or relationship properties.
User Label
Enables you to define a display label for the CI or relationship. If no value is
entered, the CI name appears as the default label.
Shortcut Menu
Menu Item
Description
Copy Property
Name and Value
Copies the name and value of the selected property to the memory.
Get Related CIs From CMDB Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to view the CIs related to a specified CI in the RTSM in map or table
format.
To access
Page 223 of 446
In IT Universe Manager, right-click the required CI and select Get Related CIs.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Important
The Get Related CIs From CMDB dialog box is a standalone version of the
information Related CIs tab in IT Universe Manager. You can control the content of the
display using the features in the Get Related CIs pane. For details, see "Get
Related CIs Pane" on page 234.
You cannot select the scope of the related CIs displayed in the Get Related CIs
From CMDB dialog box. The scope is the entire CMDB.
Note: The text mode format includes the icons found in the Element Instances
dialog box. For details, see "Element Instances Dialog Box" on page 70.
Relevant
tasks
"View Related CIs" on page 205
Insert Relationship Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to attach CIs to the CI you selected in the CI Selector.
To access
In IT Universe Manager, right-click a CI in the Topology Map or the CI Selector,
and select Relate to CI.
Important
To create a relationship between two CIs, select the source CI in the CI Selector
information or the Topology Map and then select Relate to CI from the shortcut menu. On the
first page of the dialog box (the CI Selection page), you select the target CI(s).
Then click Relationship, to select the relationship type on the second page of the
dialog box.
You can also create a relationship between two CIs graphically by clicking the
Create Relationship button
in the toolbar and drawing a line between the two
CIs. In this case, a smaller version of the Insert Relationship dialog box opens,
which contains the following tabs:
l
Select Relationship. Displays a tree with the available relationship types.
Select the required relationship.
Note: You can double-click the relationship you select to save using the
default properties.
l
Relationship Properties. Displays the properties of the selected relationship.
You can edit the properties as described in "Define Relationship Properties
Pane" on next page.
Relevant
tasks
"Create CIs and Relationships in the RTSM" on page 204
See also
l
"CI Selector" on page 139
l
"Relationship Page" on next page
User interface elements are described below:
Page 224 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click to add the selected CIs in the left pane to the Target CIs pane.
Click to remove selected CIs from the Target CIs pane (this does not delete the
CIs from the RTSM).
Select target
CIs
Select a view to display in the view tree and select CIs to move to the Target CIs
pane.
For details on the Select target CIs pane, see "CI Selector" on page 139.
Source CI
The CI you selected as the source CI.
Target CIs
Displays the CIs you have selected as target CIs for the relationship.
Relationship Page
This page enables you to define the relationship to be created between the original CI and the CIs
selected in the CI Selection page of the dialog box.
To access
Click the Relationship button from the Insert Relationship dialog box.
Important
When defining multiple relationships, you can define different descriptions and
information property values for each relationship. Skip the property definitions here and edit
each relationship individually after it is created.
User interface elements are described below:
Select Relationship Pane
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Direction
Select the direction of the relationship.
For some relationship types (for example, Composition, or between a group CI
and a monitor CI), only one direction is valid.
Relationship Define the type of relationship created between the original CI and the CIs being
attached. Select an option from the list.
Source CI
Displays the name of the CI on the first end of the relationship. This is the CI that
you selected in the view.
Target CI
Displays the name of the CI on the second end of the relationship, that is
attached to the original CI.
Define Relationship Properties Pane
Page 225 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Actual
Deletion
Period
The period after which the relationship is deleted when the aging mechanism is
enabled.
Allow CI
Update
When the value is set to true, the DFM process automatically updates the
relationship.
Created By
The user name of the administrator who manually created the relationship, where
applicable.
Create
Time
The date and time when the relationship was created.
Deletion
Candidate
Period
The number of days after which the relationship becomes a candidate for deletion.
Description A detailed description of the relationship.
Destination
Network
Address
Defined only for route links. Indicates the destination network address to which
this route is configured.
Enable
Aging
If a CI or relationship is not updated or refreshed over a period of time (for
example, a CI is not rediscovered by DFM and no manual update occurs), an
aging mechanism deletes the CI from the RTSM. For details, see "CI Lifecycle
and the Aging Mechanism" in the RTSM Administration Guide.
True: the aging mechanism is enabled for this CI or relationship.
Default value: false. The default value for DFM CIs is true.
Note:
l
If the aging mechanism is disabled, this field is ignored.
l
This field is only displayed for certain CIs.
Last
Access
Time
The time that the relationship was last accessed, whether when being updated or
being discovered by DFM. This field is only displayed for certain CIs.
Last
Modified
Time
The date and time when the relationship properties were last updated.
Page 226 of 446
This parameter is used by the aging mechanism. For details, see "CI Lifecycle
and the Aging Mechanism" in the RTSM Administration Guide.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Must
Description
When the value is set to true, the child CI is dominant when the percentage rule is
used to calculate status for the parent CI. If the CI has low status, the parent must
take the child CI status, if necessary overriding the percentage rule calculation.
This is useful to give emphasis to an important CI. For example, you might want
to define Must for a database CI, so that status is critical all the way up the
subtree if the database falls, regardless of the status of the other CIs in the
subtree.
The must status defined for a relationship applies for that relationship only – it is
not used in any other relationships of the child CI. For details, see "Understanding
the Percentage Rule" in the BSM User Guide.
Name
A brief description of the relationship. If no value is entered, the relationship type
is used in place of the name.
Note
Enables you to enter other information about the relationship.
Origin
An ID for the source that automatically created the relationship, or the application
where the relationship was created.
Updated
By
The user name of the administrator who updated the CI properties.
User Label
Enables you to define a display label for the relationship. If no value is entered, the
relationship name appears as the default label.
Weight
When a weight value is entered, the child CI is given more weight in percentage
calculations, when percentage rule is used to calculate status for the parent CI.
For example, if a child CI is given a weight of 3, then it has three times more
impact on the parent status calculation than its unweighted siblings.
The weight defined for a relationship applies for that relationship only – it is not
used in any other relationships the child CI may have. For more details, see
"Understanding the Percentage Rule" in the BSM User Guide.
IT Universe Manager Page
This page enables you to define and manage the CIs and relationships in your views.
To access
Page 227 of 446
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe Manager.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Important
The IT Universe Manager page contains the following panes:
information
l CI Selector. Displays the CIs of a selected view. You can select the view
from a drop–down list or search for a specific CI. For details, see "CI Selector"
on page 139.
l
Topology Map. Displays the CIs of a selected view in Map mode or Text
mode.
l
Advanced Pane. Displays properties, history, and discovery for the selected
CI or view.
l
Get Related CIs. This pane can be accessed from the Related CIs tab of the
Topology Map. It controls the content of the display in the tab.
In IT Universe Manager, you can create new CIs, modify existing CIs, or delete
CIs. All of these actions have a direct effect on the entire IT Universe model. For
example, if you delete a CI in your view, that CI is deleted from the IT Universe
model and no longer appears in any view.
Topology Map
This area displays the CIs of the currently selected view in graphical or table format. By default, the
CIs are displayed in graphical format.
To access
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe Manager.
Important
You can customize the Topology Map shortcut menu to include other commands
information (for example, ping, run a program, open a URL) from within CI Type Manager. For
details, see "Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated
Relationship Wizard" on page 391.
Note: For grouped CIs and the relationships between them, not all of the shortcut
menu options are active. Grouped CIs appear in parentheses in the CI Selector
and in the Topology Map. You can double-click a link to a grouped CI to open the
Link Map, which displays the individual CIs and relationships. Right-click a CI or
relationship in the Link Map to display the regular shortcut menu. For details about
grouping CIs, see "Query Node Grouping Dialog Box" on page 312.
See also
"Working with Topology Map" on page 151
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (A-Z)
Map mode
Description
Click Map to display the selected layer of CIs in topology map
format.
Note: If the selected layer of the view is too large to display in
topology map format, a message appears with a link to display the
layer in text format.
Page 228 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element (A-Z)
Text mode
Description
Click Text to display the attribute properties of the CIs in the
selected layer in table format.
For details on some of the toolbar icons in Text Mode, see
"Element Instances Dialog Box" on page 70.
Specify the CIT you want displayed in the table. The table also
includes the children of the selected CIT.
Note: This option is displayed in Text mode only.
<Breadcrumbs>
At the top of the topology map, the breadcrumbs indicate the
relevant query nodes in each layer of the view for the path to the
selected layer. The first item in the path is the Top Layer. When
you select a CI from the layer below, the parent CI forms the next
item in the breadcrumb path. You can click on any item in the path
to display that layer in the topology map.
<CI type attributes>
The columns appearing in Text mode represent the CIT attributes
of the selected CIs.
<IT Universe Status Bar> The status bar below the topology map indicates the status of the
following processes:
Page 229 of 446
l
if Impact Analysis is active or not
l
if Change Timeframe is active or not
l
if Candidates for Deletion are shown or not
l
the time of the last update of the data
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
<Legend>
Indicates the icons displayed next to CIs with any of the following
special statuses:
l
Added. When Change Timeframe is active, indicates that the
CI was added.
l
Candidate for Deletion. Indicates that the CI is a candidate for
deletion.
l
Changed. When Change Timeframe is active, indicates that
the CI was changed.
l
External. Indicates that the CI is a federated CI.
l
Impacted. When Impact Analysis is active, indicates an
impacted CI.
l
Impacted and Trigger. When Impact Analysis is active,
indicates a trigger CI that is impacted.
l
Note. Indicates that a note was added for the CI.
l
Trigger. When Impact Analysis is active, indicates a trigger CI.
<Main Menu>
For details, see "Main Menu" on page 168.
<Query Node>
The query nodes in the topology map represent CIs.
Hold the pointer over a query node to display its tooltip which
describes the type of the CI.
<Relationship>
The links in the topology map represent relationships.
Hold the pointer over a relationship to display its tooltip, which
describes the type of the relationship.
Note: When you select a calculated relationship, the Delete
button in the toolbar is disabled.
<Toolbar>
For details, see "Toolbar Options" on page 171.
Note: When accessing the Topology map via direct links, the
toolbar includes options from the Related CIs Map. For details, see
"Get Related CIs From CMDB Dialog Box" on page 223.
<Topology Map
Sidebar>
For details, see "Topology Map Sidebar" on page 178.
Related CIs
Click the Related CIs tab to display the interdependencies of the
selected CI within the view or the entire RTSM. You can control the
scope of the display from the Get Related CIs pane.
View Results
Click the View Results tab to display an entire layer within a view.
Page 230 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
IT Universe Manager Shortcut Menu
The IT Universe Manager page includes the following elements (listed alphabetically) available by
right-clicking a CI or relationship in the CI Selector pane or the Topology Map:
Menu Item
Description
Actions
Select one of the following options:
l
Add CI to Discovery Job. Displays the Add CI to Discovery Job dialog
box, which enables you to manually invoke a DFM job for the selected CI.
You can use this option to discover additional information about the CI
through one of the available DFM jobs.
l
Remove CI from Discovery Job. Displays the Remove CI from
Discovery Job dialog box, which enables you to manually remove a CI
from the DFM job.
l
Show Discovery status. Opens the Discovery Status dialog box for the
selected CI.
l
Open CI Credentials. Displays the Protocol Parameter dialog box,
which enables you to view the details of a previously-defined credential for
that CI. You cannot make any changes. This option is only relevant for CIs
that include a credentials property.
For details, see "Protocol Parameter Dialog Box" in the Data Flow
Management Guide.
l
Edit CI Credentials. Displays the Choose Credentials dialog box,
which enables you to choose another credentials set or edit the existing
credentials. This option is only relevant for CIs that include a credentials
property.
For details, see "Domain Credential References" in the Data Flow
Management Guide.
Add CIs to
Model
Adds selected CIs to a new or existing model.
Add CIs to
View
Adds selected CIs to a new or existing perspective based view.
CI/Relationship Displays the CI History dialog box. For details, see "CI/Relationship History
History
Dialog Box" on page 217.
Compare CIs
Report
Page 231 of 446
Run a Compare CIs Report for the selected CI. For details, see "Compare
CIs Report" on page 336.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Menu Item
Description
Delete from
CMDB
Enables you to delete the selected CI or relationship from the view and from
the RTSM.
Note: When you delete a parent CI, the selected CI and its children are
removed from the view, but only the selected CI is removed from the
database.
Get Related CIs Opens the Get Related CIs from CMDB dialog box. For details, see "Get
Related CIs From CMDB Dialog Box" on page 223.
Label
Note
Select one of the following options:
l
Edit Label. Opens the Edit Label dialog box which enables you to edit the
name of the CI.
l
Restore Default Label. Resets the CI name to its default value from the
RTSM.
Select one of the following options:
l
Add Note. Opens an editing box where you can add a note to the CI.
l
Delete Note. Deletes all text saved in a note for the selected CI.
Properties
Displays the Properties page for the selected CI or relationship. For details,
see "Configuration Item Properties Dialog Box" on page 219.
Relate to CI
Opens the Insert Relationship dialog box. For details, see "Insert
Relationship Dialog Box" on page 224.
Run Impact
Analysis
Enables you to run the Impact rule you defined in the Impact Analysis
Manager. Displays the Run Impact Analysis dialog box. For details, see
"Impact Analysis Manager" on page 354.
Note: You can only see Impact Analysis results if you defined an Impact rule
for that view in Impact Analysis Manager.
Show
Compound
Path
Page 232 of 446
Appears only for compound relationships. Displays the Link Map for the
selected relationship, which shows the CIs involved in the compound
relationship.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
Menu Item
Description
Show Impact
Enables you to select a CI that is defined by an Impact rule as a root cause
CI, and to display all the CIs that are impacted by it, and their statuses, in a
separate window.
This option appears only after the following has occurred:
l
You defined an Impact rule for the selected view in Impact Analysis
Manager (for details, see "Impact Analysis Manager" on page 354).
l
You clicked Show in Views in the Run Impact Analysis dialog box.
l
Impact Analysis results appear in the Topology Map.
For example, suppose an Impact rule is defined (for an IP Address CI) that
specifies that the rule impacts nodes, ports, and client-servers linked to the
IP Address.
By using the Show Impact option, you can display all CIs that are impacted
by the IP Address CI.
Show Root
Cause
This option enables you to retrieve root cause information for CIs that are
impacted by a chain of Impact rules. The output of Show Root Cause
displays a logical map that describes a chain of trigger/impacted CITs that
impact the CI.
The root cause CI is displayed in a separate window. If only one Impact rule
is defined for this CI, the Impact Analysis window is directly displayed.
This option appears only after the following has occurred:
l
You defined an Impact rule for the selected view in the Impact Analysis
Manager (for details see, "Impact Analysis Manager" on page 354).
l
You clicked Show in Views in the Run Impact Analysis dialog box.
l
Impact Analysis results appear in the Topology Map.
A window is displayed containing the root cause CI and all the other CITs in
the Impact rule chain.
To view the information about specific CIs that are triggered or impacted by
the Impact rule, double-click the relationship connecting the CIs. A map is
displayed.
Advanced Pane
User interface elements are described below:
Page 233 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Discovery
tab
Displays the DFM run status for the selected CIs. For details, see "Show
Discovery Status and Changes Dialog Box" and "Discovery Control Panel - Details
Tab" in the Data Flow Management Guide.
History
tab
Displays the history for the selected CI. For details, see "CI/Relationship History
Dialog Box" on page 217.
Properties Displays the selected CI's properties (the same properties that appear in the
tab
Configuration Item Properties dialog box). You can view the properties in the
properties tab, but you must open the dialog box to edit the properties. For details,
see "Configuration Item Properties Dialog Box" on page 219.
Get Related CIs Pane
This pane enables you to control the different options for viewing related CIs for a selected CI.
To access
Appears in the Related CIs tab of IT Universe Manager. If it is hidden, click the
Show Get Related CIs pane button
in the toolbar to display it.
Important
You can control the display in the Related CIs tab with the following controls:
information
l Set the scope of the display
l
Filter the related CIs by CI type
l
Apply perspectives to the selected CI
It is possible to display related CIs for several CIs at the same time. Use the CTRL
key to select multiple CIs at the same time in the CI Selector or the topology map.
Note: You can select to run the Get Related CIs search over integrated CIs also.
If the search results include CIs from a federated data source, they appear in the
topology map with an arrow icon, indicating that they are federated CIs However,
you cannot display related CIs of a federated CI.
Relevant
tasks
"View Related CIs" on page 205
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Display the previous search results.
Display the next search results.
Page 234 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
When the button is selected, the related CIs are added to the current results.
When it is not selected, the current display content is cleared and only the new
related CIs are displayed.
If you want to include integrated CIs in your search results, click Select Target
Integration Points for related CIs and select the required integration points
from the popup dialog box.
Note: If you select a disconnected integration point for your search, an error
message appears when the search is run, asking if you want to see local search
results.
Apply
Select perspectives from the list to apply to the selected CI. Only perspectives
perspectives relevant to the selected CI appear in the list. The selected CI is used as content
to CI
for the selected perspectives and the view results are displayed.
Note:
l
Application of perspectives is only relevant when CMDB is selected as the
scope. The feature is inactive when View is selected as the scope.
l
The perspectives displayed in the Apply Perspectives to CI list are filtered
according to the value set for the Enable perspective permission
enforcement on consumption functionality setting in General Settings in
Infrastructure Settings Manager.
n
If the value is set to False, all the perspectives are displayed, regardless of
the View permissions the user is given in the Views tab in Security
Manager.
n
If the value is set to True, the perspectives that are displayed are based on
the View permissions the user is given in the Views tab in Security
Manager.
The default for the Enable perspective permission enforcement on
consumption functionality setting is False.
Filter
Related CIs
by CI Type
Select the CI types from the list to display in the related CI results. Only the
selected CI types appear in the displayed results.
Select
scope
Select the scope of the related CIs displayed:
l
View. All related CIs in the selected view.
l
CMDB. All related CIs in the RTSM.
Note: This feature is not available in the Get Related CIs from CMDB dialog box
opened from the shortcut menu.
Show
Related CIs
Page 235 of 446
Click to display the related CIs according to your selection.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
New CI/New Related CI Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define a new CI or a new related CI.
To access
In IT Universe Manager, click the New CI icon
in the toolbar to create a nonrelated CI. Select a CI in the topology map and click the New Related CI icon
to create a related CI.
Important
To define a new CI, select the CI type from the tree at the top of the dialog box.
information The CI types in the tree that are available to be instantiated appear in black. The
CI types in faded text cannot be instantiated.
Edit the properties in the Define new CI properties area. The table below includes
the properties which are common to all CIs. In addition, there are other properties
specific to each CI.
If you are creating a related CI, click the Relationship button to go to the
relationship mode of the dialog box. Select a relationship and edit its properties.
Relevant
tasks
"Create CIs and Relationships in the RTSM" on page 204
See also
l
"CI Selector" on page 139
l
"Relationship Dialog Box" on page 238
l
"CI Lifecycle and the Aging Mechanism" in the RTSM Administration Guide
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Actual
Deletion
Period
The period after which the CI is deleted when the aging mechanism is enabled.
Allow CI
Update
When the value is set to true, this option enables the DFM process to
automatically update the CI properties with information that it discovers. If you
change the value of a property supplied by the DFM process, the value is
overridden by the discovered value.
When the value is set to false, the CI properties are not overridden by the DFM
process.
Created By
The user name of the administrator who manually created the CI, where
applicable.
Create Time
The date and time when the CI was created.
Page 236 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Deletion
Candidate
Period
The period after which the CI becomes a candidate for deletion when the aging
mechanism is enabled.
Description
A description of the CI.
Display
Label
The label that appears for the CI in the topology map.
Enable
Aging
If a CI or relationship is not updated or refreshed over a period of time (for
example, a CI is not rediscovered by DFM and no manual update occurs), an
aging mechanism deletes the CI from the RTSM. For details, see "CI Lifecycle
and the Aging Mechanism" in the RTSM Administration Guide.
True: the aging mechanism is enabled for this CI or relationship.
Default value: false. The default value for DFM CIs is true.
Note:
l
If the aging mechanism is disabled, this field is ignored.
l
This field is displayed for certain CIs only.
Is Candidate
For Deletion
Indicates if the CI is a candidate for deletion.
Last Access
Time
The time that the CI was last accessed, whether when being updated or being
discovered by DFM. This field is displayed only for certain CIs.
This parameter is used by the aging mechanism. For details, see "CI Lifecycle
and the Aging Mechanism" in the RTSM Administration Guide.
Last
Modified
Time
The date and time when the CI properties were last updated.
Name
The name of the CI.
Note
Enables you to enter other information about the CI.
Origin
An ID for the source that automatically created the CI, or the application where
the CI was created.
Relationship For a related CI, click Relationship to go to the relationship mode of the dialog
box.
Page 237 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Select CI
Type
Description
Enables you to select the CI type from the tree for the new CI. The CI types that
are available for the selected CI or view appear active in the CI type tree. The
other CI types appear in faded text and cannot be selected.
To limit the CI type tree to CI types from the current view, select CI Types from
the current view on the right. To display all CI types in the tree, select All CI
Types.
Updated By
The user name of the administrator who updated the CI properties.
User Label
Enables you to define a display label for the CI. If no value is entered, the CI
name appears as the default label.
Relationship Dialog Box
This page enables you to define the relationship between the new CI and the CI selected in the
view, as well as the properties of the relationship.
To access
Click the Relationship button from the New Related CI dialog box.
Important
information
This page only appears for new related CIs.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Allow CI
Update
When the value is set to true, the DFM process automatically updates the
relationship.
CI Definition Click CI Definition to return to the CI properties mode of the dialog box.
Created By
The user name of the administrator who manually created the relationship, where
applicable.
Create Time
The date and time when the relationship was created.
Description
A description of the relationship.
Direction
Select the relationship direction from the drop-down box.
Page 238 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Enable
Aging
Description
If a CI or relationship is not updated or refreshed over a period of time (for
example, a CI is not rediscovered by DFM and no manual update occurs), an
aging mechanism deletes the CI from the RTSM. For details, see "CI Lifecycle
and the Aging Mechanism" in the RTSM Administration Guide.
True: the aging mechanism is enabled for this CI or relationship.
Default value: false. The default value for DFM CIs is true.
Note:
Last Access
Time
l
If the aging mechanism is disabled, this field is ignored.
l
This field is displayed for certain CIs only.
The time that the relationship was last accessed, whether when being updated or
being discovered by DFM. This field is only displayed for certain relationships.
This parameter is used by the aging mechanism. For details, see "CI Lifecycle
and the Aging Mechanism" in the RTSM Administration Guide.
Must
When the value is set to true, the child CI is dominant when the percentage rule
is used to calculate status for the parent CI. If the CI has low status, the parent
must take the child CI status, overriding the percentage rule calculation if
necessary. This is useful to give emphasis to an important CI. For example, you
might want to define Must for a database CI, so that status is critical all the way
up the subtree if the database falls, regardless of the status of the other CIs in
the subtree.
The Must status defined for a relationship applies to that relationship only – it is
not used in any other relationships of the child CI.
Name
The name of the CI.
Network
Address
Defined only for route links. Indicates the destination network address to which
this route is configured.
Note
Enables you to enter other information about the CI.
Origin
An ID for the source that automatically created the relationship, or the application
where the relationship was created.
Relationship Enables you to define the type of relationship that is created between the two
CIs.
Source CI
The name of the CI on the first side of the relationship. This is the CI that you
selected in the view.
Target CI
The name of the CI on the second side of the relationship. This is the new CI that
you are creating.
Updated By
The user name of the administrator who updated the relationship properties.
Page 239 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Update Time The date and time when the CI properties were last updated.
User Label
Enables you to define a display label for the relationship.
Weight
When a weight value is entered, the child CI is given more weight in percentage
calculations, when the percentage rule is used to calculate status for the parent
CI. For example, if a child CI is given a weight of 3, then it has three times more
impact on the parent status calculation than its unweighted siblings.
The weight defined for a relationship applies to that relationship only – it is not
used in any other relationships of the child CI.
Run Impact Analysis Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to run the Impact rule you defined in Impact Analysis Manager for that
view.
To access
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe
Manager. Right-click a trigger query node in the Topology Map and select Run
Impact Analysis or click the Run Impact Analysis Now button
Universe status bar.
in the IT
Important
You can:
information
l Display in a new window all the CIs that are impacted by the trigger CI. The
relationships in the map represent the Impact rules. The name of the
relationship is the name of the Impact rule you defined in the Impact Analysis
Manager. For details, see "Show Map" on next page.
l
Simulate how the statuses of the impacted CIs are impacted. For details, see
"Show in Views" on next page.
l
Generate a report that displays a list of CIs that are impacted in the system as
a result of the simulated changes. For details, see "Generate Report" on next
page.
Note: This dialog only appears if an Impact rule is defined for that view. For
details, see "Impact Analysis Manager" on page 354.
Relevant
tasks
"Retrieve Impact Analysis Results – Scenario" on page 208
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
All Impact rules
Select to execute all impact rules in the impact analysis.
Page 240 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Generate Report
Generates an Impact Analysis report, which displays information that is
divided as follows:
l
Grouping by CIT. All the impacted CIs (the CIs that are impacted in
the system as a result of the simulated changes), sorted by CIT.
l
Affected Application. All the impacted CIs that belong to a specific
business service.
l
Triggered CIs. The CIs that represent the changes you want to
make to the system.
For details on the Impact Analysis report, see "Impact Analysis Report"
on page 345.
Impact rules bundle
Select the bundle containing the required impact rules for the impact
analysis.
Only Impact rules
located in specified
bundle
Select to execute the impact rules from the specified bundle in the
impact analysis.
Show in Views
Simulates how the statuses of the impacted CIs are impacted for the
selected state. The Topology Map displays the statuses of the trigger
CIs as well as all statuses of the CIs that are impacted by it.
The Topology Map also displays the Impact Analysis indicators:
l
A trigger CI is marked by this
indicator.
l
A CI that is both an impacted and a trigger CI is marked by this
indicator.
l
An impacted CI is marked by this
indicator.
Note: The statuses that appear here and the colors that represent each
status are defined in the severity list for that state in the System Type
Manager. For details, see "Create/Update List/Enumeration Definition
Dialog Box" on page 403.
Show Map
Enables you to select an Impact rule, and then display in a new window,
a simulation of all the CIs that are impacted by the trigger CI for the
selected state. If only one Impact rule is defined for this CI, the Impact
Rules window is displayed directly. For more details, see "Show Impact
Pane" on page 243.
The relationships in the map represent the Impact rules and the name of
the relationship is the name of the Impact rule you defined in the Impact
Analysis Manager.
Note: Show Map enables you to view the results of multiple triggers.
Page 241 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Trigger Severity
Select the required severity on the scale.
Note: The severity scale was defined for the state in the System Type
Manager. For details, see "System Type Manager" on page 377.
For example, you can create an Impact rule in the Impact Analysis
Manager that defines the severity of the trigger query node as other than
Warning (1). If you select a severity other than Warning (1), for
example, Minor (3), the condition is met and the simulated changes in
the system are triggered.
For details, see the "Impact Rules Definition Dialog Box" on page 366.
Save Snapshot Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to take a snapshot of a view and save it.
To access
In IT Universe Manager, click the Snapshot button
select Save Snapshot.
in the CI Selector and
Important
You can compare snapshots of the same view taken at different times using the
information Compare Snapshots Report. For details, see "Compare Snapshots Report" on
page 340.
Relevant
tasks
"Take a Snapshot of a View" on page 213
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Description
A description of the snapshot (optional).
Note
A note about the snapshot (optional).
View Name
The name of the view as it appears in the CI Selector. This field cannot be
edited.
Show Discovery Status and Changes Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to find recent changes, for example, to an application, by rediscovering
the CIs and jobs in a view.
Page 242 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
To access
In IT Universe Manager:
l
To rediscover all CIs of a view, click the Show Discovery and Changes
Summary button
in the CI Selector toolbar. The Show Discovery
Status and Changes dialog box is displayed.
l
Important
information
To rediscover one CI or several CIs in a view, select the CI and display the
Discovery tab in the Advanced pane.
By default, you can run the rediscovery procedure on views that include less than
10,000 CIs.
To increase the number of CIs that you can rediscover in a view:
1. Access the Infrastructure Settings Manager (Admin > Platform > Setup
and Maintenance > Infrastructure Settings).
2. Select the Max CIs in view supported to rediscover setting in the
infrastructure settings table.
3. Click the Value column and change the number.
4. Restart the server for the change to take effect.
For details on working with the Infrastructure Settings Manager, see
"Infrastructure Settings" in the BSM Platform Administration Guide.
Relevant
tasks
"Check Status of Application Discovery (Rediscover a View)" on page 206
See also
"Discovery Control Panel - Details Tab" in the Data Flow Management Guide
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Click to refresh the status of the selected CIs.
This button is disabled when there is no data to be reloaded.
Click to rerun the discovery.
Discovery Progress
Status on View
For details, see "Discovery Control Panel - Details Tab" in the Data
Flow Management Guide.
History Changes on
View
For details, see "CI/Relationship History Dialog Box" on page 217.
Show Impact Pane
This page opens a window that displays the statuses of the trigger CI as well as all statuses of the
CIs that are impacted by it.
Page 243 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
To access
In the Run Impact Analysis Dialog box, click Show Map.
If Impact Analysis is already active, click on the Impact Analysis Is Active link
in the IT Universe status bar.
Important
The following tabs are available:
information
l Impact Results. Displays a map of all CIs impacted by the selected CI.
l
Trigger CIs. Displays a table of information on the selected trigger CIs.
You can only see Impact Analysis results if you defined an Impact rule for that
view in Impact Analysis Manager. For details, see "Impact Analysis Manager" on
page 354.
To view information about specific CIs that are triggered or impacted by the
Impact rule, double-click the relationship connecting the CIs. A map is displayed.
The relationships in the map represent the Impact rules. The name of the
relationship is the name of the Impact rule you defined in the Impact Analysis
Manager.
Relevant
tasks
"Retrieve Impact Analysis Results – Scenario" on page 208
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (AZ)
<Legend>
<Relationship>
Page 244 of 446
Description
Indicates the icons displayed next to CIs with any of the following special
statuses:
l
Added. When Change Timeframe is active, indicates that the CI was
added.
l
Candidate for Deletion. Indicates that the CI is a candidate for deletion.
l
Changed. When Change Timeframe is active, indicates that the CI was
changed.
l
External. Indicates that the CI is a federated CI.
l
Impacted. When Impact Analysis is active, indicates an impacted CI.
l
Impacted and Trigger. When Impact Analysis is active, indicates a
trigger CI that is impacted.
l
Note. Indicates that a note was added for the CI.
l
Trigger. When Impact Analysis is active, indicates a trigger CI.
The relationships represent the Impact rule you defined in the Impact
Analysis Manager. For details, see "Impact Rules Definition Dialog Box" on
page 366.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 8: IT Universe Manager
UI Element (AZ)
Description
<The statuses
and the colors
that represent
each one>
The statuses that appear and the colors that represent each status are the
ones that are defined in the severity list for that state in the System Type
Manager. For details, see "Create/Update List/Enumeration Definition Dialog
Box" on page 403.
<Toolbar>
The Show Impact pane toolbar contains most of the buttons in the IT
Universe Manager toolbar.
<Topology Map
Sidebar>
For details, see "Topology Map Sidebar" on page 178.
Page 245 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 9
Modeling Studio
This chapter includes:
Modeling Studio Overview
247
View Formats
248
Building a Business View
249
Templates and Perspectives
251
Predefined Folders and Views
252
Creating Template Based Views
254
Business CI Models
255
Building a Perspective Based View
257
Revealed CIs and Watchpoints
261
Create a Pattern View
265
Create a Template
266
Create a Perspective
267
Create a Template Based View
268
Create Multiple Template Based Views
269
Define Report Settings
270
Build an Instance-based Model
271
Build a New Pattern-based Model
272
Build a Perspective-Based View Based on a Model
273
Build a Perspective-Based View Based on a Collection of CIs
274
Build a Business CI Model – Scenario
275
Modeling Studio User Interface
277
Tip: For more information about using Modeling Studio in BSM, see "Best Practices for
Modeling" on page 181.
Page 246 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Modeling Studio Overview
Modeling Studio is a tool for creating and managing views. You can create your own views, or work
with the out-of-the-box (factory) views provided with your BSM installation.
The IT Universe model in the configuration management database can be very large, holding
thousands of configuration item (CI)s. A view enables you to build a subset of the overall IT
universe model, containing only those CIs relating to a specific area of interest. You can define your
own views to display only the information that is relevant to your organization's business needs.
The views are used to display performance status in Service Health, and for setting up SLAs in
Service Level Management. BSM supports three view formats: pattern views, template based
views, and perspective based views, which are populated through different processes. For details,
see "View Formats" on next page.
Page 247 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
View Formats
BSM supports three view formats, by which to populate your view:
l
Pattern views are built from a Topology Query Language (TQL) query that defines the structure
of the view. You can create a new TQL query as you build the view or base the view on an
existing query. The view displays only those CIs and relationships that satisfy the query
definition. When the view is displayed or refreshed, the Modeling Studio queries the RTSM for all
elements that fit the query, and automatically updates the view with those elements.
l
Template based views are based on a TQL query, to which a template is then applied. The
template is a reusable view that includes parameters, which are saved as part of the template.
This enables you to build multiple views with the same settings without having to re-enter the
parameter information. The view displays only those CIs and relationships that satisfy the query
definition and the conditions of the template. For details on templates, see "Templates and
Perspectives" on page 251.
l
Perspective based views are built by selecting a collection of individual CIs and applying a
special type of template, known as a perspective, to it. Instance views, which no longer exist,
are replaced by perspective based views. For details on perspectives, see "Templates and
Perspectives" on page 251.
When you select a view for editing from the view tree in the left pane, it opens on the editing pane in
the appropriate editor.
Page 248 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Building a Business View
In the Modeling Studio, you can define your own views to model your business environment.
This section includes the following topics:
l
"The Structure of a View" below
l
"Setting the View Hierarchy" below
The Structure of a View
The views you create should provide the business users with logical representations of your
company's structure, processes, and goals. To meet these requirements, you generally build
multiple views representing different aspects of your business; for example, you could build
business views that revolve around any of the following:
l
Company structure, so that data is organized by the geographical location of branches, or by
data centers.
l
Business processes, so that data is organized by line of business, or by applications.
l
Business goals, so that data is organized by sales, or by key customers.
The views depend on the particular demands of your organization and the actual hierarchical
structure of the views should reflect those demands.
The usual hierarchical format of a view is as follows:
l
Top level. The highest levels of the view, consisting of the root CI and the branches below it,
are normally built from logical Business CI types such as Location, Line of Business,
Customer, Application, and so on.
l
Intermediate level. The intermediate branches of the view normally consist of System CI
types, representing actual hardware and software and/or monitoring group CI types,
representing groups containing monitors.
l
Bottom level. The lowest level of the view, consisting of leaf CIs at the ends of the subtrees, is
built from the Monitor CI types. These CIs receive the actual data from the data sources, used
to determine KPI status all the way up the view subtrees, and so provide business context to the
view.
Note: The bottom level is only relevant when a monitoring solution such as BSM is
connected and modeled in the RTSM.
Setting the View Hierarchy
The Pattern View Editor enables you to set the view hierarchy using the Hierarchy pane on the right
side of the screen. There are two methods available for setting the hierarchy: Manual and Rulebased. The manual method is selected by default.
l
Manual Hierarchy Method
In the manual hierarchy method, the query nodes of the view are displayed in a tree format. You
can create the hierarchy by manually dragging a selected query node under another query node
Page 249 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
or by using the toolbar buttons. The system only allows you to move a query node under another
query node when the resulting hierarchy is valid. For details, see "Hierarchy Pane" on page 304.
It is possible to place a single query node from the view into the hierarchy multiple times. You
can then adjust the hierarchy so that the query node appears in different layers, according to the
required layout. The view results in such an instance would be the same as if you added another
query node to the TQL query. Using the same query node twice in the hierarchy enables you to
achieve the desired view results using a simpler TQL query.
l
Query Node Grouping
When setting the view hierarchy manually, you can create subgroups to group CIs by different
criteria for the convenience of viewing the display. Click the Add Group By button
and
select one of the options. You can create a subgroup for CIs of the same type in the Topology
Map using the Add Group by CI Type option. You can create a subgroup for a specific query
node by selecting the Add Group by Query Node option. You can group CIs by a common
attribute using the Add Group by Attribute button and entering a regular expression as
described in "Query Node Grouping Dialog Box" on page 312. For details about regular
expressions, see "Regular Expression Examples" on page 445.
You can also create nested groups (a query node group inside another query node group) to help
fine-tune the TQL query results that are displayed in the Topology Map.
For example, after grouping query nodes of type node by their CIT, you can use their operation
state attribute to create more focused groups.
l
Rule-Based Hierarchy Method
In the rule-based hierarchy method, you define hierarchy rules, using the Hierarchy Rules dialog
box. You select a source CIT, target CIT, relationship type, and relationship direction, which
define the conditions for a hierarchy rule. Any CIs in the view which satisfy the defined
conditions are subject to the rule, that is, the target CI is placed on the layer below the source
CI. For details on defining hierarchy rules, see "Hierarchy Rules Dialog Box" on page 285.
Page 250 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Templates and Perspectives
A template is a reusable pattern view with defined parameters. You use templates to build templatebased views, setting the values of the parameters for each specific view. Any changes made to a
template affect all existing views based on that template.
Template-based views can be opened in IT Universe Manager, like pattern views. You can also
open the template itself in IT Universe Manager to view the results for various parameter values. If
you want to save the results, you must save it as a template-based view. You define templates,
template-based views, and pattern views in the Pattern View Editor.
Perspectives are a type of template designed to be applied to a specific collection of CIs, similar to
the pattern in a pattern view. For example, a perspective could comprise a node containing an IP
Address. In that case, the resulting perspective-based view would include all the CIs from among
the CIs in the CI selection, along with the IP Addresses contained in the node CIs.
The most basic perspective is known as the Content Only perspective and consists of only the
query node itself. If you apply the Content Only perspective to a CI collection, the resulting view
contains only the selected CIs themselves.
Perspectives are also created and edited in the Pattern View Editor. You can have multiple views,
templates, and perspectives open in the Pattern View Editor simultaneously, each with its own tab.
Perspectives do not appear in the list of views in IT Universe Manager, however perspective-based
views can be opened in IT Universe Manager, like all other views. For details, see "Building a
Perspective Based View" on page 257.
In summary, the Views tree in the Resources tab of the CI Selector in the Modeling Studio can
include five distinct entities:
l
pattern views
l
templates
l
template based views
l
perspectives
l
perspective based views
You can filter the tree to select the types of views or templates to display.
The following table summarizes the types of views and where they are created and viewed:
Type of View
Created in:
Can be opened in IT Universe
Manager
Pattern View
Pattern View Editor
Yes
Template
Pattern View Editor
Yes, for the current session only
Template-based View
Pattern View Editor
Yes
Perspective
Pattern View Editor
No
Perspective-based
View
Perspective-based View
Editor
Yes
Page 251 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Predefined Folders and Views
The Views tree in the Resources tab of the CI Selector in the Modeling Studio includes predefined
folders and views, as described in the following sections:
Predefined Folders
The hierarchical file folder system in the CI Selector can help you organize your views. Predefined
folders are provided for the out-of-the-box views; you can modify these folders, or add additional
folders according to your organization's requirements.
Factory Views
Your BSM installation includes out-of-the-box pattern views, templates, and perspectives. These
views provide a quick start for working with the RTSM for setting up SLAs, and for viewing system
performance information in Service Health.
The out-of-the-box views are initially empty. As soon as CIs are added to the RTSM by one of the
CI generators, the TQL query built into each pattern view is able to identify the CIs that meet the
pattern requirements, and add them to the view.
Views for CIs are created when a discovery process is run; the out-of-the-box views that are
provided correspond to the relevant Data Flow Management (DFM) packages. For example, the
Oracle view (Root > Database > Oracle > Oracle) is populated with CIs that are created when
Data Flow Management activates the Database - Oracle module. For details on running DFM, see
"Discovery Control Panel – Advanced Mode Workflow" in the Data Flow Management Guide.
For details on the cross-application processes for setting up the SAP views, see "Application
Management for SAP Reports and Views" in the BSM User Guide.
Some of the out-of-the-box views are set by default to display in specific BSM applications. There
are some out-of-the-box views that are hidden by default.
Some of the out-of-the-box views are considered basic to the system and cannot be deleted from
the folders.
Predefined Perspectives
BSM also provides out-of-the-box perspectives. One example is the Content Only perspective,
which includes only the elements of the view content itself, without any additional CIs.
The following out-of-the-box perspectives are intended to be used in Service Health:
l
System Monitors only. This perspective enriches the model by adding child CIs down to the
level of monitors. Use this perspective to create a Service Health view that includes System
monitors only.
l
End User Monitors. This perspective enriches the model by adding child CIs related to the end
user experience of the application, such as Business Transaction and Business Transaction
Flow. Use this perspective to create a Service Health view that includes monitoring statuses for
End User Management only.
l
Impact. This perspective enriches the model with all child CIs related by impact links. Use this
perspective to configure additional monitors using the Monitor Deployment Wizard.
l
Model and Dependency Hierarchy. This perspective enriches the model with all dependent
Page 252 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
CIs in the RTSM. Use this perspective to create a view with the full model hierarchy.
l
APM Perspective. This perspective enriches the model with Business Transactions Flow and
Business Transaction CIs. Use this perspective to add related infrastructure elements and
SiteScope monitors to create a view that includes all APM information.
Page 253 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Creating Template Based Views
Template-based views based on the same template contain the same query nodes and
relationships. They differ only in their parameter values. You create template-based views using the
Template-based View wizard. The wizard enables you to create multiple views at one time based
on the same template. When creating multiple views, you have the option of entering parameter
values manually or importing them from a CSV file. The CSV file must be formatted correctly for the
wizard to import the values. It must contain the name of at least one of the template parameters in
the first row and it must contain at least one record. The records should be in separate rows and the
parameter values for each record should be in the same row, separated by commas.
The wizard also provides an Advanced Naming feature, which enables you to define an expression
for the view names based on parameter values. For example, if your base template is called
Server_Template, and one of the template parameters is Serial Number, you could define the
view names to be Server <Serial Number>. In this way, the wizard automatically inserts the
respective value of the parameter Serial Number into the name of each view.
An alternate way to assign names to the views when importing values from a CSV file is to include
a column in the file called template_based_view_name. The file entries corresponding to this
column are automatically entered by the wizard as the view names. Note that this naming method
overrides the Advanced Naming feature; that is, view names are assigned the entries in the
template_based_view_name column of the file, even when the Advanced Naming feature is
selected.
For details on creating template-based views, see "Template-based View Wizard" on page 318.
You can also edit the parameters of a template-based view when the view is open in the Editor,
from the Template Parameter Values dialog box. For details, see "Template Parameter Values
Dialog Box" on page 323.
You cannot edit the report layout for a template-based view. To change the report layout, you need
to make changes in the base template of the view.
Page 254 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Business CI Models
This section includes the following topics:
The collection of CIs which compose the view content of perspective-based views can be selected
in two ways. You can select CIs from the CI Selector and drag them onto the editing pane. In this
case, you can build a view by applying a perspective to the collection and the collection cannot be
reused in another view without repeating the selection process. The other way to select the CIs to
appear in the view is by creating a model.
A model is a reusable collection of CI instances that define a business entity, such as a business
service or line of business. By creating a model, you are building a CI collection that can be reused
with other perspectives to create different views. Any changes you subsequently make to the
model are reflected in all the views based on that model. There are two types of models: instancebased models and pattern-based models.
Instance-based Models
You build an instance-based model by first selecting a business CI to serve as its basis. The
available business CIs include group, application, business service, business unit, and line of
business. Then, you can add CIs to your model in the following ways:
l
Manually, by dragging CIs from the CI Selector into the Model Editor
l
Revealing related CIs using a reveal path and selecting the ones to add to the model
l
Defining a watchpoint for a selected CI and automatically adding CIs to the model
You can also begin building a model by dragging CIs onto the empty canvas and selecting Create a
new model.
The model you create is a CI itself and the CIs in your model are related to the model by Contains
relationships. You must save your model before applying a perspective to it to build a view.
Caution: The changes you make in a model affect the entire universe, not just the views
based on that model. Thus, if you delete a CI from a model, you are deleting the relationship
that existed between the CIs from the RTSM.
When working in IT Universe Manager, you can add selected CIs directly to a new model or an
existing model. For details, see "Add CIs to Model Dialog Box" on page 215.
Pattern-based Models
Another type of model you can build is a pattern-based model. In a pattern-based model, you define
a TQL query to determine the CIs included, rather than selecting them manually. You can base your
pattern-based model on an existing TQL query or create a new TQL query.
You must designate at least one query node in the model's TQL query as output for the model. The
CIs of that type which match the pattern of the TQL query are the ones included in the model output.
The pattern-based model created is saved as a CI like an ordinary model, and can be used to form
the content of a perspective-based view. The new TQL query created is saved as an ordinary query
and can be used as the basis for a pattern view.
Page 255 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Pattern-based models are not updated continuously. Each model is calculated at the time it is
saved and the TQL query runs at specific intervals to update the model. All existing pattern-based
models are updated at the same time. To set the starting time and repeat interval for the patternbased model updates, click the
button in the Resources tab of the left pane. The repeat interval
must be evenly divisible in a 24-hour period to ensure that the updates are performed at the same
hours each day. The settings you select also apply to all pattern-based models created
subsequently. The default settings are a starting time of 12 midnight and a repeat interval of 12hours.
Note:
l
When you export a pattern-based model in Package Manager, the underlying TQL query of
the model, as well as an enrichment used to update the model content, are added to the
package. When you view the package resource, or deploy or undeploy the package, only
those resources are displayed. The model name does not appear. A pattern-based model
exported from UCMDB 9.05 cannot be imported into an earlier UCMDB version.
l
When you delete a pattern-based model (either from the Modeling Studio or from the IT
Universe), the Business Enrichment, Job Scheduler, and pattern-based model CI are also
deleted.
Defining a Pattern-based Model over an Instance-based Model
When defining a pattern-based model, it is possible build it on top of an existing instance-based
model. In this case, only the pattern of the model that you build is visible on the canvas, as in a new
pattern-based model. However, the CIs in the instance-based model also remain in the new model
and appear in the view results when the model is used to build a perspective-based view. Similarly,
when you access the model in IT Universe Manager, both the CIs in the instance-based model and
those retrieved by the pattern-based model are visible. The model is saved with the name of the
original instance-based model, in effect creating a hybrid model with both instance-based and
pattern-based components.
If you delete the model, only the additional pattern-based part of the model is deleted. The model
reverts to an instance-based model and the CIs included in it become visible in the Model Editor.
Page 256 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Building a Perspective Based View
A perspective based view is composed of perspectives applied to a model or a collection of CIs.
The perspective is a special type of template which is designed to be applied to a subset of the IT
Universe model.
The Content pane of the Perspective-based View Editor displays the models or CIs you have
selected to serve as the basis of your view. The Perspective pane displays the selected
perspectives. The Preview pane displays the resulting view based upon your content and
perspective selections. When you make a change in the content or perspective selections, the view
is updated accordingly in the Preview pane. For details, see "Perspective-based View Editor" on
page 307.
This section includes the following topics:
l
"Content" below
l
"Perspectives" below
l
"Views Based on Multiple Perspectives" on next page
l
"Including and Excluding Child CIs" on page 259
Content
The content in a perspective based view can be selected in two ways:
l
You can add individual CIs to the view manually, using the CI Selector. The CIs in the collection
are independent of each other. In this case, the collection of CIs is not defined as a model and
cannot be reused in another view.
l
You can add one or more models to the view, using the CI Selector. Alternatively, you can start
by working with a model in the Model Editor and select Generate View for Selected Model to
build a view based on that model. In this case, the identical content can be used to build another
view by selecting the same models.
You can select both individual CIs and models to form the content of a perspective based view,
however in that case, the models are treated as ordinary CIs. The models themselves are included
in the view without their hierarchy of child CIs.
When working in IT Universe Manager, you can add selected CIs directly to the content of a new or
an existing perspective based view. For details, see "Add CIs to View Dialog Box" on page 216.
Perspectives
The perspectives you select for your view determine which CIs are included in the view. A
perspective is a reusable pattern, similar to a template. The difference between a perspective and a
regular template is that the perspective includes one or more query nodes designated as contact
query nodes. A contact query node is a query node in the pattern which is used to apply the pattern
to specific content and it is indicated by a small icon that appears next to the query node .
For example, in the following perspective, a query node of type Windows is designated as the
contact query node and it has an IP Address related to it by a containment relationship.
Page 257 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
When this perspective is applied to a CI collection, the resulting view contains all the CIs in the
original collection as well as the IP Addresses connected to the Windows CIs in the collection (the
CIs that were added by applying the perspective).
A perspective can have several contact query nodes, but every disconnected graph within a
perspective must have at least one contact query node.
If you make a change to a perspective, all views based on that perspective are affected.
Views Based on Multiple Perspectives
You can select multiple perspectives to apply to the content of your view. There are two ways to
select multiple perspectives:
l
Perspective groups
l
Perspective chains
In a perspective group, you select two or more perspectives to apply simultaneously to the same
input content.
In a perspective chain, you select two or more perspectives at different levels of the view creation.
The perspective in the first level is applied to the original view content to generate results in the form
of a CI collection that serves as input content for the next level. The perspective in the second level
is then applied to this content to generate the view results. You can build views based on multiple
levels of perspectives, each one generating input content for the following level.
It is possible to apply both of the above methods at the same time, that is, by selecting multiple
perspectives in each of the levels of a perspective selection.
For example, select a collection of IP Subnet CIs as your input content and select a perspective
that adds the node CIs related to the IP Subnets as the first level perspective. The results of this
stage consist of the original IP Subnets and their related nodes. Then add a second perspective
level and select two perspectives for it: one that adds CPU CIs related to nodes and one that adds
File System CIs related to nodes. The final results include the original IP Subnets, their related
nodes, and the CPUs and File Systems related to those nodes.
These options help to simplify the process of creating a perspective-based view, by breaking down
the functionality of a perspective into its component parts. Instead of building a separate large and
complex perspective for each required view, you can construct a custom perspective combination
to match the requirements of your specific case from smaller and more basic perspectives.
Page 258 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Including and Excluding Child CIs
When adding CIs that have children to a view, the CI and its children are only included in the view if
the pattern of the perspective includes children for the selected CI type. In that case, children are
included for all CIs of that type. After creating a view, you can hide specific CIs from the view by
selecting the CI in the View Results pane and selecting Hide CI from View from the shortcut
menu or clicking the Hide CI from View button in the toolbar. This option is only available for CIs
that were added to the view via the perspective and were not part of the original content on which
the view was based. Thus, if the view was based on a collection of CIs, the CIs in that collection
cannot be hidden from the view. If the view was based on a model, the model itself cannot be
hidden from the view, but the CIs contained in the model can be hidden.
When KPI status is calculated for a CI and displayed in Service Health, the status is based on all
child CIs that exist in the RTSM for the parent CI. The Business Logic Engine calculates status
from all child CIs attached to that parent CI, across all views. The calculation is based on all the
relationships for the CI in the RTSM, without connection to the child CIs displayed in any particular
view. To restrict the number of CIs displayed in the view, you can change the perspective to hide
child CIs. This has no effect on KPI status – status is still calculated based on all child CIs,
whether they are displayed in the view or hidden.
Whether or not all child CIs are displayed in the view does not influence the status calculations
made for the parent CI and the status displayed in Service Health.
For example, the following pictures show status in Service Health for the same CI, Group1, in two
views: In the first view, child CIs are included, and in the second, they are excluded. The same
status result is shown for the CI in both views, regardless of the perspective in use.
When a CI has child CIs that are excluded from the view, the KPI tooltip in Service Health shows
the number of hidden child CIs with KPIs attached, to indicate that the KPI status of the parent is
based on CIs that are not in the view.
Page 259 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
You can use the Find Visible and Hidden Child CIs option to view information on hidden
children. For details, see "How to Find Visible and Hidden Child CIs" in the BSM User Guide.
Page 260 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Revealed CIs and Watchpoints
The Modeling Studio provides two advanced methods of adding CIs to an existing model: revealing
related CIs and defining watchpoints.
This section includes the following topics:
l
"Revealing CIs" below
l
"Watchpoints" on page 263
Revealing CIs
One approach to building a model is to add CIs related to the CIs in the model. The Modeling Studio
provides a tool to help you reveal those CIs. The process of revealing related CIs involves
constructing a reveal path, which is a chain of CI types that are related to each other. The first item
in your reveal path is the CI type of the CI from which you started to reveal CIs. The Modeling
Studio locates all of its related CIs and lists their CI types. By selecting one of those types, you
build the next step of your path. All the related CIs of that type appear in the lower pane of the dialog
box. You can select the ones you want to include in your model. The process is repeated to build
the following step of the path.
For example, if you begin to reveal CIs from a CI of type Windows, the Modeling Studio may reveal
related CIs of types Interface, Network, and IP. If you select Network, the related CIs of type
Network appear in the lower pane and can be added to the model by dragging them into the CIs
Basket or clicking the CIs Basket icon:
Page 261 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Click Next to build the next step of the path using Network as your selection. The Modeling Studio
reveals related CIs of type Windows, Unix, and IP. Unix is selected and the Unix CIs appear in the
lower pane and can be added to the model by dragging the selected ones into the CIs Basket pane:
Click Next to build the next step of the path using Unix as your selection:
Page 262 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
In this case, a reveal path of Windows > Network > Unix was constructed. At each step, you
have the option of adding any of the revealed related CIs to your model. For details on revealing
CIs, see "Reveal CIs Dialog Box" on page 313.
It is also possible to construct a reveal path without revealing CIs. For details, see
"Create/Edit/Save Reveal Path Dialog Box" on page 282.
Watchpoints
Another method of locating related CIs to add to the model is by defining a watchpoint for a selected
CI in the model. A watchpoint is a mechanism which is triggered when a new related CI of a
specified type is created. Every watchpoint is defined in connection with a reveal path. If a new
related CI of any CI type included in the path is created, the watchpoint is triggered and an indicator
appears next to the model. For details on defining a watchpoint, see "New Watchpoint Dialog Box"
on page 300.
Note: You must save a new model before defining watchpoints for its CIs.
All the related CIs detected by the watchpoint are displayed in the Watchpoints Updates dialog box.
The dialog box enables you to select the ones to add to your model and the ones to suppress, or
exclude from your model. For details, see "Watchpoints Updates Dialog Box" on page 328.
You also have the option to include the detected CIs in your model automatically by selecting the
check box in the New Watchpoint dialog box. In this case, all CIs detected by the watchpoint are
added to the model.
Page 263 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
A watchpoint can also be used to detect CIs included in the model which are no longer related to the
model. If such CIs are found along the reveal path connected to the watchpoint, they also appear in
the Watchpoints Updates dialog box. You can accept the suggestion to remove the CIs from your
model, or you can suppress the suggestion, thereby keeping the CIs in your model.
Note: Although a watchpoint is defined for an individual CI, the watchpoint results display
related CIs of the CI types included in the reveal path for all CIs in the model.
Page 264 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Create a Pattern View
This task describes how to create a pattern view and define its TQL query.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Open a New View in the Pattern View Editor
Click the New button
and select Pattern View. In the New Pattern View dialog box, select
the base TQL query on which your new view is based, or select Create new query to build a
new TQL query. The Pattern View Editor opens. For details, see "New Pattern
View/Template/Perspective Dialog Box" on page 299.
2.
Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL Query
Add the query nodes and relationships that define the query. For details on how to add query
nodes and relationships to a TQL query, see "Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL
Query" on page 32.
Note: If you are starting with a blank view, you must add at least one query node in order
to save your view.
3.
Set the View Hierarchy
Set the hierarchy for the view by moving the required query nodes in the Hierarchy pane. For
details, see "Setting the View Hierarchy" on page 249.
When you are finished, click Save
4.
to save the view.
Define the Report Settings - Optional
Select the Report tab in the Pattern View Editor. Select the attributes you want to include in the
report for each query node of the view. You can also set the order of the report columns, set the
sort order of each column, and add a chart. For details, see "Define Report Settings" on page
270.
5.
Set Permissions
Apply viewing and editing permissions to users and user groups for the new view. You set
permissions in Admin > Platform > Users and Permissions, select a user or a group and
select PermissionsManagers > Administration > Security Manager. For details, see "How
to Assign Permissions" in the BSM Platform Administration Guide.
Page 265 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Create a Template
This task describes how to define a new template.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Open a New Template in the Pattern View Editor
Click the New button
and select Template. In the New Template dialog box, select the
base TQL query on which your new template is based, or select Create new query to build a
new TQL query. For details, see "New Pattern View/Template/Perspective Dialog Box" on
page 299."New Pattern View/Template/Perspective Dialog Box" on page 299
2.
Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL Query
Add the query nodes and relationships that define the query. For details on how to add query
nodes and relationships to a TQL query, see "Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL
Query" on page 32.
Note: If you are starting with a blank template, you must add at least one query node in
order to save your template.
3.
Set Parameter Values
Right-click a query node or relationship in the TQL query and select Query Node Properties. In
the Attributes tab, add an attribute with a parameterized value. For details, see "Query
Node/Relationship Properties Dialog Box" on page 76.
Note: If you do not set any parameters, when you try to save your template, you must
save it as a pattern view.
4.
Set the Template Hierarchy
Set the hierarchy for the template by moving the required query nodes in the Hierarchy pane.
For details, see "Setting the View Hierarchy" on page 249.
When you are finished, click Save
5.
to save the template.
Define the Report Settings - Optional
Select the Report tab in the Pattern View Editor. Select the attributes you want to include in the
report for each query node of the view. You can also set the order of the report columns, set the
sort order of each column, and add a chart. For details, see "Define Report Settings" on page
270.
6.
Set Permissions
Apply viewing and editing permissions to users and user groups for the new template. You set
permissions in Admin > Platform > Users and Permissions, select a user or a group and
select PermissionsManagers > Administration > Security Manager. For details, see "How
to Assign Permissions" in the BSM Platform Administration Guide.
Page 266 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Create a Perspective
This task describes how to define a new perspective.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Open a New Perspective in the Pattern View Editor
Click the New button
and select Perspective. In the New Perspective dialog box, select
the base TQL query on which your new Perspective is based, or select Create new query to
build a new TQL query. For details, see "New Pattern View/Template/Perspective Dialog Box"
on page 299.
2.
Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL Query
Add the query nodes and relationships that define the query. For details on how to add query
nodes and relationships to a TQL query, see "Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL
Query" on page 32.
3.
Select a Contact Query Node
Select at least one query node in the TQL query to be a contact query node. Right-click the
query node and select Use As Contact Query Node.
Note: If you do not select a contact query node, when you try to save your perspective,
you must save it as a pattern view.
4.
Set the Perspective Hierarchy
Set the hierarchy for the perspective by moving the required query nodes in the Hierarchy pane.
For details, see "Setting the View Hierarchy" on page 249.
When you are finished, click Save
5.
to save the perspective.
Define the Report Settings - Optional
Select the Report tab in the Pattern View Editor. Select the attributes you want to include in the
report for each query node of the view. You can also set the order of the report columns, set the
sort order of each column, and add a chart. For details, see "Define Report Settings" on page
270.
6.
Set Permissions
Apply viewing and editing permissions to users and user groups for the new perspective. You
set permissions in Admin > Platform > Users and Permissions, select a user or a group and
select PermissionsManagers > Administration > Security Manager. For details, see "How
to Assign Permissions" in the BSM Platform Administration Guide.
Page 267 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Create a Template Based View
This task describes how to define a single template based view.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Prerequisites
If you want to base your view on a new template, create the template first. For details, see
"Create a Template" on page 266.
2.
Define a New Template Based View
You define a new template based view using the Template-based View wizard. Click the New
button
3.
and select Template Based View.
Select a Template
On the Select Template page of the wizard, select a template on which to base your view. For
details, see "Select Template Page" on page 319.
4.
Select the Method for Adding Parameter Values
On the Import Parameter Values page of the wizard, select the method for adding the
parameter values. For details, see "Import Parameter Values Page" on page 320.
5.
Set Parameters
On the Enter Parameters page, enter the parameter values for the view. For details, see "Enter
Parameters Page" on page 320.
Note: You can also edit the parameters from within the Editor after creating the view, by
selecting Show Parameters
from the toolbar or the shortcut menu.
When you are finished, click Finish to open the view in the Editor. Click Save
view.
6.
to save the
Set Permissions
Apply viewing and editing permissions to users and user groups for that view. You set
permissions in Admin > Platform > Users and Permissions, select a user or a group and
select PermissionsManagers > Administration > Security Manager. For details, see "How
to Assign Permissions" in the BSM Platform Administration Guide.
Page 268 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Create Multiple Template Based Views
This task describes how to define multiple template-based views.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Prerequisites
If you want to base your views on a new template, create the template first. For details, see
"Create a Template" on page 266.
2.
Define New Template Based Views
You define new template based views using the Template-based View wizard. Click the New
button
3.
and select Template Based View.
Select a Template
On the Select Template page of the wizard, select a template on which to base your views. For
details, see "Select Template Page" on page 319.
4.
Select the Methods for Adding Parameter Values and Naming Views
On the Import Parameter Values page of the wizard, select the method for adding the
parameter values. Also, if you want to use the Advanced Naming feature, select the check box
on this page. For details, see "Import Parameter Values Page" on page 320.
5.
Set Parameters
On the Enter Parameters page, enter the parameter values for the view. If you selected to
import the parameter values from a CSV file, they are automatically entered in the table. You
can edit the view names and parameter values manually on this page. You can also add new
views to the table or delete views from the table. For details, see "Enter Parameters Page" on
page 320.
6.
Select the Location for Saving the Views
On the Select Location page, select the location in the view tree in which to save the new
views. For details, see "Select Location for Views Page" on page 321.
7.
Save the Views
On the Summary page, review the details of the views you created. If there are no further
changes, click Save to save the views in the selected location.
8.
Set Permissions
Apply viewing and editing permissions to users and user groups for each view created. You set
permissions in Admin > Platform > Users and Permissions, select a user or a group and
select PermissionsManagers > Administration > Security Manager. For details, see "How
to Assign Permissions" in the BSM Platform Administration Guide.
Page 269 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Define Report Settings
This task describes how to define report settings for a view, template, or perspective.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Prerequisites
After defining the content and hierarchy of a view, template, or perspective, you can define the
report settings. Select the Report tab in the Pattern View Editor.
2.
Select Attributes to Appear as Report Columns
For each query node in the view, select the query node in the Hierarchy pane and select the
attributes to appear as columns in the report for that query node. You select attributes in the
Query Node Definition pane by moving them from the Attributes list to the Report Layout list.
Set the order of the columns using the arrow buttons in the Report Layout list. For details, see
"Pattern View Editor" on page 303.
3.
Add Function Columns to the Report - Optional
You have the option of adding a column for a selected query node consisting of data derived
from a function performed on one of its child query nodes. Click the Add Function button
to
open the Add Function dialog box where you can select the relevant settings. For details, see
"Add/Edit Function Dialog Box" on page 278.
4.
Set the Sort Order of the Column Content
Click the Set Sort Order button
to open the Sort Column Content dialog box. Determine
the columns by which to sort the report by moving columns from the Available Columns list to
the Sorted Columns list. Use the arrow buttons to set the sort order of the columns. Use the
Sort Ascending/Sort Descending buttons to set the sort direction for each column. For details,
see "Sort Column Content Dialog Box" on page 317.
5.
Add a Chart to the Report - Optional
You have the option of adding a chart to your report, in place of a table, for a selected layer of
the view. When the necessary conditions for adding a chart are satisfied, the Define Chart link
in the Chart Properties section of the Query Node Definition pane is active. Click the link and
enter the chart settings. For details, see "Chart Properties" on page 307.
Page 270 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Build an Instance-based Model
This task describes how to build an instance-based business CI model which can serve as the
basis for a view.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Create the New Model
In the Modeling Studio, click the New
button and select Instance Based Model to open
the New Model dialog box. Select a CI type and enter the values for its properties. For details,
see "New Model Dialog Box" on page 298.
Note: You cannot create an instance-based model with an already existing name.
2.
Add CIs to the Model Manually
In the CI Selector, search for the CIs you want to include in your model. Select them and drag
them into the model.
Tip: You can select more than one CI by holding the CTRL key while selecting CIs.
3.
Reveal CIs
Select a CI in the model and reveal its related CIs along a reveal path. Add selected CIs from
among the revealed CIs to your model. When you are done, save the model. For details, see
"Reveal CIs Dialog Box" on page 313.
4.
Define Watchpoints for CIs in the Model
Right-click a CI in the model and select Watchpoint > New Watchpoint. The New
Watchpoint dialog box opens. Select a reveal path and click OK. A small icon appears next to
the CI indicating that a watchpoint is defined for it. For details, see "New Watchpoint Dialog
Box" on page 300.
Page 271 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Build a New Pattern-based Model
This task describes how to build a new pattern-based model which can serve as the basis for a
perspective-based view.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Define the New Model
You define a new pattern-based model using the Pattern-based Model wizard. Click the New
button
and select Pattern Based Model.
Note: You cannot create an pattern-based model with an already existing name.
2.
Enter the Model Details
On the first wizard page, select New Model. Then select a CI type for the model and enter the
properties. For details, see "Select CI Type Page" on page 302.
3.
Select a TQL Query
On the next wizard page, select a TQL query for the model. You can create a new TQL query or
select an existing query from the tree. The TQL Query Editor opens with the selected query.
For details, see "Query Selection Page" on page 302.
4.
Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL Query
Add the query nodes and relationships that define the query. For details on how to add query
nodes and relationships to a TQL query, see "Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL
Query" on page 32.
5.
Set Output Query Nodes
Select one or more query nodes in the TQL query to serve as output for the model by rightclicking them and selecting Add to Model Output. The query node is indicated by a small icon
next to it.
6.
Save the Model
When you are finished, save the model with a unique name. If you created a new TQL query,
the query is also saved independently of the model and can be re-used as a regular TQL query.
Page 272 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Build a Perspective-Based View Based on a Model
This task describes how to build a view in the Modeling Studio based on a model and a perspective.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Open the Model
In the Modeling Studio, select Models as the Resource type in the left pane, select the
relevant model, and click Open Model
2.
in the left pane toolbar.
Select a Perspective
In the Model Editor, right-click the model and select Generate View for selected model. The
Creating New View dialog box opens. Select perspectives to apply to the model. For details,
see "Creating New View Dialog Box" on page 283.
3.
Save the View
The Perspective-based View Editor opens with your new view. Optionally, build a perspective
chain by selecting perspectives for additional levels of the view creation. Rename the view and
save it in the correct folder. For details, see "Perspective-based View Editor" on page 307.
Page 273 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Build a Perspective-Based View Based on a
Collection of CIs
This task describes how to build a view in the Modeling Studio based on a collection of CIs and a
perspective.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Create the New View
In the Modeling Studio, click the New
button and select Perspective Based View to open
the Perspective-based View Editor. For details, see "Perspective-based View Editor" on page
307.
2.
Add CIs to the View
In the CI Selector, search for the CIs you want to include in your view. Select them and drag
them into the view. For details on the CI Selector, see "CI Selector" on page 139.
Tip: You can select more than one CI by holding the CTRL key while selecting CIs.
3.
Select a Perspective and Save the View
In the Perspective pane, select perspectives to apply to your CI collection. Optionally, you can
build a perspective chain by selecting perspectives for additional levels of the view creation.
Rename the view and save it in the correct folder. For details, see "Perspective-based View
Editor" on page 307.
Page 274 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Build a Business CI Model – Scenario
This scenario describes how to build a business CI model for use in a human resources application.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Create a Model
To create a model, you need to select a CI type and enter its key properties.
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > Modeling Studio to open the
Modeling Studio. For details about how to create a model, see "New Model Dialog Box" on
page 298.
Example of a Business CI Model:
In this example, a human resources application called Onboard Employee is to be created.
Select Business Process as the CI type and enter Onboard Employee as the name
under the key properties.
2.
Create Application CI Models Within Your Model
You can create models within your model by clicking the New Model icon
Editor. For details, see "Model Editor" on page 290
in the Model
Example of Application CI Models:
Within the Onboard Employee model, create a model of type Application. Enter HR
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) as the name under the key properties.
The application CI is created as a model within the Onboard Employee model. Repeat the
process to create the following applications: Active Directory (AD) and Customer
Relationship Management (CRM). The Onboard Employee model now includes
three application models.
3.
Add System CIs to Your Model
Add to your model the CIs for the servers or other software elements on which the applications
are running.
Example of System CI Models:
Under the HR ERPapplication, drag the System CI SAP System. Under the AD
application, drag the System CI Node. The System CIs are included in the model and their
related CIs, such as Hosts and Monitors, are automatically added to the model as related
CIs.
4.
Add CIs to Your Model as Related CIs
Add the CIs that are to be related to the CIs in the model but are not included in the model. For
details, see "Model Editor" on page 290.
Page 275 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Example of Related CIs:
Create an application CI of type Portal. Select the CRM application and click the
Related CIs tab in the Information pane. Drag the Portal CI into the Information pane. The
CI is added as a related CI to CRM.
Page 276 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Modeling Studio User Interface
This section includes (in alphabetical order):
l
"Add/Edit Function Dialog Box" on next page
l
"Change Query Node/Relationship Type Dialog Box" on page 279
l
"Choose Operation for Selected Items Dialog Box" on page 280
l
"Conditions of Related CIs Dialog Box" on page 281
l
"Create/Edit/Save Reveal Path Dialog Box" on page 282
l
"Creating New View Dialog Box" on page 283
l
"Cycle Definition Dialog Box" on page 283
l
"Hidden CIs Dialog Box" on page 284
l
"Hierarchy Rules Dialog Box" on page 285
l
"Left Pane" on page 285
l
"Manage CI Watchpoints Dialog Box" on page 290
l
"Model Editor" on page 290
l
"Modeling Studio Page" on page 296
l
"Models Containing Selected CI Dialog Box" on page 298
l
"New Model Dialog Box" on page 298
l
"New Pattern View/Template/Perspective Dialog Box" on page 299
l
"New Watchpoint Dialog Box" on page 300
l
"Open Reveal Path Dialog Box" on page 300
l
"Pattern Based Model Wizard" on page 301
l
"Pattern View Editor" on page 303
l
"Perspective-based View Editor" on page 307
l
"Query Node Grouping Dialog Box" on page 312
l
"Query/View Definition Properties Dialog Box" on page 312
l
"Reveal CIs Dialog Box" on page 313
l
"Save Query Dialog Box" on page 315
l
"Save View/Template/Perspective Dialog Box" on page 316
l
"Select Integration Points Dialog Box" on page 317
l
"Sort Column Content Dialog Box" on page 317
l
"Template-based View Wizard" on page 318
l
"Template Parameter Values Dialog Box" on page 323
Page 277 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
l
"TQL Query Editor" on page 323
l
"Views Containing Selected CI Dialog Box" on page 327
l
"Watchpoints Updates Dialog Box" on page 328
l
"<Query/Template/Perspective Name> Dependencies Dialog Box" on page 329
Add/Edit Function Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define which of the query node's functions and parameters you want
to include in the report.
To access
Click the Add Function button under the Report Layout box in the Query Node
Definition pane of the Pattern View Editor.
Important
When defining the report columns for a selected query node in a view, template, or
information perspective, you can define a column consisting of data deriving from a function
defined for one of its child query nodes. Select the relevant child query node,
attribute, and function that you want to define.
First, select the required query node and function. The attribute list adjusts to
display the relevant attribute for the selected combination. Select the required
attribute.
Relevant
tasks
"Define Report Settings" on page 270
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Attribute
Select an attribute from the list.
Page 278 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Function
From the Function list, select the function you want to use to calculate the
results on these columns.
The following are the available options:
l
Average. The average value of the selected attribute for all the CI instances
of the selected query node.
l
Concatenated List. Lists the values of the selected attribute for all the CI
instances of the selected query node.
l
Count. Calculates the number of CI instances of the selected query node.
l
Distinct List. Lists the unique values of the selected attribute for all the CI
instances of the selected query node.
l
Max. The maximum value of the selected attribute for all the CI instances of
the selected query node.
l
Min. The minimum value of the selected attribute for all the CI instances of
the selected query node.
l
Sum. The sum of the selected attribute values for all the CI instances of the
selected query node.
Related
Query Node
The child query node on which you want to perform the function.
Title
The name of the function attribute displayed in the report.
Change Query Node/Relationship Type Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to change the CI type of a TQL query node or relationship after you
have created a TQL query.
To access
In the TQL Query Editor or Pattern View Editor, right-click the required query node
and select Change Query Node Type. For relationships, right-click the required
relationship and select Change Relationship Type.
Important
You can change the CI type of the selected query node to any other valid type
information based on the existing relationships and conditions of the selected query node.
Relevant
tasks
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Implement a Discovery Adapter" in the RTSM Developer Reference Guide
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
Page 279 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Click Expand All to expand all the folders in the tree.
Click Collapse All to collapse all the folders in the tree.
Tree View
Click Tree View to select the display format of the CI type/Relationship
tree. The following options are available:
l
Display label
l
Class name
l
Legacy class name
<CI
Select the required CI type or relationship.
type/Relationship
tree>
Relationship
Direction
Select the direction of the relationship.
Relationship
Name
The name of the relationship.
Relationship
Restrictions
Select an option to define how to handle relationships between identical
query nodes or self relationships in the query results. A self relationship is a
relationship that leads from a query node to itself.
Note: Only relevant for relationships.
Note: Only relevant for relationships.
l
Allow All Relationships. All relationships appear in the query results.
l
Allow Self Relationships only. Only self-relationships (a relationship
that leads to itself) appear in the query results.
l
Allow Non Self Relationships only. Self-relationships do not appear
in the query results.
Note: Only relevant for relationships.
Choose Operation for Selected Items Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to create models and views from selected CIs.
To access
In the Modeling Studio, drag CIs from the CI Selector onto the empty canvas.
Important
You can drag individual or multiple CIs onto the canvas. You can select ordinary
information CIs and/or models to drag onto the canvas. Use the CTRL key while selecting CIs
to select multiple CIs.
See also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below:
Page 280 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Create a
new model
Select to build a model comprising the CIs in your selection. If the CIs you
dragged onto the canvas include at least one CI that has no valid links to any of
the model CI types, this option is disabled.
Create a
new view
Select to build a view based on the CI collection formed by your selection.
Edit the
model of
the selected
CI
Select to edit the selected model in the Model Editor.
Note: This option only appears when a single model is dragged onto the canvas.
Conditions of Related CIs Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define conditions for the CI types in a reveal path.
To
access
Click the Add Condition or Edit Condition buttons from the Conditions column of
the Reveal CIs dialog box.
See
also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Add the attribute condition you have defined.
Delete an attribute condition.
Move a selected row up.
Move a selected row down.
View the condition definition.
And/Or
Click inside the And/Or field and select either And or Or to link multiple conditions.
Attribute Select an attribute from the list.
name
Click inside the Brackets box to display a list of brackets you can use to build more
Brackets complex, logical statements.
Criteria
Page 281 of 446
Contains the attribute condition definition as defined in the Element Instances dialog
box.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Not
Select NOT if you want the condition statement to do the opposite of what is defined.
Note: If you select NOT, query results do not include data from the CI instances that
were not assigned a value. For example, your system contains three node CIs:
Node1 is assigned the value A, Node2 is assigned the value B and Node3 is not
assigned a value. You create a query to retrieve all nodes that are equal to A and
select NOT; the results of your query only include Node2 because Node3 is not
assigned a value.
Operator Select the required operator. For details, see "Attribute Operator Definitions" on page
44.
Value
Enter or select the value of the attribute. The Value options vary according to the
attribute type you select.
Create/Edit/Save Reveal Path Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define a new reveal path or edit an existing path.
To
access
To define a new reveal path, click the Reveal
select Create Reveal Path.
button from the Model Editor, and
To edit an existing reveal path, select a path from the Open Reveal Path dialog box
and click Edit.
To save a reveal path, click Save Path from the Reveal CIs dialog box.
See also "Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Description Enter a description of the path.
Name
Enter the name of the path.
Preview
Opens the Reveal CIs dialog box displaying the related CIs in the path.
Note: This button does not appear in the Save Reveal Path dialog box.
Page 282 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Reveal
Path
Build the path by clicking the
icon to open a dialog box with a CI type tree.
Select the CI type for the next item in the path.
When you hold the pointer over a reveal path item, the following options are
available:
l
Delete Selected Item(s). Deletes the selected item from the reveal path.
l
Add condition. Opens the Conditions of Related CIs dialog box, which
enables you to set conditions for the reveal path item.
l
Refine Query Node Type. Opens a CI type tree, which enables you to
change the CI type of the reveal path item.
Creating New View Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to select a perspective to create a view from a model.
To access
In the Modeling Studio, right-click a model in the Model Editor, Perspective-based
View Editor, or CI Selector and select Generate view for selected Model or click
the Generate view for selected model icon
from the Model Editor.
Important
You select perspectives in the left pane and move them to the right pane using the
information arrow buttons.
Relevant
tasks
"Build a Perspective-Based View Based on a Model " on page 273
See also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Available Perspectives
A list of the available perspectives to apply to your model.
Selected Perspectives
The perspectives you selected to apply to your model.
Cycle Definition Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define a cyclical hierarchy in a view.
To access
Page 283 of 446
In the Modeling Studio, right-click a query node in the Hierarchy pane of the
Pattern View Editor and select Define Cycles.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Important
You can extend the TQL query definition of a view by defining a cycle in the view
information hierarchy. Select a query node in the Hierarchy pane to be the source query node.
The Cycle Definition dialog box displays the valid target query nodes for that
source. The target query node in the cycle, along with its hierarchy, is treated as a
child or sibling of the source query node (depending on your folding rule selection).
See also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Folding
Rule
Target
Select one of the following options:
l
Folded cycle under source. The target query node becomes a child of the source
query node.
l
Flattened cycle under parent. The target query node becomes a sibling of the
source query node.
Displays the valid target query nodes for the selected source query node. A query
node is defined as a valid target query node if all of the following conditions are true:
l
it is related to the source query node
l
it is an ancestor of the source query node (or the source query node itself)
l
it is a query based node (not a grouping node)
Hidden CIs Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to restore hidden CIs to a view.
To
access
From the Perspective-based View Editor, click the Show Hidden CIs icon from the
toolbar of the View Results pane.
See
also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
<check box>
Select the check boxes for the CIs you want to restore.
CI Type
The CI type of the excluded CI.
Name
The name of the excluded CI.
Restore
Click Restore to include the selected CIs in the view.
Page 284 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Select All
Click Select All to select all the CIs in the list for inclusion in the view.
Unselect All
Click Unselect All to clear the check boxes of all the CIs in the list.
Hierarchy Rules Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to set the hierarchy of a view by defining hierarchy rules.
To access
From the Hierarchy pane of the Pattern View Editor, when Rule Based is
selected as the hierarchy method, click the Add Hierarchy Rule button
the toolbar.
Important
information
For each hierarchy rule you define, select a source CI type, target CI type,
relationship, and direction.
See also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
from
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Click to add a hierarchy rule.
Click to delete the selected hierarchy rule.
Relationship
Select a relationship from the drop-down list to edit the selected hierarchy
rule.
Relationship
Direction
Select a direction from the drop-down list to edit the selected hierarchy rule.
Source
Select a CI type for the source CI type from the drop-down tree to edit the
selected hierarchy rule.
Target
Select a CI type for the target CI type from the drop-down tree to edit the
selected hierarchy rule.
Left Pane
This area enables you to browse views and TQL queries, search for CIs or models to open in the
Editor pane, and select CI types to use in the TQL Query Editor or Pattern View Editor.
To access
Page 285 of 446
Located to the left of the Editor pane in Modeling Studio.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Important
information
The following tabs are available:
See also
l
CI Selector. See "CI Selector" on page 139.
l
Resources. Enables you to select a model, view, or TQL query to open
in the Editor pane.
l
CI Types. Enables you to select CI types from the tree to add as a query
node to your TQL query.
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
Resources Tab
Important
When Views or Queries is selected as the resource type, you can drag and drop
information views, queries, or folders to move them from one folder to another.
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click New Folder to create a new folder in the resource tree.
Note: This button only appears when Queries or Views are selected as the
resource type.
Click Delete to delete the selected resource from the RTSM.
Click Refresh to refresh the resource tree.
Click Expand All to expand all the folders in the resource tree.
Note: This button only appears when Queries or Views are selected as the
resource type.
Click Collapse All to collapse all the folders in the resource tree.
Note: This button only appears when Queries or Views are selected as the
resource type.
When Queries or Views are selected as the resource type, click Hide Empty
Folders to display only folders containing views or TQL queries.
When Models is selected as the resource type, click Show only models with
content to display only models containing CIs.
Page 286 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
When Views is selected as the resource type, click Filter Tree to filter the
types of views and templates that appear in the tree.
When Queries is selected as the resource type, click Filter Tree to filter the
TQL queries that appear in the tree by query type.
When Models is selected as the resource type, click Filter Table to filter the
models in the table by CI type.
Click Open Query to open the selected TQL query in a new tab.
Note: This button only appears when Queries is selected as the resource type.
Click Open View to open the selected view in a new tab.
Note: This button only appears when Views is selected as the resource type.
Click CI Properties to view the properties of the selected model.
Note: This button only appears when Models is selected as the resource type.
Click Show views containing selected CI/model to display a list of views
including the selected CI or model.
Note: This button only appears when Models is selected as the resource type.
Click Open Model to open the selected model in the Model Editor.
Note: This button only appears when Models is selected as the resource type.
Click Pattern Based Model Scheduler to modify the starting time and repeat
interval for all pattern-based models.
Note: This button only appears when Models is selected as the resource type.
Click Import From XML to import XML files that contain saved views or
queries to the Modeling Studio.
Note: This button only appears when Queries or Views are selected as the
resource type.
Click Export To XML to export the view or query as an XML script. This option
can be used to move a view or query from one workstation to another.
Note: This button only appears when Queries or Views are selected as the
resource type.
Page 287 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
<Resources> When Views or Queries is selected as the resource type, the available views or
TQL queries are displayed under their respective folders in tree format. When
Models is selected as the resource type, the available models are displayed in a
table.
For views, the following view types are included:
l
Denotes a pattern view.
l
Denotes a template.
l
Denotes a template-based view.
l
Denotes a perspective.
l
Resource
Type
Denotes a perspective-based view.
Select the resource type to display in the pane. The available options are
Models, Views, and Queries.
Resources Tab Shortcut Menu
The Resources tab includes the following elements (listed alphabetically) available by right-clicking
a resource:
Menu Item
Description
Create a new
Create a new view, template, or perspective based on the
View/Template/Perspective selected view, template, or perspective.
Note: This option is only active for queries when a query of type
view, template, or perspective is selected.
Delete
Delete the selected resource from the RTSM.
Export To XML
Export the view or query as an XML script. This option can be
used to move a view or query from one workstation to another.
New Folder
Create a new folder in the resource tree.
New Template Based View
Edit the parameters of the selected template to define a new
template-based view.
Note: This option is only active when a template is selected in
the view tree.
Open Query/View/Model
Open the selected view, TQL query, or model in a new tab.
Properties
Opens the CI Properties dialog box for the selected model.
Note: This option is only relevant for models.
Page 288 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Menu Item
Description
Refresh
Refresh the resource tree.
Remove
Remove the selected model.
Note: This option is only relevant for models.
Rename Folder
Rename the selected folder.
Save As
Save the selected TQL query with a new name.
Show containing views
Opens the Views containing selected CI dialog box for the
selected model.
Note: This option is only relevant for models.
CI Types Tab
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click Expand All to expand all the folders in the CI Type tree.
Click Collapse All to collapse all the folders in the CI Type tree.
Tree View
Click Tree View to select the display format of the CI type tree. The following
options are available:
l
Display label
l
Class name
l
Legacy class name
Click to add the selected CI type to the TQL query which is open in the Editor
pane.
Note: This button is only active when a view or TQL query is open in the Editor
pane.
Click Refresh to refresh the CI Type tree.
<CI Type
tree>
The available CI types are displayed in tree format.
CI Types Tab Shortcut Menu
The CI Types tab includes the following elements (listed alphabetically) available by right-clicking a
CI type:
Page 289 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Menu Item
Description
Add Selected
CITs to Query
Select to add the selected CI type to the TQL query open in the Editor pane.
Go to CI Type
Definition
Takes you directly to the selected CI type in CIT Manager.
Show Element Opens the CI Instances window, which displays all instances of the selected
Instances
CIT. For details, see "Element Instances Dialog Box" on page 70.
Manage CI Watchpoints Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to add or remove watchpoints for a CI in a model.
To access
From within a model in the Model Editor, click the Watchpoint
button and
select Manage CI Watchpoints or right-click a CI in the model and select
Watchpoint > Manage CI Watchpoints.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Add
Remove
Description
Click to open the New Watchpoint dialog box which enables you to add a new
watchpoint.
Click to delete the selected watchpoint.
Automated
A check mark indicates that the new CIs found by the watchpoint are to be
added to the view automatically.
Source CI
Displays the CI forming the beginning of the reveal path.
Watchpoint
Name
The name of the reveal path associated with the watchpoint.
Watchpoint
Path
Displays the reveal path for the watchpoint.
Model Editor
This feature enables you to create and edit models.
To access
Page 290 of 446
In the Modeling Studio, click the New button
and select Instance Based
Model to create a new model or select Models as the Resource type and open an
existing model.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Important
The Model Editor contains the following panes:
information
l Content pane. Lists the CIs and models contained in the model.
l
Information pane. Displays the properties, related CIs and watchpoints for
the selected CI or model.
You can drag CIs from the CI Selector into the Content pane of an existing model
to add them to the model. However, you cannot drag in a CI that is already
included in the model.
You can drag CIs from the CI Selector into the Related CIs tab of the Information
pane provided that the selected source and target CI can be related by a usage
relationship.
See also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
Content Pane
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Select Map Mode to display the CIs as icons in a diagram.
Select Text Mode to display the CIs in a list.
Click CI Properties to open the Configuration Item Properties dialog
box for the selected CI.
Click Show models containing selected CI to display a list of the
models containing the selected CI.
Click Show views containing selected CI/model to display a list of
the views containing the selected CI or model.
Click Open selected model in a new tab to open the selected model
in a separate Model Editor tab.
Click Generate view for selected model to create a view based on the
current model. The Creating New View dialog box opens, which enables
you to select a perspective to apply.
Click to remove a selected CI from the model (it remains in the RTSM).
Click Insert new model to open the New Model dialog box which
enables you to define a new model within the existing model.
Click Expand All to expand the model hierarchy.
Click Collapse All to collapse the model hierarchy.
Page 291 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Click Reveal for the following options:
l
Start Revealing. Opens the Reveal CIs dialog box. For details, see
Reveal CIs dialog box.
l
Create Reveal Path. Opens the Create Reveal Path dialog box. For
details, see Create Reveal Path dialog box.
l
Open Reveal Path. Opens the Open Reveal Path dialog box. For
details, see Open Reveal Path dialog box.
Click Watchpoint for the following options:
l
Watchpoints Updates. Display the watchpoint results and select
CIs to add to the model. For details, see Watchpoints Updates dialog
box.
l
New Watchpoint. Define a new watchpoint for the selected CI. For
details, see New Watchpoint dialog box.
l
Manage CI Watchpoints. Add new watchpoints to the CI or remove
existing ones. For details, see Manage CI Watchpoints dialog box.
Click CI Collection to group CIs in a collection under a model. Select
one of the following options:
l
Insert New CI Collection. Create a new empty CI Collection. After
creating the collection, you can drag CIs into it from the CI Selector,
the related CIs tab, or from the model itself.
l
Join to CI Collection. Select a CI or several CIs in the model and
join them to an existing CI collection or form a new collection.
l
Decompose CI Collection. Select a CI collection and decompose
it. Its CIs remain directly under the main model.
Click Find to toggle between displaying and hiding the Find box and
arrow controls.
Note: This button only appears in Text mode.
Click to refresh the map and optimize the map layout.
Note: This button only appears in Map mode.
Click Fit to Window to resize the map to fit the size of the pane.
Note: This button only appears in Map mode.
Page 292 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Select the functionality of the cursor from the Mode drop-down. The
following options are available:
l
Select
l
Drag Map
l
Zoom In
Note: This feature only appears in Map mode.
Click the Print button to select Print, Print Preview or Print Setup.
Select a CI and click Show External Relationships to display the
related CIs for that CI.
Note: This button only appears in Map mode.
Click Hide External Relationships to hide the related CIs.
Note: This button only appears in Map mode.
Indicates that watchpoints are defined for the current CI.
Indicates that the watchpoints have detected new CIs related to the
current model. Click it to open the Watchpoints Updates dialog box.
CI Type column
Displays the type of each CI in the model.
Find
Enter a CI name or a portion of a CI name in the Find box to locate a CI
in the model.
Find Next
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the
model.
Find Previous
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in
the model.
Highlight
Click to highlight all occurrences of the search phrase in the model.
Name column
Displays the name of each CI in the model.
Shortcut Menu Options
Page 293 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Menu Item
Description
CI Collection
Click CI Collection to group CIs in a collection under a model. Select one of
the following options:
Fit to Window
l
Insert New CI Collection. Create a new empty collection. After creating
the collection, you can drag CIs into it from the CI Selector, the related
CIs tab, or from the model itself.
l
Join to CI Collection. Select a CI or several CIs in the model and join
them to an existing CI collection or form a new group.
l
Decompose CI Collection. Select a CI collection and decompose it. Its
CIs remain directly under the main model.
Resizes the map to fit the size of the pane.
Note: This option only appears in Map mode.
Generate view
for selected
model
Select to create a view based on the current model. The Creating New View
dialog box opens which enables you to select a perspective to apply.
Hide External
Relationships
Hides the related CIs from the map.
Insert New
Model
Opens the New Model dialog box which enables you to create a new model
within the existing model.
Open selected
model in a new
tab
Opens the selected model in a separate Model Editor tab.
Print
Select one of the following options:
Note: This option only appears in Map mode.
l
Print
l
Print Preview
l
Print Setup
Properties
Opens the Configuration Item Properties dialog box for the selected CI.
Refresh Layout
Refreshes the map and optimizes the map layout.
Note: This option only appears in Map mode.
Reveal
Page 294 of 446
The following options are available:
l
Start Revealing. Opens the Reveal CIs dialog box. For details, see
Reveal CIs dialog box.
l
Open Reveal Path. Opens the Open Reveal Path dialog box. For details,
see Open Reveal Path dialog box.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Menu Item
Description
Remove
Selected CI(s)
from the Model
Deletes the selected CIs from the model (it remains in the RTSM).
Select
Select the functionality of the cursor. The following options are available:
l
Select
l
Drap Map
l
Zoom In
Note: This option only appears in Map mode.
Show
Containing
Models
Click to display a list of the models containing the selected CI.
Show
Containing
Views
Click to display a list of the views containing the selected CI or model.
Show External
Relationships
Displays the related CIs for the selected CI.
Watchpoint
The following options are available:
Zoom
Note: This option only appears in Map mode.
l
Watchpoints Updates. Display the watchpoint results and select CIs to
add to the model. For details, see Watchpoints Updates dialog box.
l
New Watchpoint. Define a new watchpoint for the selected CI. For
details, see New Watchpoint dialog box.
l
Manage CI Watchpoints. Add new watchpoints to the CI or remove
existing ones. For details, see Manage CI Watchpoints dialog box.
Select the size of the map from the list of percents.
Note: This option only appears in Map mode.
Information Pane - Properties Tab
This area displays the properties of the selected CI.
Important
This pane is identical to the Properties tab of the Information pane in IT Universe
information Manager. For details, see "Configuration Item Properties Dialog Box" on page
219.
Information Pane - Related CIs Tab
This area displays the CIs related to the model by one of the triplets that includes an Impacted By
(Potentially) relationship.
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
Page 295 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click to delete the relationship to the selected CI.
Click Invert Direction to switch the direction of the relationship for the selected CI.
Note: This option is only active for CIs related by a usage relationship.
<CI list>
Lists the name and CI type of the CIs related to the model by usage relationships,
as well as the direction of the relationship.
Filter by
Select a field by which to filter the results and enter the value in the by box.
Information Pane - Watchpoints Tab
This area displays the watchpoints defined for the selected CI.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Click to open the Manage CI Watchpoints dialog box, which enables you to
edit the watchpoint.
Automated
Indicates whether the new CIs found by the watchpoint are automatically
added to the view.
Source CI
Displays the CI forming the beginning of the reveal path.
Watchpoint
Name
The name of the reveal path associated with the watchpoint.
Watchpoint
Path
Displays the reveal path of the watchpoint.
Modeling Studio Page
This page enables you to create and edit models and views.
Tip: For more information about using Modeling Studio in BSM, see "Best Practices for
Modeling" on page 181.
To access
Page 296 of 446
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > Modeling Studio.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Important
The Modeling Studio page contains the following panes:
information
l Left pane. Enables you to search for CIs or select a view, model, or TQL
query to open. For details, see "Left Pane" on page 285.
l
Editor pane. Displays the topology map of a selected view, model, or TQL
query.
The Editor pane is a blank canvas before any views or models are opened. When
you open a view, model, or TQL query, the relevant editor appears there. Multiple
views, models, and queries can be open at the same time in the Editor pane, each
within a separate tab.
See also
"Model Editor" on page 290, "Perspective-based View Editor" on page 307,
"Pattern View Editor" on page 303, "TQL Query Editor" on page 323
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
New
Description
Click the click the New buttonto select one of the following options:
l
Instance Based Model. To create a new instance based model.
l
Pattern Based Model. To create a new pattern based model.
l
Pattern View. To create a new pattern view.
l
Template Based View. To create a new template-based view.
l
Perspective Based View. To create a new perspective-based view.
l
Template. To create a new template.
l
Perspective. To create a new perspective.
l
Query. To create a new TQL query.
Click Save to save the changes to your view, model, or query.
For views, a dialog box opens which enables you to rename your view and save it
in the appropriate folder.
Click Save As to save your view, model, or TQL query under a new name.
Click Undo to reverse the last change you made.
Click Redo to repeat the last action you took.
Click Maximize Workspace to toggle between the regular display and a fullscreen display of the editor.
<Menu>
Page 297 of 446
For details, see "Main Menu" on page 168.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Models Containing Selected CI Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to display a list of the models containing the selected CI.
To access
Click the Show models containing selected CI
button in the Model
Editor or select Show containing models from the shortcut menu.
See also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click CI Properties to open the Configuration Item Properties dialog box for the
selected model.
Click Show views containing selected CI/model to display a list of views
containing the selected model.
Click Remove model to delete the selected model.
CI Type
Displays the CI types of the models containing the selected CI.
Find
Enter a model name or a portion of a model name in the Find box to locate it in the
list.
Find Next
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list.
Find
Previous
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list.
Name
Displays the names of the models containing the selected CI.
Note: The name of the current model appears in faded text.
New Model Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define a reusable model containing a collection of CIs.
To access
Click the New
button and select Instance Based Model or drag a
CI from the tree in the CI Selector onto the editing pane and select
Create a new model.
Relevant tasks
"Build an Instance-based Model " on page 271
See also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below:
Page 298 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Define new
CI Properties
Enter the values for the CI properties. You must enter values for required
properties. The required properties are marked with an asterisk.
Select CI
Type
Select a CI type from the list to serve as the basis for your model.
New Pattern View/Template/Perspective Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define a new pattern view, template, or perspective using the Pattern
View Editor.
To access
In the Modeling Studio, click the New
button and select Pattern View,
Template, or Perspective from the drop-down menu.
Important
After making your selection and clicking OK, you go directly to the Pattern View
information Editor to begin building your view. For details, see "Pattern View Editor" on page
303.
Relevant
tasks
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265, "Create a Template" on page 266, "Create a
Perspective" on page 267
See also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list of TQL
queries.
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list of TQL
queries.
Click to highlight all occurrences of the search phrase in the list of TQL queries.
<TQL
query
tree>
Displays the existing TQL queries in tree format.
Choose
base
query
If you want to base your new view on an existing TQL query, select this option and
select a TQL query from the tree. The Pattern View Editor opens with the selected
TQL query on the canvas.
Create
new
query
If you want to base your new view on a new TQL query, select this option. The Pattern
View Editor opens with a blank canvas.
Page 299 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Find
Enter a TQL query name or a portion of a query name in the Find box to locate a TQL
query in the list.
New Watchpoint Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define a watchpoint for a CI in a model.
To access
From within a model in the Model Editor, click the Watchpoint
button and select New Watchpoint or right-click a CI in the model and
select Watchpoint > New Watchpoint.
Important
information
If no reveal paths are found for the selected CI, no watchpoints can be
defined.
You cannot define watchpoints for CIs in a new model until you save the
model.
Relevant tasks
"Build an Instance-based Model " on page 271
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Automatically
update model
Select to automatically add all revealed CIs from the selected path to the
model.
Control updates
manually
Select to manually add revealed CIs from the selected path to the model.
Select
Watchpoint
reveal path
Select a reveal path from the drop-down list.
Show reveal
paths for CI type
Select a CI type from the drop-down list. All reveal paths beginning with that
CI type appear in the list in the lower drop-down box.
Open Reveal Path Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to open an existing path.
To access
From within a model in the Model Editor, click the Reveal
button and select
Open Reveal Path or right-click a CI in the model and select Reveal > Open
Reveal Path.
Important
After selecting the reveal path you want to use, click Execute. If CIs are found on
information the selected path, the Reveal CIs dialog box opens for that path. If no CIs are
found, a message appears stating that no CIs were found on the path.
Page 300 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Description column Displays the descriptions of the existing paths.
Edit
Opens the Edit Reveal Path dialog box which enables you to edit the
selected path.
Execute
Opens the Reveal CIs dialog box for the selected reveal path.
Find
Enter a path name or a portion of a path name in the Find box to locate a
path in the list.
Find Next
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the
list of paths.
Find Previous
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in
the list of paths.
Highlight
Click to highlight all occurrences of the search phrase in the list of paths.
Name column
Displays the names of the existing paths.
Remove
Deletes the selected path.
Show reveal paths
for CI type
Select a CI type from the drop-down list. All paths beginning with the
selected CI appear in the table below.
Pattern Based Model Wizard
This wizard enables you to build a pattern-based model.
To access
In the Modeling Studio, click the New
Model from the drop-down menu.
button and select Pattern Based
Important
When you create a pattern-based model, the model is saved as a CI, as with an
information instance-based model. If you based your model on a new TQL query, the query is
also saved and appears in the TQL query tree.
When you build a pattern-based model over an existing instance-based model, the
model is saved with the name of the instance-based model.
If you create a new pattern-based model with the same name as a previously
deleted pattern-based model, you can select an old query on which to base the
new pattern-based model or you can create a new query.
Relevant
tasks
"Build a New Pattern-based Model " on page 272
Wizard
map
The Pattern Based Model Wizard contains:
See also
"Pattern-based Models" on page 255
Page 301 of 446
"Select CI Type Page" > "Query Selection Page"
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Select CI Type Page
This wizard page enables you to select a CI type for the model and define its details.
Wizard map
The Pattern Based Model Wizard contains:
"Select CI Type Page" > "Query Selection Page"
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Existing Select Existing Model to build a pattern-based model over an existing instanceModel
based model. Select an existing model from the tree.
New
Model
Select New Model to create a new pattern-based model (unrelated to any other
model). In the Select CI Type section, select a CI type from the list to serve as the
basis for your model. Then enter the values for the CI properties in the Define New CI
Properties section.
Query Selection Page
This wizard page enables you to select a TQL query upon which the model is based.
Wizard map
The Pattern Based Model Wizard contains:
"Select CI Type Page" > "Query Selection Page"
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list of TQL
queries.
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list of TQL
queries.
Click to highlight all occurrences of the search phrase in the list of TQL queries.
<TQL
Query
tree>
Page 302 of 446
Displays the existing TQL queries in tree format.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Choose
base
query
If you want to base your model on an existing TQL query, select this option and select
a query from the tree. The TQL Query Editor opens with the selected query on the
canvas.
Create
new
query
If you want to base your model on a new TQL query, select this option. The TQL
Query Editor opens with a blank canvas.
Find
Enter a TQL query name or a portion of a query name in the Find box to locate a query
in the list.
Pattern View Editor
This feature enables you to build and edit pattern views, templates, and perspectives.
To access
To open a new view in the Pattern View Editor, go to the Modeling Studio, click
the New
button and select the required type of view.
To open an existing view in the Pattern View Editor, go to the Resources tab of
the left pane in the Modeling Studio and select Views as the Resource type. Right
click a view in the tree and select Open View or double click a view or drag a view
onto the Editor pane. The topology map of the view opens in the Editor pane.
Important
You can access the Editor in View mode or in Report mode.
information
l In View mode, the following panes are included:
l
n
Query Definition pane. For details, see "TQL Query Editor" on page 323.
n
Advanced pane. For details, see "Advanced Pane" on page 325.
n
Hierarchy pane. Enables you to set the hierarchy of the view. (Located in
the right portion of the Editor page.)
In Report mode, the following panes are included:
n
Hierarchy pane. Enables you to set the hierarchy of the view. (Located in
the left portion of the Editor page.)
n
Query Node Definition. Enables you to select the attributes to be included
in the report and to set their order.
Note: To save your view, template, or perspective, use the Save button in the
Modeling Studio main toolbar.
Relevant
tasks
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265, "Create a Template" on page 266, "Create a
Perspective" on page 267
See also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
Page 303 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Hierarchy Pane
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click Add Group By to create a subgroup in the hierarchy. The following options
are available:
l
Add Group By Attribute. Opens the Query Node Grouping dialog box, which
enables you to select an attribute for a subgroup in the hierarchy.
l
Add Group By CI Type. Create a subgroup in the hierarchy for the CI type of
the selected query node.
l
Add Group by Query Node. Create a subgroup in the hierarchy for the
selected query node only.
Click Edit Group By Attribute to open the Query Node Grouping dialog box,
which enables you to edit the attribute for a subgroup in the hierarchy.
Click Rename to rename the selected query node.
Click Delete Query Node to delete the selected query node from the hierarchy
tree.
Click Move Query Node Layer Up to place the selected query node one layer
higher in the hierarchy.
Click Move Query Node Layer Down to place the selected query node under the
query node above it in the hierarchy.
Note: If the selected query node is located at the top of the hierarchy tree, clicking
Move Query Node Layer Down places it under the query node beneath it in the
hierarchy.
Click Move Query Node Up to move the selected query node up in the hierarchy
tree. The query node order in the hierarchy determines the query node order in the
report generated for the view in Reports.
Click Move Query Node Down to move the selected query node down in the
hierarchy tree. The query node order in the hierarchy determines the query node
order in the report generated for the view in Reports.
Click Preview to display a preview of the topology report.
Note: This option only appears in the Hierarchy pane when Report mode is
selected.
Page 304 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
<Hierarchy The query nodes of the TQL query are arranged in a hierarchical tree reflecting the
tree>
hierarchy defined for the view.
You can click and drag query nodes to change the hierarchy. When you click a
query node and begin to drag it, the query nodes under which it is possible to place
your query node are highlighted in green.
Hierarchy
Method
Select the method of setting the hierarchy:
l
Manual. Set the hierarchy manually, by dragging query nodes and using the
toolbar buttons.
l
Rule Based. Open the Hierarchy Rules dialog box which enables you to set
rules for the hierarchy.
Shortcut Menu
The Hierarchy pane includes the following elements (listed alphabetically) available by right-clicking
a query node in the hierarchy tree:
Menu Item
Description
Add Group
By Attribute
Select Add Group By Attribute to open the Query Node Grouping dialog box,
which enables you to select an attribute for a subgroup in the hierarchy.
Add Group
By CI Type
Select Add Group By CI Type to create a subgroup in the hierarchy for the CI
type of the selected query node.
Add Group
By Query
Node
Select Add Group By Query Node to create a subgroup in the hierarchy for the
selected query node only.
Define
Cycles
Select Define Cycles to define a cyclical hierarchy. For details, see "Cycle
Definition Dialog Box" on page 283.
Delete Query
Node
Select to delete the selected query node from the hierarchy tree.
Move Query
Node Down
Select to move the selected query node down in the hierarchy tree.
Move Query
Node Layer
Down
Select Move Query Node Layer Down to place the selected query node under
the query node above it in the hierarchy.
Page 305 of 446
Note: If the selected query node is located at the top of the hierarchy tree,
selecting Move Query Node Layer Down places it under the query node
beneath it in the hierarchy
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Menu Item
Description
Move Query
Node Layer
Up
Select Move Query Node Layer Up to place the selected query node one layer
higher in the hierarchy.
Move Query
Node Up
Select to move the selected query node up in the hierarchy tree.
Rename
Select to rename the selected query node.
Subgraph
Hierarchy
Enables you to define whether the subgraph defined for the selected query node
is displayed as flat or as folded under the query node.
Note: This option is only relevant for query nodes that have a defined subgraph.
Query Node Definition Pane
Important
The Query Node Definition pane is disabled for template based views. To make
information changes to the report layout, edit the based template of the view. When you open
a template based view in the Editor and select the Report tab, a warning message
appears containing a link to the base template of the view.
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click Up to move a selected attribute up in the report layout order.
Click Down to move a selected attribute down in the report layout order.
Click Edit to edit the function for the selected attribute.
Click Delete to delete a selected attribute from the report layout.
Click to move the selected attributes to the Report Layout list.
Add
Function
Click Add Function to open the Add Function dialog box, which enables you to
define the functions to include in the report for the selected query node. Each
function that you add is treated as an attribute and becomes a column in the report.
Note: This button is only active if there is a query node below the selected query
node in the view hierarchy.
Attributes The list of available attributes for the selected query node.
Page 306 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Define
Chart
Click Define Chart to display the data for the current layer of the view in a graphical
chart format. The Chart Properties fields are displayed.
The Define Chart option is only active for a query node or a grouping node that:
l
is the top layer of the view and has a layer below it in the view hierarchy
l
is the only query node on its layer of the view
l
has at least one numeric attribute selected for the report layout
Report
Layout
Displays the list of attributes selected to appear in the report. Use the toolbar
buttons to change the order of the attributes in the report and to add functions.
Set Sort
Order
Click to open the Set Column Sort Order dialog box which enables you to set the
order of the report columns.
Chart Properties
The Chart Properties portion of the pane includes the following elements (listed alphabetically):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click Remove Chart to remove the chart from the report. The report is generated
in table format.
Breakdown
by
The chart is broken down by the CI or grouping node display label. This is fixed
for all reports.
Chart Type
Select Pie to create a pie chart or Bar to create a bar chart.
Value
Select a value from the drop-down list.
Perspective-based View Editor
This feature enables you to create and edit perspective-based views.
To access
In the Modeling Studio, click the New button
and select Perspective Based
View to create a new view or drag CIs from the CI Selector onto the blank canvas
and select Create a new view.
To open an existing view in the Editor, select Views as the resource type in the
Resources pane, select the required perspective-based view from the tree, and
click Open View
Page 307 of 446
or double-click the view.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Important
The Perspective-based View Editor contains the following panes:
information
l Content pane. Drag CIs and/or models onto this pane to include them in your
view.
Relevant
tasks
See also
l
Perspective pane. Select perspectives to apply to the content to build a view.
l
View Results pane. Displays a topology map with a preview of the current
view. This pane includes most of the IT Universe Manager functionality.
l
"Build a Perspective-Based View Based on a Model " on page 273
l
"Build a Perspective-Based View Based on a Collection of CIs" on page 274
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
Content Pane
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Go directly to IT Universe Manager for the current view.
Click Properties to open the Configuration Item Properties dialog box for the
selected CI.
Click Show models containing selected CI to display a list of the models
containing the selected CI.
Click Show views containing selected CI/model to display a list of the views
containing the selected CI or model.
Click Open selected model in a new tab to open the selected model in a separate
Model Editor tab.
Click Generate view for selected model to create a view based on the selected
model. The Creating New View dialog box opens which enables you to select a
perspective to apply.
Click to remove a selected CI from the view content.
Click View Definition Properties to open the View Definition Properties dialog box
which enables you to set properties for the view.
Click Find to toggle between displaying and hiding the Find box and arrow controls.
CI Type
column
Displays the type of each CI in the view.
Find
Enter a CI name or a portion of a CI name in the Find box to locate a CI in the view
Page 308 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Find
Next
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the view.
Find
Previous
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in the view.
Highlight Click to highlight all occurrences of the search phrase in the view.
Name
column
Displays the name of each CI in the view.
Shortcut Menu Options
Menu Item
Description
Generate view
for selected
model
Select to create a view based on the selected model. The Creating New
View dialog box opens which enables you to select a perspective to apply.
Open selected
model in a new
tab
Opens the selected model in a separate Model Editor tab.
Properties
Opens the Configuration Item Properties dialog box for the selected CI.
Remove Base
CIs
Deletes the selected CI or model from the view content.
Show
Containing
Models
Click to display a list of the models containing the selected CI.
Show
Containing
Views
Click to display a list of the views containing the selected CI or model.
Perspective Pane
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Delete the selected level of the perspective selection.
Shift the perspective selection from the current level to the previous one.
Shift the perspective selection from the current level to the following one.
Page 309 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Add a new level to the perspective selection. The results of the previous
perspective level serve as the input content for the new level.
Open a dialog box with the available perspectives. Move the required
perspectives from the available column to the selected column using the arrow
buttons.
To view a perspective definition, select a perspective in either column and click
the Open Definition link. The perspective definition opens in a separate tab.
Apply Over
Model
Hierarchy
For views based on models, select the Apply Over Model Hierarchy check
box to include the model hierarchy in the view and apply the perspectives to the
CIs included in the model as well as to the model itself. Clear the check box to
exclude the model hierarchy from the view and apply the perspectives to the
model itself only. In this case, the model is treated as an ordinary CI.
Note: This option is disabled for a view based on a collection of CIs or on a
model and a collection of CIs.
Perspectives Lists the selected perspectives.
A default perspective appears in the window before any selection is made. You
can set the value of the default perspective using the Selected perspectives for
new perspective based views infrastructure setting.
View Results Pane
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Map
Click to display the view results in Map mode.
Text
Click to display the view results in Text mode.
Create a relationship between two CIs in the view.
Toggle between hiding and displaying the topology map legend.
Move up one level in the topology map.
Move down one level in the topology map.
Delete the selected CI from the view.
Click Show CI Properties to open the Configuration Item Properties dialog
box for the selected CI.
Page 310 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Click Refresh to refresh the view results.
Click Hide CI from View to hide the selected CI from the view. This option
is only relevant for CIs that were added to the view via the perspective. You
cannot hide CIs from the original view content from the view.
Note: Hidden CIs can be restored from the Hidden CIs dialog box.
Click Show Hidden CIs to open the Hidden CIs dialog box which enables
you to restore CIs that were hidden from the view manually.
Click Create view based on selected CI/s to create a new view based on
the CIs selected from the View Results pane.
Click Expand preview display to display the preview in a separate pane.
<Breadcrumbs> At the top of the topology map, the breadcrumbs indicate the relevant query
nodes in each layer of the view for the path to the selected layer. The first
item in the path is the Top Layer. When you select a CI from the layer below,
the parent CI forms the next item in the breadcrumb path. You can click on
any item in the path to display that layer in the topology map.
<Legend>
Indicates the icons displayed next to CIs with any of the following special
statuses:
l
Added. When Change Timeframe is active, indicates that the CI was
added.
l
Candidate for Deletion. Indicates that the CI is a candidate for deletion.
l
Changed. When Change Timeframe is active, indicates that the CI was
changed.
l
External. Indicates that the CI is a federated CI.
l
Impacted. When Impact Analysis is active, indicates an impacted CI.
l
Impacted and Trigger. When Impact Analysis is active, indicates a
trigger CI that is impacted.
l
Note. Indicates that a note was added for the CI.
l
Trigger. When Impact Analysis is active, indicates a trigger CI.
<Topology
Map>
The topology map in the View Results pane follows the layout of the topology
map in IT Universe Manager. For details, see "Topology Map" on page 228.
<Topology Map
Sidebar>
For details, see "Topology Map Sidebar" on page 178.
Page 311 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Shortcut Menu Options
Menu
Item
Description
<IT
Universe
Shortcut
Menu
options>
The IT Universe Manager shortcut menu options are available. For details, see "IT
Universe Manager Shortcut Menu" on page 231.
Create
view
based on
selected
CI/s
Select Create view based on selected CI/s to create a new view based on the
CIs selected from the View Results pane.
Hide CI
from
View
Click to hide the selected CI from the view. This option is only relevant for CIs that
were added to the view via the perspective. You cannot hide CIs from the original
view content from the view. In the case of a view based on a model, the model
cannot be hidden but its CIs can.
Show
Hidden
CIs
Restore hidden CIs to the view.
Query Node Grouping Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define a new grouping of CIs or to edit an existing grouping.
To
Click the Add Group by button
in the Hierarchy pane of the Pattern View Editor
access and select Add Group by Attribute or right click the required query node and select
Add Group by Attribute from the shortcut menu.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Expression capture
group index
Enter the number of the relevant portion of the regular expression. Enter
0 if the entire expression is relevant.
Group by
Select an attribute from the drop-down list.
Mask to group by
Enter a regular expression pattern representing the structure of the
selected attribute.
For details, see "" on page 250.
Query/View Definition Properties Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to configure the properties of a TQL query or view.
Page 312 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
To access
See also
In the Modeling Studio, click the Query/View Definition Properties
in the TQL Query Editor or Pattern View Editor.
button
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Base Query Select an existing TQL query on which to base your new query.
Note:
Bundles
l
This field is only relevant for TQL queries.
l
This field is optional.
A method of grouping TQL queries or views by category. Select the bundles
associated with the current query or view or create a new bundle for it.
Note: This field is optional.
Description A description of the TQL query or view.
Inter-Layer
Links
Set the scope of inter-layer relationships displayed in the topology results.
Persistent
Select to define the TQL query as persistent. A persistent query remains in the
memory permanently.
Note: This field is only relevant for views.
Note: This field is only relevant for TQL queries.
Priority
Select a priority level for the TQL query or view from the drop-down list (Low,
Medium, High, Express, Not Active). This setting determines how often the query
should be rerun automatically by the system to include updated information from
the RTSM.
Note: When you change the priority of a view, the priority of the TQL query on
which the view is based is also changed.
Scope
Select the scope of the TQL query from the drop-down list.
Note: This field is only relevant for Integration TQL queries.
Type
Select the type of the TQL query from the drop-down list.
Note: This field is only relevant for TQL queries.
Reveal CIs Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to search for CIs related to the CIs in a model and add them to the
model.
Page 313 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
To access
In the Model Editor of the Modeling Studio, select a CI, click the Reveal
button, and select Start Revealing or right-click a CI in the model and select
Reveal > Start Revealing.
Important
The upper pane displays the CI types of the CIs related to the selected CI. The
information lower pane displays the CIs of the type selected in the upper pane.
The first step in the reveal path is the CI type of the CI you began with. When you
select a CI type from the list in the upper pane, that CI type becomes the second
step in the path. Click Next to display the CI types available for the next step of
the path.
The number at the top of the box in parentheses indicates the length of the
constructed path thus far.
Relevant
tasks
"Build an Instance-based Model " on page 271
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click to delete a selected item from the CIs basket.
Click to add a selected CI from the lower pane to the CIs basket.
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list of CIs.
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list of
CIs.
<Lower
pane>
Displays a list of related CIs of the type selected in the upper pane.
CI count
Indicates how many related CIs of each type were found.
CIs Basket
Displays the related CIs you selected to include in the model.
CI Type
Displays a list of CI types of the CIs related to the selected CI.
Conditions A check mark indicates that conditions were defined for the selected CI type.
Click the Conditions column for the CI type you want to select and click the Add
Condition or Edit Condition button to open the Conditions of Related CIs dialog
box. This enables you to define and edit conditions for the CI type.
Find
Enter a CI name or a portion of a CI name in the Find box to locate a CI in the list of
CIs.
Finish
Click Finish when you have finished adding CIs to the CI basket.
Next
Click Next to display the CI types available for the next step of the path.
Page 314 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element
(A-Z)
Reveal
path
Description
Displays the reveal path being constructed.
Clicking the blue arrows in the path
displays a drop-down list of the CI types
available for the next step of the path.
Clicking the CI types in the path displays the following options:
Save Path
l
Jump to page. Refreshes the table with the available CI types for the selected
step of the path.
l
Edit Condition. Opens the Conditions of Related CIs dialog box.
l
Delete Selected Item(s). Deletes the selected CI type from the reveal path
(the path ends at the previous CI type).
Opens the Save Reveal Path dialog box which enables you to save the path. This
option is only active when a unique reveal path has been constructed.
Save Query Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to save a new TQL query.
To access
See also
In the Modeling Studio, click the Save
query.
button when defining a new TQL
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Click New Folder to create a new folder in the resource tree.
Click Delete to delete the selected resource from the RTSM.
Click Refresh to refresh the resource tree.
Click Expand All to expand all the folders in the resource tree.
Click Collapse All to collapse all the folders in the resource tree.
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the tree.
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in the
tree.
Click to highlight all occurrences of the search phrase in the tree.
Page 315 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element (AZ)
Description
<Resource
tree>
Select a folder in the tree in which to save the query.
Find
Enter a folder name or a portion of a name in the Find box to locate a folder in
the list.
Query Name
Enter the name of the new TQL query.
Save View/Template/Perspective Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to save a new pattern view, template-based view, perspective-based
view, template, or perspective.
To access
See also
In the Modeling Studio, click the Save
button when defining a new
pattern view, template-based view, perspective-based view, template, or
perspective.
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Click New Folder to create a new folder in the resource tree.
Click Delete to delete the selected resource from the RTSM.
Click Refresh to refresh the resource tree.
Click Expand All to expand all the folders in the resource tree.
Click Collapse All to collapse all the folders in the resource tree.
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the tree.
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in the
tree.
Click to highlight all occurrences of the search phrase in the tree.
<Resource
tree>
Select a folder in the tree in which to save the view, template, or perspective.
Find
Enter a folder name or a portion of a name in the Find box to locate a folder in
the list.
Page 316 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element (AZ)
Description
New query
Select New query if the view is based on a new TQL query.
Note: This field is not relevant for template-based views and perspectivebased views.
View Name
Enter the name of the new view, template, or perspective.
Select Integration Points Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to select integration points to access the required data sources for a
TQL query node.
To access
In the Modeling Studio, right-click a TQL query node and select Select
Integration Points.
Important
You can select the data sources from which the TQL query generates the results
information for each query node. For details on data sources, see Integration Studio Overview
in the Data Flow Management Guide.
See also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
<Integration
Point list>
A list of integration points for available data sources.
All
Integration
Points
Enables you to include CIs from all RTSM and external data sources for the
selected query node in the TQL query results.
Local Data
Source
Enables you to include CIs from the RTSM only for the selected query node in
the TQL query results.
Select
Integration
Points
Enables you to select integration points to include CIs from the required data
sources only for the selected query node in the TQL query results.
Note: Only includes integration points where the CI type of the selected query
node is marked as federated.
Sort Column Content Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to set the order of the column content in a report.
To access
Page 317 of 446
In the Modeling Studio, click Set Sort Order in the Query Node Definition pane of
the Pattern View Editor (in Report mode).
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Important
The report is sorted by columns following the order of the attributes in the Sorted
information Columns pane. Each selected column is sorted in ascending or descending order
according to your selection.
Relevant
tasks
"Define Report Settings" on page 270
See also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Click Move to Sorted Columns to move the selected attribute to the Sorted
Columns pane.
Click Move to Available Columns to move the selected attribute to the
Available Columns pane.
Click to move all the attributes to the Sorted Columns pane.
Click to move all the attributes to the Available Columns pane.
Click to move the selected attribute down in the Sorted Columns list.
Click to move the selected attribute up in the Sorted Columns list.
Click Sort Ascending to sort the selected column in ascending order.
Click Sort Descending to sort the selected column in descending order.
Available
Columns
The attributes selected to appear as columns in the report.
Sorted
Columns
The columns selected to be sorted.
Template-based View Wizard
This wizard enables you to define template-based views manually or by importing parameter data
from a CSV file.
To access
Page 318 of 446
Click the New
button and select Template Based View.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Important
The wizard enables you to create multiple template-based views based on the
information same template. When creating multiple views, the wizard includes the Save
Views page as the final page. When creating a single template-based view, the
wizard finishes with the Parameters page and opens the new view in the Editor.
You can save the new view from within the Editor.
Relevant
tasks
l
"Create a Template Based View" on page 268
l
"Create Multiple Template Based Views" on page 269
Wizard
map
The Template-based View Wizard contains:
See also
"Creating Template Based Views" on page 254
"Select Template Page" > "Import Parameter Values Page" > "Enter Parameters
Page" > "Select Location for Views Page" > "Summary Page" > "Save Views
Page"
Select Template Page
This wizard page enables you to select a template on which to base your view.
Important
If you don't want to use any of the templates in the tree, you can create a new
information template first and then build a view based on it. For details on creating a template,
see "Create a Template" on page 266.
Wizard
map
The Template-based View Wizard contains:
"Select Template Page" > "Import Parameter Values Page" > "Enter Parameters
Page" >"Select Location for Views Page" > "Summary Page" > "Save Views
Page"
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click Refresh to refresh the template tree.
Click Expand All to expand all the folders in the template tree.
Click Collapse All to collapse all the folders in the template tree.
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the tree.
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in the tree.
Click to highlight all occurrences of the search phrase in the tree.
<Template
tree>
Page 319 of 446
Displays the existing templates in tree format.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element
(A-Z)
Find
Description
Enter a template name or a portion of a name in the Find box to locate a
template in the list.
Import Parameter Values Page
This wizard page enables you to import parameter values from a CSV file.
Important
If you are creating a large number of views based on the same template, you can
information save the parameter values in a CSV file and import them directly into the wizard.
Note: If the CSV file contains any non-English characters, you must use UTF-8
encoding to ensure that the characters are displayed properly.
Wizard
map
The Template-based View Wizard contains:
"Select Template Page" > "Import Parameter Values Page" > "Enter
Parameters Page" >"Select Location for Views Page" > "Summary Page" >
"Save Views Page"
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Add
parameter
values
manually
Select this option to enter the parameter values manually, whether for a single
view or for multiple views.
Import
parameter
values
from a
CSV file
Select this option to import the parameter values from a CSV file. Click the ellipsis
Use
Advanced
Naming
Select the Use Advanced Naming option to automatically name the created
views based on parameter values. In the box, enter an expression containing at
least one parameter name in angle brackets. The views are named based on the
values of the selected parameter.
button
to browse your files for the required file.
Enter Parameters Page
This wizard page enables you to set the values of the template's parameters for each new view
created.
Page 320 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Important
If you are creating multiple views, click Next after you set the parameter values to
information proceed to the Save Views page. If you are creating a single view, click Finish
after you set the parameter values to open the new view in the Editor.
Wizard
map
The Template-based View Wizard contains:
"Select Template Page" > "Import Parameter Values Page" > "Enter Parameters
Page" > "Select Location for Views Page" > "Summary Page"> "Save Views
Page"
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click to add a new view instance.
Click to delete the selected view instance.
<Parameter In each parameter column, enter or select the required parameter value for each
columns>
view.
Reset
Click to reset the selected parameter to its original value.
Use
Advanced
Naming
Select the Use Advanced Naming option to automatically name the created
views based on parameter values. In the box, enter an expression containing at
least one parameter name in angle brackets. The views are named based on the
values of the selected parameter.
Note: All view names must be unique.
View Name
Enter names for each of the new views, or use the default names assigned.
Select Location for Views Page
This wizard page enables you to select the location in which to save the created views.
Important
All created views must be saved in the same location
information
Wizard
map
The Template-based View Wizard contains:
"Select Template Page" > "Import Parameter Values Page" > "Enter Parameters
Page" > "Select Location for Views Page" > "Summary Page"> "Save Views
Page"
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
Page 321 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click New Folder to create a new folder in the view tree.
Click Refresh to refresh the view tree.
Click Expand All to expand all the folders in the view tree.
Click Collapse All to collapse all the folders in the view tree.
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the tree.
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in the tree.
Click to highlight all occurrences of the search phrase in the tree.
<View tree>
Select a folder (or the root) from the view tree.
Find
Enter a template name or a portion of a name in the Find box to locate a
template in the tree.
Summary Page
This wizard page displays the details of the created views before saving.
Wizard map
The Template-based View Wizard contains:
"Select Template Page" > "Import Parameter Values Page" > "Enter
Parameters Page" > "Select Location for Views Page" > "Summary
Page" > "Save Views Page"
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Save view summary
A summary of the views created including the name of the base
template, the number of views created, and the location selected for
saving the views.
Save Views Page
This wizard page enables you to save the new views you created.
Important
Information
Page 322 of 446
This wizard page is only relevant when you are creating multiple
template-based views.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Wizard map
The Template-based View Wizard contains:
"Select Template Page" > "Import Parameter Values Page" > "Enter
Parameters Page" > "Select Location for Views Page" > "Summary
Page"> "Save Views Page"
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Save Results
A table displays the names of the new views and a message indicating
whether each view was saved successfully or not.
Template Parameter Values Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to edit the parameters of a template-based view.
To access
From within a template-based view in the Modeling Studio, right-click a query
node with parameters defined and select Show Node Parameters, or click the
Show Parameters button
in the toolbar.
Important
When you open the dialog box from the shortcut menu by right-clicking a query
information node with parameters defined, the dialog box only displays the parameters for the
selected query node. When you open the dialog box from the toolbar, it displays all
the parameters defined for any of the query nodes in the view.
See also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
<Parameters>
Edit the values of the parameters.
TQL Query Editor
This feature enables you to build and edit TQL queries.
To access
To open a new TQL query in the TQL Query Editor, go to the Modeling Studio,
click the New
button and select Query.
To open an existing TQL query in the TQL Query Editor, go to the Resources tab
of the left pane in the Modeling Studio and select Queries as the Resource type.
Right click a TQL query in the tree and select Open Query or double click a TQL
query or drag a TQL query onto the empty canvas. The TQL query opens in a new
tab.
Important
To save your TQL query, use the Save button in the Modeling Studio main toolbar.
information
Page 323 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
Relevant
tasks
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
See also
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click Show View Results in IT Universe to go directly to the selected view in
IT Universe Manager.
Note: This button only appears for views, templates, or perspectives.
Click Create Relationship to draw a relationship from one query node to
another.
Click Hide/Show Legend to toggle between hiding and displaying the topology
map legend.
Click Calculate Query Result Count to calculate the number of instances
found for each TQL query node or relationship.
Click Preview to display a preview of the TQL query results as they would
appear in IT Universe Manager.
Click Delete to delete the selected query node or relationship from the query.
For queries, opens the Query Definition Properties dialog box which enables
you to edit the type, scope, and priority of the TQL query.
For views, opens the View Definition Properties dialog box.
Report Properties. Opens the Report Properties dialog box, which enables
you to set the title and subtitle for the view's topology report.
Note: This button only appears for views, templates, or perspectives.
Opens the Template Parameter Values dialog box which enables you to edit
the parameters of a query node in a template-based view.
Note: This button only appears for template-based views.
Page 324 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
<Legend>
Indicates the icons displayed next to CIs with any of the following special
designations:
l
It is defined as a contact query node in a perspective
l
It is defined as the output query node of a pattern-based model
l
It has attributes defined
l
It has selected identities defined
l
It is hidden in the query results
l
It has a subgraph defined
l
It is a federated CI
<Main menu>
For details, see "Main Menu" on page 168.
<Shortcut
menu
options>
For details, see "Shortcut Menu Options" on page 40.
<Topology
Map Sidebar>
For details, see "Topology Map Sidebar" on page 178.
Advanced Pane
This area displays the properties, conditions, and cardinality for the selected query node and
relationship.
Important
The Advanced pane appears in the lower part of the window in the following
information managers and user interfaces: Modeling Studio, Impact Analysis Manager,
Enrichment Manager, the Input Query Editor and Trigger Query Editor in DFM.
A small green indicator
Relevant
tasks
appears next to the tabs that contain data.
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
User interface elements are described below:
Page 325 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI
Elements
(A-Z)
Description
If the window is not wide enough to display all the tabs, use the left and right
arrows to move to the required tab.
Click Show List to display a list of the available tabs for the current module. You
can select a tab from the list.
Attributes
Displays the attribute conditions defined for the query node or the relationship. For
details, see "Attribute Tab" on page 77.
Cardinality
Cardinality defines how many query nodes you expect to have at the other end of
a relationship. For example, in a relationship between a node and an IP Address, if
the cardinality is 1:3, the TQL query retrieves only those nodes that are connected
to between one and three IP Addresses. For details, see "Cardinality Tab" on
page 79.
Data
Sources
Displays the data sources set for the selected query node.
Details
Displays the following information:
Note: This tab appears only in the Modeling Studio.
l
CI Type/Element Type. The CIT of the selected query node/relationship.
l
Element Name. The name of the query node or relationship. This appears only
in the Modeling Studio.
l
Show in query results. A green check indicates that the selected query
node/relationship is visible in the topology map. A red mark indicates that it is
not visible. In the Modeling Studio, this is indicated by the word Yes or No.
l
Include subtypes. A green check indicates that both the selected CI and its
children are displayed in the topology map. A red mark indicates that only the
selected CI appears. This item does not appear in the Modeling Studio.
Edit
Click Edit to open the relevant dialog box for the selected tab.
Element
Layout
Displays the attributes selection for the selected query node or relationship. It lists
the attributes selected to be included in the query results (when Specific
Attributes is selected as the attributes condition). It also lists the excluded
attributes and any selected qualifiers for attributes. For details, see "Element
Layout Tab" on page 84.
Note: This tab appears only in the Modeling Studio.
Element
Type
Displays the subtype conditions defined for the query node or relationship. For
details, see "Element Type Tab" on page 82.
Note: This tab appears only in the Modeling Studio.
Page 326 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI
Elements
(A-Z)
Description
Enrichment Displays the Enrichment rule defined for the selected query node or relationship. If
Rules
the Enrichment rule is used to update the attributes of a CI, click Edit to open the
Query Node/Relationship Definition dialog box and edit the rule if required. For
details, see "Query Node/Relationship Definition Dialog Box" on page 427.
Note: This tab appears only in Enrichment Manager.
Impacted
Query
Nodes
Indicates which query node is impacted by the changes that occur in the selected
trigger query node. If required, you can click Edit to open and modify the Impacted
Query Nodes dialog box. For details, see "Impacted Query Nodes Dialog Box" on
page 366.
Note: This tab appears only in Impact Analysis Manager.
Qualifiers
Displays the qualifier conditions defined for the query node or the relationship. For
details, see "Qualifier Tab" on page 86.
Note: This tab appears only in Enrichment Manager and Impact Analysis
Manager.
Selected
Identities
Displays the element instances that are used to define what should be included in
the TQL query results. For details, see "Identity Tab" on page 88.
Views Containing Selected CI Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to display a list of the views containing the selected CI.
To access
See also
Click the Show views containing selected CI/model
button in the
Model Editor or select Show containing views from the shortcut menu.
"Best Practices for Modeling" on page 181
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click Show View Results in IT Universe to go directly to the selected view in IT
Universe Manager.
Click Delete Selected Item(s) to delete the selected view.
Click Disconnect view from perspective to disconnect the selected view from its
perspective. The view becomes a pattern view.
Find
Page 327 of 446
Enter a view name or a portion of a view name in the Find box to locate it in the list.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Find Next
Click to go to the next occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list.
Find
Previous
Click to go to the previous occurrence of the selected search phrase in the list.
Highlight
Click to highlight all occurrences of the search phrase in the list.
View
Name
Displays the list of views dependent on the selected template or perspective.
Note: The name of the current view appears in faded text.
Watchpoints Updates Dialog Box
This dialog box displays the changes found in related CIs by a watchpoint defined for a model.
To access
From within a model in the Model Editor, click the Watchpoint
button and
select Watchpoints Updates or right-click a CI in the model and select
Watchpoint > Watchpoints Updates.
Important
The Watchpoints Updates dialog box indicates any changes found involving the
information CIs related to the model via the associated reveal path. If a new related CI is
found which is not included in the model, the suggested update is an added CI. If a
CI in the model is found to no longer be related via the path, the suggested update
is a removed CI.
This option is only enabled when watchpoints are defined for the model and CIs
have been found.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z) Description
Accept
Select the check boxes for the CIs you want to add to your model or remove
from your model.
Accept All
Click Accept All to apply all the suggested changes to your model.
CI
The names of the CIs found by the watchpoint.
CI Type
The types of the CIs found by the watchpoint.
Clear All
Click Clear All to clear the check boxes for all the found CIs.
Restore
Select the check boxes for the CIs in the Suppressed CIs pane that you
want to consider for inclusion in your model.
Show/Hide
Suppressions
Toggle between hiding and displaying the Suppressed CIs pane of the dialog
box.
Page 328 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 9: Modeling Studio
UI Element (A-Z) Description
Suggested
Update
Indicates whether the suggested change is an added CI or a removed CI.
Suppress
Select the check boxes for the CIs you want to exclude from your model or
leave in your model.
Suppress All
Click Suppress All to decline all the suggested changes to your model.
<Query/Template/Perspective Name> Dependencies
Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to clarify the status of dependent views when saving changes to a
query, template, or perspective.
To access
In the Modeling Studio, make a change to a query, template, or perspective with
dependent views. When you click Save, the dialog box opens.
Important
Any change made to a resource affects the views based on that resource. Before
information the changes are saved, you need to specify the desired result on the dependent
views. For each dependent view, select one of the available options: Delete, ReApply, or Detach.
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Delete
Select this option to delete the selected dependent view.
Detach
Select this option to detach the selected dependent view from the template or
perspective. The view becomes a pattern view.
Note: This option is not relevant for queries.
Re-Apply
Select this option to apply the revised query, template, or perspective to the
selected dependent view. The view type remains the same as it was previously
(pattern view, template-based view, or perspective-based view).
Resource The dependent views are displayed in a tree format.
Page 329 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 10
Reports
This chapter includes:
Topology Reports Overview
331
Compare CIs
332
Compare Snapshots
333
Cron Expressions
334
Reports User Interface
335
Page 330 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
Topology Reports Overview
Topology reports provide a method of displaying the data from views in a report format. Every view
defined in the Modeling Studio has a corresponding topology report. The report settings are defined
in the view definition in Report mode in the Pattern View Editor. For details, see "Pattern View
Editor" on page 303.
For details on selecting the CIs to be displayed in a view, see "Working with the CI Selector" on
page 133.
Perspectives, perspective-based views and template-based views also have topology reports. The
reports settings for such views are based on the settings defined in the base template or
perspective.
Several additional reports are available in IT Universe Manager, including Asset Report, Compare
CIs Report, Compare Snapshots Report, and Impact Analysis Report.
Page 331 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
Compare CIs
This task explains how to compare the hierarchies of two compound CIs, view a CI's configuration
document, and show the difference between two configuration documents.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Select the Required CIs
In IT Universe Manager, select the two CIs you want to compare. The hierarchies of the two
compound CIs are compared in the Compare CIs report (for details, see "Compare CIs Report"
on page 336). You can choose to compare two CIs that appear in a selected view, or in the
RTSM. For details, see "CI Selector" on page 139.
Example of Nonmatching CIs:
In this example, the No Matching CI icon is displayed next to the CI
LABM3QCRNDDB03 because it has no corresponding CI on the other side.
The Show Different Attribute Values icon is displayed next to the MemorySize
properties for the CIs LABM3QCRNDDB02 and LABM3ASTDB01 since they have
different MemorySize values.
2.
View a CI's Configuration Document
Select a CI of the CIT Configuration Document and view the configuration document. For
details, see "Compare CIs Report" on page 336.
3.
Show the Difference Between Two Configuration Documents
Select two CIs of the CIT Configuration Document and view the difference between the two
configuration documents. For details, see "Compare CIs Report" on page 336.
Page 332 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
Compare Snapshots
This task describes how to take a snapshot of a view, and to compare two snapshots of a specific
view taken at different times.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Take a Snapshot of a View
a. Select a view in IT Universe Manager.
b. Click the Snapshot
button and select Save Snapshot to take a snapshot of the view
and save it. For details, see the "Save Snapshot Dialog Box" on page 242.
2.
Save Snapshots on a Periodic Basis
Optionally, you can schedule snapshots to be taken of a certain view at specific times by
defining a task. For details, see "Schedule Snapshot Dialog Box" on page 348.
3.
Compare Snapshots
Compare the snapshots of a view taken at different times. Select Modeling > Reports and
create a Compare Snapshots Report. For details, see "Compare Snapshots Report" on page
340
Example of Snapshots of a View Taken at Different Times:
In the following example, the Deleted Item icon next to the vmamqa278 CI in the left
pane, indicates that the CI has been deleted in the newer view.
Page 333 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
Cron Expressions
A Cron Expression is a string composed of six or seven fields separated by white space. Six of the
fields are mandatory, and one is optional.
The following table contains the fields used in a Cron Expression.
Field Name
Allowed Values
Allowed Special Characters
Seconds
0-59
,-*/
Minutes
0-59
,-*/
Hours
0-23
,-*/
Day of month
1-31
,-*?/LW C
Month
1-12 or JAN-DEC
,-*/
Day of week
1-7 or SUN-SAT
,-*?/LC #
Year (optional)
empty, 1970-2099
,-*/
The following table contains examples of how to use Cron expressions.
Cron
Expression
Meaning
0 0 12 * * ?
The task runs every day at 12:00 PM.
0 15 10 ? * *
The task runs at 10:15 AM every day.
0 15 10 * * ?
2011
The task runs at 10:15 AM every day during the year 2011.
0 0/5 14 * * ?
The task runs every 5 minutes starting at 2 PM and ending at 2:55 PM, every
day.
0 15 10 15 * ?
The task runs at 10:15 AM on the 15th day of every month.
0 15 10 ? * 6L
The task runs at 10:15 AM on the last Friday of every month.
0 15 10 ? * 6#3
The task run at 10:15 AM on the third Friday of every month.
Page 334 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
Reports User Interface
This section includes (in alphabetical order):
l
"Asset Report" below
l
"Compare CIs Report" on next page
l
"Compare Snapshots Report" on page 340
l
"Impact Analysis Report" on page 345
l
"Job List Dialog Box" on page 346
l
"Schedule Snapshot Dialog Box" on page 348
l
"Topology Report" on page 349
l
"Toolbar Options" on page 350
Asset Report
This report displays a list of all the CIs in a specified view, their attribute values, as well as their
child CIs in the RTSM. You use Asset reports to view and analyze the contents of the view and
focus on the data that is of interest to you. For example, an Asset report can display a list of all the
servers that are part of a specific application contained in the view.
To access
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe Manager
and click the Asset Report
button.
Important
The report only includes attributes that are marked with the Asset Data qualifier in
information the Attributes tab in the CI Type Manager. For more details, see "Add/Edit
Attribute Dialog Box" on page 385.
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
<Shortcut
menu>
Page 335 of 446
Description
For details, see "IT Universe Manager Shortcut Menu" on page 231.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
<Toolbar>
For details, see "Toolbar Options" on page 350.
Include
Select one of the following:
information
l CMDB. Includes information from the selected view as well as information
based on
about the child CIs and their attribute values in the RTSM.
In this option, the report includes CIs that are connected to the CIs in selected
view by relationships with the Container qualifier. For example, the report
includes the CPU and memory of a server that is contained in the view.
l
View
View. Includes only information about the CIs and their attributes that are
contained in the selected view.
Enables you to select a view by opening the View Selector. For details, see "CI
Selector" on page 139.
Note: When you generate an Asset report from a specific view, the report retains
the same hierarchical structure as the relevant view in the Topology Map.
Compare CIs Report
This report enables you to compare the hierarchies of two compound CIs. A compound CI is a CI
that is linked to another CI by a relationship with the CONTAINER qualifier. You can display the
compared CIs and their child CIs that appear in a selected view, or in the RTSM.
Page 336 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
To access
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe Manager.
Right-click a CI in the Topology Map and select Compare CIs Report.
Important
information
l
The Compare CIs page is divided into two panes. Each side displays a
hierarchical tree structure of the CIs you selected. When you select a CI on
one side, the corresponding CI on the other side is automatically selected,
provided Synchronize Selection is pressed.
l
You can compare only two CIs of the same CI type or one of the CI type's
children in the hierarchy.
l
The only format available for previewing and exporting the Compare CIs report
is the Excel format.
Page 337 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
Relevant
tasks
l
"Compare CIs" on page 332
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Finds the previous occurrence of an item marked as changed.
Finds the next occurrence of an item marked as changed.
Show Configuration Files Differences. Shows the difference between the
content of the two configuration files. Configuration files use the .xml, .txt or .ini
extensions.
Select a CI of the CIT Configuration File in both panes and click the Show
Differences button. A window opens displaying the differences (marked in blue) in
the configuration files.
Show Only Different CIs in Tree. In the <Properties panes>, displays only the
part of the tree structure containing CIs that do not match.
Show Only Different Attribute Values. In the <Properties panes>, toggles
between displaying all the comparable attribute values of the selected CI or only
the attribute values that are different.
Enables you to select a CI on one side and have its corresponding CI
automatically selected on the other side.
The default state for the Synchronize Selection button is selected. Deselecting
this button allows you to select different CIs from each of the two trees. This
enables you to compare two different CIs and see their different properties.
Contains An Updated Item. Indicates that a CI's attribute value has changed.
For example, a Contains an Updated Item icon is displayed next to the
IpAddress CI in the figure below since the attribute of its child CI 10.168.100.2
icon has changed.
Page 338 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
No Matching CI. Indicates that a CI in one pane does not match any
corresponding CI in the other pane.
The following example displays the No Matching CI icon next to the Windows
icon because it does not have a corresponding CI in the other pane.
Updated Item. Indicates that the attribute value of a CI has changed.
For example, the figure below shows that the CIs 10.0.0.2 and 16.59.124.1
display the Updated Item icon because they was updated with a new IP Network
Mask value, as indicated by the Show Only Different Attribute Values
icons (see the Name and Value columns in the bottom panes underneath the tree
structure).
Enables you to move to the next or previous result of the search for the string
entered in the Find field.
<Toolbar>
Page 339 of 446
For details, see "Toolbar Options" on page 350.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
UI Element
(A-Z)
<Shortcut
menu>
Description
For details, see "IT Universe Manager Shortcut Menu" on page 231.
<Properties Displays the attributes of the selected CI.
pane>
The Properties pane contains the following fields:
l
Name. Displays the attribute name for the selected CI, which was marked as
Comparable in the CI Type Manager.
l
Value. Displays the attribute value for the currently selected CI.
<Left and
right
panes>
Displays a tree of the compared CIs and their child CIs that appear in the selected
view or in the RTSM, depending on whether you selected the View or the CMDB
options.
Compare
in
Select one of the following:
l
CMDB. Includes the selected CIs and their child CIs that appear in the entire
RTSM.
l
View. Includes the selected CIs and their child CIs that appear only in a
specific view.
Compared
CI
Enables you to select the two CIs you want to compare. Click
to open the CIs
Selector dialog box. For details, see "CI Selector" on page 139. The CI you select
in the top box is displayed in the left pane and the CI you select in the bottom box
is displayed in the right pane.
Find
Find. Enter a search name or a portion of a search name in the Find field to locate
it in the list.
Mutual
View
If both of the CIs you are comparing exist within the same view, the name of the
view is displayed in this field. Otherwise, the field displays the words No mutual
view.
Compare Snapshots Report
This report enables you to compare two snapshots of a specific view taken at different times. It
enables you to visualize the differences between the views by comparing the statuses of the view
at the times the snapshots were taken.
Page 340 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
To access
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe Manager.
Click the Snapshot
Important
information
button and select Compare snapshots
l
You can compare a current snapshot to a previous snapshot or two snapshots
taken in the past.
l
You can define a schedule that takes snapshots of a specific view on a
periodic basis and saves them. For details, see "Schedule Snapshot Dialog
Box" on page 348.
l
The only format available for previewing and exporting the Compare Snapshots
report is the Excel format.
Relevant
tasks
l
"Compare Snapshots" on page 333
See also
l
"Save Snapshot Dialog Box" on page 242
l
"Schedule Snapshot Dialog Box" on page 348
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
Page 341 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Expands the entire hierarchical tree structure of the CIs you selected.
Collapses the hierarchical tree structure of the CIs you selected.
Finds the previous occurrence of an item marked as changed.
Finds the next occurrence of an item marked as changed.
Show Configuration Files Differences. Shows the difference between the
content of the two configuration files. Configuration files use the .xml, .txt or .ini
extensions.
Select a CI of the CIT Configuration File in both panes and click the Show
Differences button. A window opens displaying the differences (marked in blue) in
the configuration files.
Show Only Different CIs in Tree. In the <Properties panes>, displays only the
part of the tree structure containing CIs that do not match.
Show Only Different Attribute Values. In the <Properties panes>, toggles
between displaying all the attribute values of the selected CI or only the attribute
values that have changed.
Enables you to select a CI on one side and have its corresponding CI
automatically selected on the other side.
The default state for the Synchronize Selection button is selected. Deselecting
this button allows you to select different CIs from each of the two trees. This
enables you to compare two different CIs and see their different properties.
Page 342 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Contains An Updated Item. Indicates that a CI's attribute value has changed.
For example, a Contains an Updated Item icon is displayed next to the 10.0.0.0
CI in the figure below since the attribute of its child CI 10.168.100.3 icon has
changed.
Deleted Item. Indicates that a CI has been deleted from the view.
New Item. Indicates that a new CI has been added to the view.
Page 343 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Updated Item. Indicates that the attribute value of a CI has changed.
For example, the figure below shows that the CIs LABM3MAM16 displays the
Updated Item icon because it was updated with a new Version value, as
indicated by the Show Only Different Attribute Values
icons (see the
Name and Value columns in the bottom panes underneath the tree structure).
<Left and
right
panes>
Displays a hierarchical tree structure of all the CIs in the view for that snapshot
version. The left side always represents the older of the two versions.
<Properties Displays the attributes of the selected CI.
pane>
The Properties pane contains the following fields:
l
Name. Displays the name of the selected CI as defined in the CI's label.
l
Value. Displays the attribute value for the currently selected CI.
<Toolbar>
For details, see "Toolbar Options" on page 350.
Available
Snapshots
Displays the current status and previously saved snapshots of the view selected
in the View with Snapshots field. Select the two snapshots you want to
compare.
Note: Visible when the Show Report Parameters button is pressed.
View with
snapshots
Displays the name of the view whose snapshots you want to compare. Only
views for which snapshots have been taken are displayed.
Note: Visible when the Show Report Parameters button is pressed.
Page 344 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
Impact Analysis Report
This report displays a list of CIs that are impacted in the system as a result of simulated changes.
For details, see "Run Impact Analysis Dialog Box" on page 240.
To
access
In IT Universe Manager, click Generate Report from the Run Impact Analysis
dialog box.
See also
l
"Impact Analysis Manager" on page 354
l
"Run Impact Analysis Dialog Box" on page 240
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
<Toolbar>
For details, see "Toolbar Options" on page 350.
Rule Bundle
Enables you to select the rule group with which the Impact Analysis rule works.
Severity
Sets the severity level that we want to simulate for the triggered CIs.
Triggered
CIs
Select the CIs that represent the changes you want to make to the system.
Opens the CI Selector.
Affected Application Tab
This tab displays all the CIs that belong to a specific business application, which were affected by
the triggered CI severity change.
User interface elements are described below:
Page 345 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Display Label
The name of the CI or relationship as it appears in the topology map.
Trigger Severity
The severity selected in the Severity box.
Grouping by CIT Tab
This tab displays all the CIs related to the triggered CIs that are impacted in the system as a result
of the simulated changes, sorted by CI type.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Display Label
The name of the CI or relationship as it appears in the topology map.
Trigger Severity
The severity selected in the Severity box.
Triggered CIs Tab
This tab displays all the CIs that represent the changes you want to make to the system. The CIs in
this tab are the CIs selected in the Triggered CIs box.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Display Label
The name of the CI or relationship as it appears in the topology map.
Job List Dialog Box
This dialog box displays a list of the reports/snapshots that were scheduled to run in the "Schedule
Snapshot Dialog Box" on page 348.
To
access
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe Manager. Click
the Snapshots
button, and select Show Scheduled Snapshot Jobs.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Insert New Scheduled Report. Define a new job using the Schedule Report
dialog box.
Edit Job. Edit the selected job using the Schedule Report dialog box.
Create Copy. Enables you to create a copy of the selected job. Opens a new job
in the Schedule Report dialog box that uses the details of the selected job.
Page 346 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Remove Job. Deletes the selected job from the list of scheduled jobs.
Run Job Immediate. Runs the selected job.
Pause Job. Pauses the selected job. Enabled only if the job has a Pending
status.
Resume Job. Resumes the selected job.
Note: The Resume button is enabled only for jobs that have a Paused status.
Refreshes the list of scheduled jobs.
Clears the current filter.
Change visible columns. Enables you to select the columns to be displayed.
Current
Status
The current status of each scheduled job:
l
Running. The job is currently executing.
l
Pending. The job is waiting for the scheduling requirements to be fulfilled.
l
Completed. The job has finished executing.
l
Paused. The job has been paused.
Note. If a job has a Completed status, and you want to resume running the job,
you can either click Run Job Immediate or change the Next Execution Time to
the current time. If you change it to a future time, the status changes to Pending.
Description A description of the scheduled job as defined in the Schedule Report dialog box.
Execution
Status
The job's current execution status:
l
Success. The job completed successfully (denoted by the
l
Failure. The job failed to execute (denoted by the
l
None. The job has not yet been executed.
icon).
icon).
Last
Execution
Time
The last time the report ran.
Name
The name of the scheduled job as defined in the Schedule Report dialog box.
Next
Execution
Time
The next time the report is scheduled to run.
Time Zone
The time zone in which the job is scheduled to run.
Page 347 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
Schedule Snapshot Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define a schedule for taking snapshots of a specific view. You can
see the list of snapshots that have been scheduled to run in the "Job List Dialog Box" on page 346.
To access
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe Manager.
Click the Snapshots
Snapshot.
Relevant
tasks
button in the CI Selector, and select Schedule
l
"Compare CIs" on page 332
l
"Compare Snapshots" on page 333
The following elements are included:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Click to validate the Cron expression you entered in the Cron
Expression box.
(Appears only when you select Day of Month.) Clears the selected
dates in the calendar.
Cron Expression
Enter a Cron expression to schedule a job. For a description of the fields
used in Cron expressions and examples of how to use them, see "Cron
Expressions" on page 334.
Description
A description of the scheduled job.
Ends
Select one of the following options:
l
Never. Do not specify an end date.
l
Until. Choose the date and time by which you want the action to stop
running.
Note: This element is not relevant if you define a report to run only once.
Locale
Select the language for the report.
Name
The name of the scheduled job.
Page 348 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Repeat
Select one of the following actions:
Repeat every
l
Once. Activates a job only once.
l
Interval. Runs a job on the basis of a fixed interval. You can select
an interval of minutes, hours, days, or weeks.
l
Day of Month. Runs a job every month on the selected dates.
l
Weekly. Runs a job on a weekly basis. Select the day or days on
which you want the action to run.
l
Monthly. Runs a job on a monthly basis. Select the month or months
in which you want the job to run.
l
Yearly. Runs a job on a yearly basis.
l
Cron. Use a Cron expression to schedule a job. For a description of
the fields used in Cron expressions and examples of how to use
them, see, "Cron Expressions" on page 334.
(Appears only when you select Interval or Yearly.) Select a value for
the interval between successive runs.
For example, if you select Yearly and then 2, the job runs every second
year.
Repeat on
(Appears only when you select Day of Month, Weekly, or Monthly.)
Select the days or dates on which to run the job.
For example, if you select Monthly and then January and July, the job
runs on the specified date and time in January and July.
Server Time
The exact server time according to the client's time zone.
Starts
Choose the time and date when you want the job to begin running.
Time Zone
Set the required time zone.
Topology Report
This report displays the topology of a view in report format.
To access
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > IT Universe Manager
and click the View Based Report button.
Important
information
Every view can be displayed in report format. You define the settings for the
report in the Report tab of the view in Modeling Studio.
Templates can be opened in Reports also. You can edit the template parameters
and save the instance as a view.
User interface elements are described below:
Page 349 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
UI
Element
(A-Z)
<Bar
graph/Pie
chart>
Description
Each segment of the pie chart/column in a bar graph represents a CI on the
selected level of the view.
Click a slice/bar to drill down to the next level, if one exists. You can also display
the information in table format.
When you hold the mouse over the relevant segment/bar, a tooltip indicates the
number of instances found for that CIT, the percentage of the pie it represents
(when viewing the information in pie chart format), and the CIT or CIT attribute the
slice/bar represents.
<Toolbar> For details, see "Toolbar Options" below.
Reset
Resets the template parameters to their original values.
Note: Only relevant for templates.
Save As
View
Click to save the instance as a template-based view with the selected parameter
values.
Note: Only relevant for templates.
Toolbar Options
This section describes the toolbar options for reports.
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Displays the parameters that are defined for the report.
Save Report. Saves the selected report.
Report Properties. Opens the Report Properties dialog box, which enables
you to set the report title and subtitle.
Schedule Report. Opens the Schedule Report dialog box, which enables
you to define a job that:
l
Schedules the generation of a report
l
Specifies one or more formats in which to send the report, and the report's
recipients
l
Specifies the recurrence of the job
For more information on the Schedule Report dialog box, see, "Schedule
Snapshot Dialog Box" on page 348.
Note: This option is only available before you generate a report or when you
open a saved report.
Page 350 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Show Scheduled Report Jobs. Opens the Job List dialog box. For details,
see "Job List Dialog Box" on page 346.
Send Mail. Opens the Send Mail dialog box. You can send an email
containing the generated report in various formats, or as a direct link. For
details on the various formats, see "Toolbar Options" on previous page.
Select one or more of the available formats for the generated report to be sent
as attachments to an email recipient.
Note: Required fields are marked with an asterisk.
Archive Report. Enables you to save the report results in the database.
After the report is archived, a
button appears next to the report name.
Note: Enabled only for Topology and Gold Master reports.
Generate Direct Link. Creates a direct link to the specific location on the
server of the selected report, or to the data that you have exported as a
specific format.
Export Report.
Enables you to select the format for previewing and exporting the report. The
available options are:
l
CSV. The report data is formatted as a comma-separated values (CSV)
text file that can be displayed in a spreadsheet.
Note: For the CSV formatted table data to display correctly, the comma (,)
must be defined as the list separator. In Windows, to verify or modify the
list separator value, open Regional Options from the Control Panel, and on
the Numbers tab ensure that the comma is defined as the List Separator
value. In Linux, you can specify the list separator in the application that
opens the CSV file.
l
PDF. The report data is exported in PDF format.
Note: When exporting to PDF, select a reasonable number of columns to
display to ensure that the report is legible.
l
XLS. The report data is formatted as an .xls (Excel) file that can be
displayed in a spreadsheet.
l
XML. The report data is formatted as an XML file that can be opened in a
text or XML editor.
Tip: To extract HTML code from the report:
Page 351 of 446
n
Open the file in an HTML editor
n
Copy the relevant table into the target file
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Bar Chart. Displays the generated report as a bar chart.
Pie Chart. Displays the generated report as a pie chart.
Table. Displays the generated report in tabular format.
Show Short Labels. Toggles between displaying the chart labels
minimal/maximum information.
Note: This option is available only for pie charts.
Show Legend. Toggles between hiding and displaying the chart's legend.
Note: This option is available only for pie charts.
Slice chart. Toggles between displaying the pie chart with exploded and
unexploded segments.
Note: This option is available only for pie charts.
Expand All. Expands the tree structure.
Collapse All. Collapses the tree structure.
Delete from CMDB. Deletes the selected CI from the CMDB.
Opens the Configuration Item Properties dialog box for the selected CI.
Refresh. Refreshes the report tree.
Select Columns. Select the columns you want to display in the report. For
details, see "Select Columns Dialog Box" on page 443.
Sort Column Content. Enables you to set the sort order of the selected
column's content.
Find. Toggles between displaying and hiding the Find utility.
Find the next occurrence of the phrase/Find the previous occurrence
of the phrase. Enables you to move to the next or previous result of the
search for the string entered in the Find field.
Highlights all occurrences of the phrase. Highlights all occurrences in the
CI tree of the string entered in the Find field.
Generate Report. Enables you to generate the selected report.
Note: This button appears disabled prior to defining the report parameters.
Page 352 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 10: Reports
UI Element (AZ)
Description
<breadcrumbs> Displays the levels through which you have navigated to get to the current
level. Appears horizontally across the top of the chart.
Note: Each level in the list of breadcrumbs is a clickable link.
<Generated
report>
Displays the active generated report.
Find
Enter a search name or a portion of a search name in the Find field to locate it
in the list.
Page 353 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 11
Impact Analysis Manager
This chapter includes:
Impact Analysis Manager Overview
355
Define an Impact Rule – Workflow
356
Impact Analysis Manager User Interface
359
Page 354 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
Impact Analysis Manager Overview
Impact Analysis Manager enables you to define the interdependencies between components in
your IT infrastructure to simulate how infrastructure changes (for example, a new software
installation or upgrade) can impact your system.
By creating Impact rules based on TQL queries, you can determine the true origin of a problem and
its business impact. Each Impact rule you define is attached to a specific Impact Analysis TQL
query. For more information about TQL queries, see "Topology Query Language" on page 17.
You define Impact rules to specify a causal relationship between two or more Impact Analysis
query nodes. Define one query node as the trigger, or the query node that represents the changes
you want to make to the system, and another query node as the one that is impacted. After the
causal relationship is established, Impact Analysis Manager enables you to determine the effect of
the changes occurring in root cause query nodes.
You then run the Impact rules in IT Universe Manager to simulate how the changes impact your
system and discover the root causes of the changes (for details, see "Run Impact Analysis Dialog
Box" on page 240). This enables you to evaluate and handle accordingly, the possible implications
of any action, update, new deployment, or a failure of the service delivery.
A simulated change in an impacted CI can alter the CI's map status, which is manifested through
an addition of a status icon to the CI's symbol. The Topology Map displays the statuses of the
trigger CIs as well as all statuses of the CIs that are impacted by it. Each color represents a
different status.
For details about the status icons and the colors that represent them, see "Show Impact Pane" on
page 243.
You can then generate a report displaying the following:
l
CIs in the system that are impacted by the changes.
l
Trigger CIs (the CIs that represent the changes you want to make to the system).
l
CIs that belong to a specific business service.
Page 355 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
Define an Impact Rule – Workflow
This section describes how to define an Impact rule whereby a change in CPU operation impacts
the node to which it is connected.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Create an Impact Analysis TQL Query
To create an Impact Analysis TQL query, you need to create an Impact Analysis TQL and then
add the TQL query nodes and relationships that define the query.
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > Impact Analysis Manager to open
the Impact Analysis Manager. For details about how to create an Impact Analysis TQL query,
see "New Impact Rule/Impact Rule Properties/Save As Impact Rule Wizard" on page 367. For
details about how to add query nodes and relationships to a query, see "Add Query Nodes and
Relationships to a TQL Query" on page 32.
Example of an Impact Analysis TQL Query:
In this Impact Analysis TQL query, a CPU and a node are linked by a Composition
relationship. The TQL query results must comply with the direction of the arrows.
Note: An Impact Analysis TQL query is subject to certain validation restrictions. For
details, see "Troubleshooting and Limitations" on page 96.
2.
Define an Impact Rule
When you define an Impact rule, you must specify the required causal relationship between the
query nodes. Define one query node as the trigger, or the query node that represents the
changes you want to make to the system, and another query node as the one that is impacted.
Right-click the query node you want to define as the trigger query node and select Define
Impacted to open the Impacted Query Nodes dialog box. Select the query node you want the
trigger query node to impact. Then click the Add button to open the Impact Rules Definition
dialog box to set conditions for defining impacted query nodes. For details about how to define
an Impact rule, see "Impact Rules Definition Dialog Box" on page 366.
Note: The change state option in the Impact rule definition is no longer relevant for Impact
Analysis. The only supported state is operation.
Page 356 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
Example of an Impact Rule:
The Conditions area in the Impact Rules Definition dialog box defines the conditions under
which the simulated change in the system is triggered. The Severity area defines the
severity of the impact on the impacted query node.
The Impact rule in this example states that when the CPU operation is not in the normal
state, the node is impacted. Since the severity is set to 100% of the trigger's severity, the
severity of the node is the same as the severity of the CPU, which is determined when
Impact Analysis is run.
In the resulting TQL query, an upward arrow appears next to the query node defined as the
trigger query node and a downward arrow appears next to the query node defined as the
impacted query node.
Page 357 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
Note: To retrieve the Impact Analysis results, you must run the Impact rule in IT Universe
Manager. For details, see "Retrieve Impact Analysis Results – Scenario" on page 208.
Page 358 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
Impact Analysis Manager User Interface
This section includes (in alphabetical order):
l
"Details Dialog Box" below
l
"Impact Analysis Manager Page" below
l
"Impacted Query Nodes Dialog Box" on page 366
l
"Impact Rules Definition Dialog Box" on page 366
l
"New Impact Rule/Impact Rule Properties/Save As Impact Rule Wizard" on page 367
Details Dialog Box
This dialog box displays the new Impact rule you created in the Impact Rules Definition dialog box.
To access
In the Impact Analysis Manager, click Next in the Impacted Query Nodes dialog
box.
Relevant
tasks
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Description
The description of the new Impact rule.
State
The category you chose from the State list in the Impact Rules Definition
dialog box.
Impact Analysis Manager Page
This page enables you to define Impact rules.
To access
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > Impact Analysis
Manager.
Important
When selecting query nodes to function as Impact Analysis triggers, they must
information comply with certain restrictions. For details, see "Troubleshooting and
Limitations" on page 96.
Relevant
tasks
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
See also
"Impact Analysis Manager Overview" on page 355
Impact Rules Pane
This area displays a hierarchical tree structure of predefined folders and Impact rules. Each Impact
Page 359 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
rule is associated with a TQL query.
Important
You can create your own Impact rules, or work with the default rules provided with
information your BSM installation.
The predefined folders are provided for the default Impact rules; you can modify
these folders, or add additional folders according to your organization's
requirements.
You can drag and drop Impact rules or folders to move them from one folder to
another.
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Create a new folder.
Creates an Impact rule. Opens the New Impact Rule Wizard.
Deletes the selected folder or Impact rule.
Refreshes the data content of the hierarchical tree structure that may have been
modified by other users.
(Enabled only when a new Impact rule is created or when changes are made to an
existing one.) Saves the Impact rule to the RTSM.
Opens the Impact Rule Properties Wizard. Enables you to change the description
of the rule.
Generates a preview of the results of the selected Impact rule.
Exports an Impact rule to an XML file.
Imports XML files that contain saved Impact rules to the Impact Analysis
Manager.
Represents a folder.
Represents an Impact rule.
<Impact
Rules tree>
Displays the existing Impact rules in tree format.
Note: Only Impact rules appear in the tree. TQL queries of type Impact Analysis
(created in the Modeling Studio) do not appear.
The following elements are available by right-clicking a folder or Impact rule:
Page 360 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Delete
Delete the selected folder or Impact rule.
Export To
XML
Displays a standard Save As dialog box, enabling you to save the Impact rule as an
XML script. This option can be used to move an Impact rule from one workstation to
another, provided the related TQL query is also relocated.
Import
From
XML
Imports XML files that contain saved Impact rules to Impact Analysis Manager.
New
Creates an Impact rule. Opens the New Impact Rule Wizard.
New
Folder
Creates a new folder.
Preview
Generates a preview of the results of the selected Impact rule.
Properties Opens the Impact Rule Properties Wizard. Enables you to change the description
of the rule.
Rename
Folder
Rename the folder.
Save
(Enabled only when a new Impact rule is created or when changes are made to an
existing one.) Saves the Impact rule to the RTSM.
Save As
Displays the Save As Impact Rule Wizard, enabling you to create new Impact rules
based on an existing query.
Editing Pane
This area displays the selected Impact rule, which consists of query nodes that are defined in the
TQL query and the relationships between them.
Important
information
l
When you select a folder in the Impact Rules pane, the editing pane is empty.
l
When you select an Impact rule in the Impact Rules pane, the editing pane
displays the selected rule, which consists of TQL query nodes that are defined
in the TQL query and the relationships between them.
Relevant
tasks
"Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL Query" on page 32
See also
When selecting query nodes to function as Impact Analysis triggers, they must
comply with certain restrictions. For details, see "Troubleshooting and
Limitations" on page 96.
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
Page 361 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Indicates a trigger query node. Located to the right of the trigger query node's
icon.
Indicates an impacted query node. Located to the right of the impacted query
node's icon.
Indicates query nodes that are both impacted and trigger query nodes.
<Main Menu>
For details, see "Main Menu" on page 168.
<Query Node>
A component from which TQL queries are built.
<Relationship> The entity that defines the relationship between two query nodes.
<Shortcut
menu options>
For details, see "Shortcut Menu Options" on page 40.
<Toolbar>
For details, see "Toolbar Options" on page 171.
<Tooltip>
Hold the cursor over a query node or relationship to view its tooltip.
The tooltips contain the following information:
l
Element name. The name of the query node.
l
CI Type. The CIT of the query node as defined in the CI Type Manager.
For details, see "CI Type Manager" on page 371.
l
Definitions of the selected query nodes and relationships. The
attribute conditions, as described in "Query Node/Relationship Properties
Dialog Box" on page 76.
l
Names of the trigger and the impacted query nodes. This is only
relevant if the query node over which the cursor is hovering is the trigger
query node.
CI Type Selector
This area displays a hierarchical tree structure of the CI Types found in the RTSM.
Important
The CI Type Selector is part of Enrichment Manager, Impact Analysis Manager,
information and Trigger TQL Editor.
To create or modify a TQL query, click and drag query nodes to the Editing pane
and define the relationship between them. Your changes are saved to the RTSM.
For details, see "Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL Query" on page
32.
Note: The number of instances of each CIT in the RTSM is displayed to the right
of each CIT.
Page 362 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
Relevant
tasks
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Elements (A-Z) Description
Click Add CI Type to Map to move the selected CI type to the Editing
pane.
Click Refresh to refresh the CI type tree.
Click Search to search for the CI type entered.
Click Expand All to expand all subtrees within the CI type tree.
Click Collapse All to collapse the subtrees within the CI type tree.
<Search
window>
Enter the name or part of a name of a CI type for which to search.
Shortcut Menu Options
The CI Type Selector includes the following elements (listed alphabetically) available by rightclicking a CI Type:
Menu Item
Description
Add CI Type
to Map
Select to add the selected CI type to the Editing pane.
Go to CI
Type
Definition
Takes you directly to the selected CI type in CIT Manager.
Show CIT
Instances
Opens the CIT Instances window, which displays all instances of the selected
CIT. For details, see "Element Instances Dialog Box" on page 70.
Advanced Pane
This area displays the properties, conditions, and cardinality for the selected query node and
relationship.
Page 363 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
Important
The Advanced pane appears in the lower part of the window in the following
information managers and user interfaces: Modeling Studio, Impact Analysis Manager,
Enrichment Manager, the Input Query Editor and Trigger Query Editor in DFM.
A small green indicator
Relevant
tasks
appears next to the tabs that contain data.
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Elements
(A-Z)
Description
If the window is not wide enough to display all the tabs, use the left and right
arrows to move to the required tab.
Click Show List to display a list of the available tabs for the current module. You
can select a tab from the list.
Attributes
Displays the attribute conditions defined for the query node or the relationship. For
details, see "Attribute Tab" on page 77.
Cardinality
Cardinality defines how many query nodes you expect to have at the other end of
a relationship. For example, in a relationship between a node and an IP Address, if
the cardinality is 1:3, the TQL query retrieves only those nodes that are connected
to between one and three IP Addresses. For details, see "Cardinality Tab" on
page 79.
Data
Sources
Displays the data sources set for the selected query node.
Page 364 of 446
Note: This tab appears only in the Modeling Studio.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
UI
Elements
(A-Z)
Description
Details
Displays the following information:
l
CI Type/Element Type. The CIT of the selected query node/relationship.
l
Element Name. The name of the query node or relationship. This appears only
in the Modeling Studio.
l
Show in query results. A green check indicates that the selected query
node/relationship is visible in the topology map. A red mark indicates that it is
not visible. In the Modeling Studio, this is indicated by the word Yes or No.
l
Include subtypes. A green check indicates that both the selected CI and its
children are displayed in the topology map. A red mark indicates that only the
selected CI appears. This item does not appear in the Modeling Studio.
Edit
Click Edit to open the relevant dialog box for the selected tab.
Element
Layout
Displays the attributes selection for the selected query node or relationship. It lists
the attributes selected to be included in the query results (when Specific
Attributes is selected as the attributes condition). It also lists the excluded
attributes and any selected qualifiers for attributes. For details, see "Element
Layout Tab" on page 84.
Note: This tab appears only in the Modeling Studio.
Element
Type
Displays the subtype conditions defined for the query node or relationship. For
details, see "Element Type Tab" on page 82.
Note: This tab appears only in the Modeling Studio.
Enrichment Displays the Enrichment rule defined for the selected query node or relationship. If
Rules
the Enrichment rule is used to update the attributes of a CI, click Edit to open the
Query Node/Relationship Definition dialog box and edit the rule if required. For
details, see "Query Node/Relationship Definition Dialog Box" on page 427.
Note: This tab appears only in Enrichment Manager.
Impacted
Query
Nodes
Indicates which query node is impacted by the changes that occur in the selected
trigger query node. If required, you can click Edit to open and modify the Impacted
Query Nodes dialog box. For details, see "Impacted Query Nodes Dialog Box" on
next page.
Note: This tab appears only in Impact Analysis Manager.
Qualifiers
Displays the qualifier conditions defined for the query node or the relationship. For
details, see "Qualifier Tab" on page 86.
Note: This tab appears only in Enrichment Manager and Impact Analysis
Manager.
Selected
Identities
Page 365 of 446
Displays the element instances that are used to define what should be included in
the TQL query results. For details, see "Identity Tab" on page 88.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
Impacted Query Nodes Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define which query node in the TQL query is the trigger Impact
Analysis query node and which query nodes are impacted by the changes that occurred in the
system.
To access
Right-click the query node or relationship that functions as a trigger and select
Define Impacted. The Impacted Query Nodes dialog box opens to display the
query nodes in the TQL query.
Important
Before creating the TQL query, you must know which query node in the query is
information the trigger Impact Analysis query node and which are impacted by the changes
beforehand. The definition is performed here.
Relevant
tasks
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
User interface elements are described below :
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Impacted Query Contains a list of the Impact Analysis query nodes in the Impact rule. Select
Nodes pane
the query nodes to be impacted by the trigger query node.
Impact Rules Definition Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to set conditions for defining impacted query nodes, define the scope of
the trigger conditions, and define the severity of the impact.
To access
In the Impact Analysis Manager, click Add in the Details dialog box.
Important
information
l
In the Conditions area, set conditions for defining impacted query nodes. When
this condition is met, the simulated change in the system is triggered.
For example, you can define an Impact Analysis condition that states that the
operational state of the query node is other than Normal. When the operational
state of the query node instance changes and is no longer Normal, the
condition is met and the simulated changes in the system are triggered.
l
In the Scope area, define how many instances of the trigger query node should
fulfill the conditions for triggering the changes in the system.
You can apply the trigger conditions to a single instance of a trigger query
node, to a certain percentage of the trigger instances, or to all of them.
For example, you can define that impact is calculated when at least 10% of the
system’s nodes are down.
l
Relevant
tasks
Page 366 of 446
In the Severity area, define the severity of the Impact Analysis impact.
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
User interface elements are described below :
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
All
All instances should fulfill the conditions.
Any
One instance or more should fulfill the conditions.
Description
A description of the Impact rule you are defining.
Fixed
severity
Define a fixed severity level for every system change generated. Then, select the
required severity level from the list.
Function
Select Function (displayed when you selected the All and Range options in the
Scope area) to define a severity level for the system changes, as a function of the
severity levels of all the trigger query node instances that are included in the
range. From the list, select either Average or Max.
For example, if you select Average, the severity level of the system changes is
the average severity of all the trigger instances.
Operator
Select the required operator. For a list of the operators you can use for defining an
attribute condition, see "Attribute Operator Definitions" on page 44
Range
A certain percentage of all instances should fulfill the conditions. For example, if
you enter a range of 50% to 100%, the changes are triggered when 50% or more
of the instances meet the conditions.
Severity
relative to
trigger
severity (%)
Select Severity relative to trigger severity (%) (displayed when you selected
the Any option in the Scope area) to define a severity level for each system
change that is relative (as a percentage) to the severity of the trigger event.
State
Choose the required state. The states that appear in the list are the states that are
defined in the State Manager. For details, see "State Manager" in the RTSM
Administration Guide.
Enter the percentage in the box provided.
Value
Select the required attribute.
comparison
New Impact Rule/Impact Rule Properties/Save As Impact
Rule Wizard
This wizard enables you to create or modify an Impact rule.
Page 367 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
To access
l
To create an Impact rule, right-click anywhere in the Impact Rules pane and
click New or click the New
Important
information
button.
l
To modify an Impact rule, right-click an Impact rule in the Impact Rules pane
and select Properties.
l
To create a new Impact rule based on an existing query, right-click an Impact
rule in the Impact Rules pane and select Save As.
l
Any major change made to the TQL query after creating an Impact rule causes
the system to delete the rule. These changes include deleting a root cause or
impacted query node or changing the Min and Max relationship definitions. For
details, see "Cardinality Tab" on page 79.
l
Minor changes, such as adding a query node to the TQL query, do not cause
the deletion of the rule.
l
The Impact Analysis TQL query that serves as the basis of the Impact rule, is
subject to certain validation restrictions. For details, see "Troubleshooting and
Limitations" on page 96. If the TQL query is not valid, it cannot be used for the
creation of an Impact rule.
Relevant
tasks
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356.
Wizard
Map
The "New Impact Rule/Impact Rule Properties/Save As Impact Rule Wizard"
contains:
"Impact Rule General Attributes Page" below > "Impact Rule Base Query Page"
on next page > "Impact Rule Groups Page" on page 370
Impact Rule General Attributes Page
This wizard page enables you to enter a unique name and description for the Impact rule.
Important
information
Wizard
map
l
The Impact Analysis TQL query that serves as the basis of the Impact rule, is
subject to certain validation restrictions. For details, see "Troubleshooting and
Limitations" on page 96. If the TQL query is not valid, it cannot be used for the
creation of an Impact rule.
l
For important information on the effects of making changes to the TQL query
after creating it, see "New Impact Rule/Impact Rule Properties/Save As
Impact Rule Wizard" on previous page.
l
By default, this wizard is set to display a Welcome page. You can choose not
to display the Welcome page by changing the user preferences. For details,
see "User Preferences Dialog Box" on page 94.
The "New Impact Rule/Impact Rule Properties/Save As Impact Rule Wizard" on
previous page contains:
"Impact Rule General Attributes Page" > "Impact Rule Base Query Page"
>"Impact Rule Groups Page"
See also
Page 368 of 446
"IT Universe Manager" on page 191
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Rule
(Optional) Enter a description of the Impact rule.
Description
Rule Name
Enter a unique name for the Impact rule.
The rule name cannot contain any of the following characters: \ / : " < > | % ?. The
final character cannot be a blank space.
Note: If the Impact rule name is either empty, contains a name used by another
Impact rule, or uses invalid characters, the Next and Finish buttons are disabled.
Impact Rule Base Query Page
This wizard page enables you to define the properties of the TQL query on which the Impact rule is
based. You can use an existing query or create a new query.
Important
information
Wizard
map
l
The Impact Analysis TQL query that serves as the basis of the Impact rule is
subject to certain validation restrictions. For details, see "Troubleshooting and
Limitations" on page 96. If the TQL query is not valid, it cannot be used for the
creation of an Impact rule.
l
For important information on the effects of making changes to the TQL query
after creating it, see "New Impact Rule/Impact Rule Properties/Save As
Impact Rule Wizard" on page 367.
The "New Impact Rule/Impact Rule Properties/Save As Impact Rule Wizard"
contains:
"Impact Rule General Attributes Page" > "Impact Rule Base Query Page" >
"Impact Rule Groups Page"
See also
"IT Universe Manager" on page 191
User interface elements are described below :
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Base the Impact rule
on a new query
Select this check box if you want to base the Impact rule on a new TQL
query. The query results are based on the attributes defined for the new
TQL query.
Base the Impact rule
on an existing query
Select this check box if you want to base the Impact rule on an existing
TQL query. Select the required Impact Analysis TQL query from the
drop-down list.
Base Query
Description
(Optional) Enter a description of the TQL query.
Page 369 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 11: Impact Analysis Manager
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Base Query Name
Enter a unique name for the Impact Analysis TQL query.
If you selected the Base the Impact rule on an existing TQL option,
select the Impact Analysis TQL query on which you want to base the
rule.
Base Query Priority
There is no need to make a selection here since all TQL queries of the
type Impact Analysis are automatically set to inactive.
Save a new query
based on the current
definition
Select to save a new TQL query based on your Impact rule definition.
Note: This field only appears in the Save As Impact Rule wizard.
Impact Rule Groups Page
This wizard page enables you to define where you can run Impact rules.
Important
information
l
The Impact Analysis TQL query that serves as the basis of the Impact rule, is
subject to certain validation restrictions. For details, see "Troubleshooting and
Limitations" on page 96. If the TQL query is not valid, it cannot be used for the
creation of an Impact rule.
l
For important information on the effects of making changes to the TQL query
after creating it, see "New Impact Rule/Impact Rule Properties/Save As
Impact Rule Wizard" on page 367.
l
By default, this wizard is set to display a Completion page after clicking Next
in this page. You can choose not to display the Completion page by changing
the user preferences. For details, see "User Preferences Dialog Box" on page
94.
Wizard
map
The "Impact Rule Groups Page" contains:
See also
"IT Universe Manager" on page 191
"Impact Rule General Attributes Page" > "Impact Rule Base Query Page" >
"Impact Rule Groups Page"
User interface elements are described below :
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
UCMDB
Page 370 of 446
Enables you to run an Impact rule in IT Universe Manager. For details, see "IT
Universe Manager Overview" on page 192.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 12
CI Type Manager
This chapter includes:
CI Types Overview
372
CI Type Attributes
373
CI Type Relationships
375
Deprecated CI Types
376
System Type Manager
377
Create a CI Type
378
Create a Relationship Type
379
Create a Calculated Relationship Type
380
Create List and Enumeration Definitions
381
Create an Enumeration Definition – Workflow
382
View Descriptions for CI Types and Relationships
384
CI Type Manager User Interface
385
Note to HP Software-as-a-Service customers: The data in CI Type Manager can be
viewed but not edited.
Page 371 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
CI Types Overview
A configuration item (CI) can represent hardware, software, services, business processes, or any
component of your IT infrastructure. CIs with similar properties are grouped under a CI type (CIT).
Each CIT provides a template for creating a CI and its associated properties.
Every CI must belong to a CI type. The following are the main categories of CITs:
l
Business Element. CITs that correspond to the logical elements of your business, such as
processes and organizational groups.
l
IT Process Record. CITs that correspond to changes that occur in your IT infrastructure.
l
Monitor. CITs that handle incoming metrics collected from your business universe.
l
Location. CITs that correspond to the location of devices and business organizations or people
supporting a function.
l
Party. CITs that correspond to an active entity such as a person or organization.
l
CI Collection. A logical collection of CIs.
l
Infrastructure Element. CITs that correspond to the physical elements (hardware and
software) installed in your business environment.
The CITs are arranged in a tree structure under these categories in the CI Types pane. You can
browse the CI Type model by expanding the tree in the CI Types pane. The CIT selected in the left
pane is displayed in the topology map along with all the potential valid relationships to other CITs.
You can also define new CITs to match your business needs. For details on defining new CITs, see
"Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship Wizard" on page 391.
Page 372 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
CI Type Attributes
Every CI type has attributes which define it such as name, description, and default value. The CITs
grouped under other CITs in the CI Type tree inherit attributes from the higher-level CITs.
When you define a new CI type, you first select a Base Configuration Item Type from a list of
existing CITs. Your new CIT inherits the attributes of the existing CIT. You can then set the
attributes for the new CIT. You edit the attributes of an existing CIT by selecting a CIT from the tree
in the CI Types pane and selecting the Attributes tab of the topology map. For details on CIT
attributes, see "Attributes Page" on page 393.
This section includes the following topics:
l
"CI Type Identification Methods" below
l
"CI Type Naming" below
CI Type Identification Methods
Every CI created is given an automatically generated global ID, which is used to identify different
instances of the same CI type. You can also select additional identification methods as described
in "Details Page" on page 392.
If you select the Simple identification option, you can designate one or more of the CIT's
attributes as key attributes, which are used as identifiers of the CIT. When you define an instance
of a CIT, the CIT's key attributes are mandatory fields for CIs of that type. You can assign as many
key attributes as you want to a given CIT. If you do not assign a key attribute when defining a new
CIT or changing the identification method of an existing CIT to Simple Identification, you must
select the ABSTRACT_CLASS qualifier on the Qualifier page of the wizard.
You can change or remove the key attributes of an existing CIT if the key attribute values for all
instances of that CIT are unique. Similarly, you can change the identification method to
Simple Identification only if the key attribute values for all instances of that CIT are unique. If the
selected changes result in multiple instances of a CIT with identical key attribute values, an error
message indicates that the action is not permitted, as the CIT instances would be merged.
If you select other identification methods, you cannot define key attributes for the CIT, but it retains
the key attributes of its parent CIT. These key attributes are mandatory fields for CIs of that type
and they cannot be removed. For those identification methods, there are no restrictions on the
qualifiers selected.
CI Type Naming
Entity names in BSM for RTSM-based applications follow the conventions described below:
l
CIT attributes values. All primitive types are supported: long, double, float, string, and so on.
l
CIT attributes values-type string. All special characters are supported. The maximum length
is 4000 characters.
l
CIT name. Only the following characters are permitted: a-z, A-Z, 0-9 and underscore (_). Note
also:
n
The first character must not be a number.
n
The name field is case sensitive, but you cannot use the same name with different cases for
Page 373 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
different CITs.
n
l
l
The maximum length is 200 characters.
CIT attribute name. Only the following characters are permitted: a-z, A-Z, 0-9 and underscore
(_). Note also:
n
The first character may be a number.
n
The attribute name field is not case sensitive.
n
The maximum length is 200 characters.
CIT attribute length. The total length of all the attribute values in one CIT cannot exceed 8K
bytes due to a Microsoft SQL Server limitation.
Page 374 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
CI Type Relationships
The same attributes defined for CITs are also defined for relationships. You can also assign key
attributes for relationships but it is not required. For details on defining new relationship types, see
"Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship Wizard" on page 391.
Page 375 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
Deprecated CI Types
CITs and relationships that are scheduled to be removed in a subsequent product version are
known as deprecated CITs. Such CITs appear in the user interface in strikethrough font. You can
hold the pointer over a deprecated CIT to display a tooltip with information about it, including which
CIT replaces it.
Note: The strikethrough font is only visible when a font size of 14 points or higher is selected
for the topology map.
Deprecated CITs appear in the CIT tree in Modeling Studio, however it is not recommended to use
them in building new TQL queries and views. In place of a deprecated CIT, use the CIT indicated in
the tooltip as its replacement. Deprecated CITs do not appear in out-of-the-box queries and views.
CIT attributes which are scheduled to be removed are deprecated attributes. They also appear in
strikethrough font in the user interface.
The following image displays a TQL query containing a deprecated CIT:
Page 376 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
System Type Manager
System Type Manager enables you to create a predefined list whose values define an attribute
type. For more details on System Type Manager, see "System Type Manager Dialog Box" on page
408.
You can create the following attribute types:
l
List. Enables you to create a predefined list of values, for example, Location.
l
Enumeration. Enables you to create a predefined list of values, as well as assign each value a
color. Enumerations are designed to be used as severity value lists by states. For details, see
"State Manager" in the RTSM Administration Guide.
Severity lists are used for:
l
Retrieving Impact Analysis results in IT Universe Manager. For details, see "IT Universe
Manager" on page 191.
l
Creating an Impact rule. For details, see "Impact Analysis Manager" on page 354.
You can use both List and Enumeration values for:
l
Editing the attributes of a CIT. For details, see "Create a CI Type" on next page.
l
Defining an attribute condition for a TQL query node or relationship. For details, see "Query
Node/Relationship Properties Dialog Box" on page 76.
Page 377 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
Create a CI Type
This task describes the process you follow to create a CIT using the Create CI Type wizard.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Prerequisites
From the CI Type Manager, select CI Types from the list box in the CI Types pane. Then
select New
2.
to start the Create CI Type Wizard.
Define the CI Type
Enter the name, description, and base configuration item type for the new CI type and select an
identification method for it. For details, see "Details Page" on page 392.
3.
Set the CI Type Attributes
Edit the attributes of the new CI type. For details, see "Attributes Page" on page 393.
Note: List and Enumeration definitions are created in the System Type Manager. If
required, you can create additional List and Enumeration definitions. For details, see
"Create List and Enumeration Definitions" on page 381.
4.
Assign Qualifiers to the CI Type
Assign qualifiers to the definition of the new CI type. For details, see "Qualifiers Page" on page
396.
5.
Assign an Icon to the CI Type
Select an icon to assign to the new CI type. For details, see "Icon Page" on page 398.
6.
Customize the CI Type Menu
Select the menu items and commands to appear in the shortcut menu for the new CI type. For
details, see "Attached Menu Page" on page 399.
7.
Define the CI Type Default Label
Define the attributes to appear in the CI type label. For details, see "Default Label Page" on
page 401.
8.
Define the Matching Rules
If necessary, define the matching rules for the new CI type. For details, see "Matching Rules
Page" on page 402.
Note: This step is only relevant for customers running HP Universal CMDB Configuration
Manager.
Page 378 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
Create a Relationship Type
This task describes the process you follow to create a relationship type using the Create
Relationship wizard.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Prerequisites
From the CI Type Manager, select Relationships from the list box in the CI Types pane. Then
select New
2.
to start the Create Relationship Wizard.
Define the Relationship
Enter the name, description and base CI type for the new relationship. For details, see "Details
Page" on page 392.
3.
Set the Relationship Attributes
Edit the attributes of the new relationship. For details, see "Attributes Page" on page 393.
Note: List and Enumeration definitions are created in the System Type Manager. If
required, you can create additional List and Enumeration definitions. For details, see
"Create List and Enumeration Definitions" on page 381.
4.
Assign Qualifiers to the Relationship
Assign qualifiers to the definition of the new relationship. For details, see "Qualifiers Page" on
page 396.
5.
Customize the Relationship Menu
Select the menu items and commands to appear in the shortcut menu for the new relationship.
For details, see "Attached Menu Page" on page 399.
6.
Define the Relationship Default Label
Define the attributes to appear in the relationship label. For details, see "Default Label Page" on
page 401.
Page 379 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
Create a Calculated Relationship Type
This task describes the process you follow to create a calculated relationship type using the Create
Calculated Relationship wizard.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Prerequisites
From the CI Type Manager, select Calculated Relationships from the list box in the CI Types
pane. Then select New
2.
to start the Create Calculated Relationship Wizard.
Define the Calculated Relationship
Enter the name, description and base CI type for the new calculated relationship. For details,
see "Details Page" on page 392.
3.
Assign Qualifiers to the Relationship
Assign qualifiers to the definition of the new relationship. For details, see "Qualifiers Page" on
page 396.
4.
Add Required Triplets
Add the required triplets. For details, see "Triplets Page" on page 397.
Page 380 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
Create List and Enumeration Definitions
This section describes the tasks for creating List and Enumeration definitions.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Create a List Definition
You can create a List definition of predefined values. For example, a List definition called
Location might contain:
n
New York
n
Boston
n
Baltimore
For details, see "Create/Update List/Enumeration Definition Dialog Box" on page 403.
2.
Create an Enumeration Definition
You can create an Enumeration definition, which enables you to assign a color for each value
on the list. For details, see "Create/Update List/Enumeration Definition Dialog Box" on page
403. For an example of an Enumeration definition, see "Create an Enumeration Definition –
Workflow" on next page.
Page 381 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
Create an Enumeration Definition – Workflow
The following steps describe how to create an Enumeration definition.
Note: To retrieve the required results, you must follow each step in this task.
To create an Enumeration definition:
1. Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > CI Type Manager.
2. From the Main Menu, select CI Types > System Type Manager to open the System Type
Manager dialog box.
3. Click the Add button
to open the Create List Definition dialog box.
Note: Alternatively, you can select Admin > RTSM Administration > Administration
> State Manager and then click the New Enumeration button to open the Create
Enumeration Definition dialog box.
4. Select Enumeration.
5. In the Name box, enter the required name.
6. (Optional) In the Display Name box, enter the required display name.
This example describes how to create the following severity list:
Key
Value
Severity Represented
0
Green
Normal
1
Orange
Major
2
Red
Critical
7. Click the Add
button to create a new row.
8. In the Value box, enter Normal, in the Key box, enter 0, and in the Color section, select
Green.
9. Click the Add
button to create another row.
10. In the Value box, enter Major, in the Key box, enter 1, and in the Color section, select
Orange.
11. Click the Add
button to create another row.
12. In the Value box, enter Critical, in the Key box, enter 2, and in the Color section, select
Red.
The following image shows the Enumeration Definition section after the changes:
Page 382 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
13. Click OK to save your changes.
Page 383 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
View Descriptions for CI Types and Relationships
You can view a complete list of available CI types in tree format in the left pane of CI Type
Manager. You can search incrementally for a specific CI type as described in "CI Type Manager" on
page 388. To see a description for a particular CI type, select it from the tree and hold the pointer
over the icon which corresponds to it in the Topology Map. A tooltip containing a description of the
CI type is displayed.
For relationships, select Relationships in the left pane and search incrementally by the first letter
of the relationship. Select the relationship you want and hold the pointer over its icon in the
Topology Map to display a tooltip containing a description of the relationship.
For detailed information on CI types and relationships, you can generate the UCMDB CI Types and
Relationships Information PDF. For details, see "Export Selected CITs to PDF Dialog Box" on
page 407.
Page 384 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
CI Type Manager User Interface
This section includes (in alphabetical order):
l
"Add/Edit Attribute Dialog Box" below
l
"Add/Remove Relationship Dialog Box" on page 388
l
"CI Type Manager" on page 388
l
"Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship Wizard" on page 391
l
"Create/Update List/Enumeration Definition Dialog Box" on page 403
l
"Export Selected CITs to Excel Dialog Box" on page 406
l
"Export Selected CITs to PDF Dialog Box" on page 407
l
"System Type Manager Dialog Box" on page 408
Add/Edit Attribute Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define a new attribute to add to a CIT or to edit an existing attribute of
a CIT.
To access
In the CI Type Manager, select the Attributes tab, then click the Add
button, or select an attribute and click the Edit button or doubleclick the attribute.
Important information
In Edit mode, fields that cannot be changed are disabled.
Details Tab
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Attribute
Name
Enter a unique name for the new attribute. Only the following characters are
permitted: a-z, A-Z, 0-9 and underscore (_). Note also:
Page 385 of 446
l
The first character may be a number.
l
The attribute name field is not case sensitive.
l
The maximum length is 200 characters.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Attribute
Type
Description
Select one of the following options:
l
Primitive. Choose from one of the following field types: boolean, bytes,
date number, double number, float number, integer, list of
integers, long number, string, list of strings, xml.
l
Enumeration/List. Contains a list of Enumerations and Lists defined in the
System Type Manager. For details, see "System Type Manager" on page 377.
This option enables you to define an attribute with a predefined value. For
example, a location attribute might be defined by a location list containing the
following values: Singapore, Paris, New York.
Default
Value
Enter or select a default value for the attribute. The options for the Default Value
field vary depending on the attribute type you selected.
Note: If you select the Primitive attribute types list of integers or list
of strings, you can enter multiple values.
Description Enter a description for the new attribute.
Note: This field is optional.
Display
Name
Enter a name for the new attribute to identify it in BSM.
Scope
Select the scope of the new attribute (the class model to which it belongs).
Value Size
Enter a value for the maximum physical size of the new attribute. (Enabled for
bytes and string only).
Note: This field is optional.
Advanced Tab
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Asset Data
Select to display the attribute value in the Asset Report.
Page 386 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Change
Monitored
Description
Select to define attributes whose values are being marked as Change
Monitored in CI Type Manager. The changes in the values of such attributes are
saved in the CMDB History database.
Note:
l
When this qualifier is selected for a given attribute, the attribute appears as a
visible column in the Element Instances dialog box. For details, see
"Element Instances Dialog Box" on page 70.
l
Change Monitored is not relevant for attributes of the type list of integers or
list of strings.
CMS Browser Select to enable this attribute to be searchable in the UCMDB Browser.
Searchable
CMS Browser Select to enable this attribute to be viewed in the UCMDB Browser.
Visible
Comparable
Select to enable this attribute to be used for comparing compound CIs.
Discovery
Auto Trim
When selected, results sent from the Probe are trimmed. That is, leading and
trailing spaces and tabs are trimmed, so that there are no white spaces at the
beginning or at the end of the result.
Editable
Select to enable future editing of the attribute. Only attributes that are marked
as Editable (or ones that have values) are displayed in the Properties tab in IT
Universe Manager.
Enable Auto
Truncate by
DFM
If selected, when attributes of type STRING exceed the size limit, Discovery
truncates the value. For details, see "Data Validation on the Data Flow Probe"
in the Data Flow Management Guide.
Index
Select to accelerate the attribute retrieval performance. This option is
recommended for attributes that are used frequently in search conditions. For
example, IP address is usually an index attribute of a node.
Lower Case
When this option is selected, the attribute value appears in lower case.
Password
When this option is selected, the attribute value appears as asterisks (a hidden
value).
Probe-side ID
If selected, this attribute is used by the probe to identify a CI.
Required
Select to define this attribute as a required one, if its value is required for the
creation of the CIT.
Static
Select to define this attribute as static.
Unique
When this option is selected, different instances of this CI type must have
unique values.
Page 387 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Upper Case
When this option is selected, the attribute value appears in upper case.
Use Update
Value Policy
Select this option to add the ALLOW_VOLATILITY qualifier. For details on this
qualifier, see "The ALLOW_VOLATILITY Qualifier" on page 29.
Visible
Select to display this attribute in the Properties tab in IT Universe Manager.
Add/Remove Relationship Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to add or remove default or new relationships between CITs, which
define their physical or logical connections.
To access
In the CI Type Manager, right-click a CIT or two CITs and select Add/Remove
Relationship.
Important
When adding a relationship between two CITs, select the two CITs to be linked by
information holding down CTRL and clicking the CIT names. Then right-click one of them and
select Add/Remove Relationship.
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
<query node1 to query
node2>
Select the relationships to add in the direction of the first query node
to the second.
<query node2 to query
node1>
Select the relationships to add in the direction of the second query
node to the first.
Relationship Name
A list of the possible relationships.
CI Type Manager
This page enables you to view the information in the CI Type model, which contains the definitions
of all configuration item types (CITs) defined in the system and the relationships that define the
connections between them. Each CIT has its own attributes, as well as the attributes inherited from
its parent CIT.
To access
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > CI Type Manager.
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
Page 388 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Click the New button to open the Create Configuration Item Type Wizard
which enables you to define a new CI type. For details, see "Create
Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship Wizard" on
page 391.
Click Delete to delete the selected CI type or relationship.
Click to refresh the data content of the hierarchical tree structure that may
have been modified by other users.
Click the Save button to save changes made to a CI type.
Enables you to import CITs from an external file.
Enables you to export a CIT as an XML file. Use this option to move CITs
from one server to another.
Enables you to export a CIT. Choose the export format. The available
options are:
l
PDF. The table data is exported in PDF format.
l
XLS. The table data is formatted as an .xls (Excel) file that can be
displayed in a spreadsheet.
<CI
Select one of the following options:
Type/Relationship
l CI Types. Display the CI types in the CIT model.
Box>
l Relationships. Display the relationships in the CIT model.
l
Page 389 of 446
Calculated Relationships. Display the calculated relationships in the
CIT model.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
<Editing Pane>
The following tabs are available:
l
Dependencies. Displays the CI Type model in a topology map,
including the CITs and the relationships between them. The name of
the selected CI type or relationship appears in the border at the top of
the pane. When you point to a CIT, a tooltip displays the display name
of the CIT and its description.
l
Details. Enables you to edit the basic information about the CI type
selected in the left pane. For details, see "Details Page" on page 392.
l
Attributes. Enables you to edit the attributes of the selected CIT. For
details, see "Attributes Page" on page 393.
l
Qualifiers. Enables you to assign qualifiers to the selected CIT. For
details, see "Qualifiers Page" on page 396.
l
Triplets. Enables you to create a calculated relationship. For details,
see "Triplets Page" on page 397. This tab appears only for calculated
relationships.
l
Icon. Enables you to assign an icon to the selected CIT. For details,
see "Icon Page" on page 398. This tab does not appear for
relationships.
l
Attached Menu. Enables you to customize the shortcut menu of a CI
by adding menu items and commands (for example, ping, run a
program, open a URL). The customized menu is displayed when you
right-click a CI instance in IT Universe Manager. For details, see
"Attached Menu Page" on page 399.
l
Default Label. Enables you to define attributes that appear in the CIT
label. You can include more than one attribute by using the function
buttons. For details, see "Default Label Page" on page 401.
l
Matching Rules. Enables you to define matching rules for use in HP
Universal CMDB Configuration Manager. For details, consult the
Configuration Manager documentation. This tab does not appear for
relationships and only appears when UCMDB is running with
Configuration Manager.
<Main Menu>
For details, see "Main Menu" on page 168.
<Toolbar>
For details, see "Toolbar Options" on page 171.
CI Types Pane
A hierarchical tree structure of the CI Type model containing the
inheritance relationships among CITs, and displaying the number of
instances of each CIT in the RTSM. All CITs included in the CI Type
model are classified as either a CIT or a relationship. You can drill down
and view the relationships and neighbors of the selected CIT in the
topology map. You can search in the list of CITs or relationships using the
Incremental Search by entering the first letter of the CIT or relationship
repeatedly until you reach the required selection. You can also search for a
CIT or relationship by entering its full name.
Page 390 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
Shortcut Menu
CI Type Manager includes the following options available by right clicking a CI type in the CI Types
pane or the Dependencies map:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Add/Remove Opens the Add/Remove Relationship dialog box, which enables you to add or
Relationship remove relationships from CITs. For details, see "Add/Remove Relationship
Dialog Box" on page 388.
Delete
Selected
Item
Deletes the selected CI type. This option is only available for CI types that have
no children and no instances.
Export To
XML
Enables you to export a CIT as an XML file. Use this option to move CITs from
one server to another.
New
Opens the Create Configuration Item Type Wizard which enables you to define a
new CI type. For details, see "Create Configuration Item
Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship Wizard" below.
Show CIT
Instances
Opens the Show All Instances dialog box, which displays all instances of the
selected CIT. For details, see "Element Instances Dialog Box" on page 70.
Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated
Relationship Wizard
This wizard enables you to define a new configuration item type or relationship.
To
access
Click a CI type or relationship in the topology map or CI Types pane of the CI Type
Manager and select New or click the New button
in the CI types pane.
Wizard The "Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship Wizard"
map
contains:
"Details Page" > "Attributes Page" > "Qualifiers Page" > "Triplets Page" > "Icon Page"
> "Attached Menu Page" > "Default Label Page" > "Matching Rules Page"
The Create Configuration Item Type wizard includes the following pages:
l
"Details Page" on next page
l
"Attributes Page" on page 393
l
"Qualifiers Page" on page 396
l
"Triplets Page" on page 397
l
"Icon Page" on page 398
l
"Attached Menu Page" on page 399
Page 391 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
l
"Default Label Page" on page 401
l
"Matching Rules Page" on page 402
Details Page
This wizard page enables you to enter basic information about the new CI type you are defining.
Important
For general information about the Create Configuration Item Type Wizard, see
information "Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship Wizard"
on previous page.
Wizard
map
The "Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship
Wizard" contains:
"Details Page" > "Attributes Page" > "Qualifiers Page" > "Triplets Page" > "Icon
Page" > "Attached Menu Page" > "Default Label Page" > "Matching Rules Page"
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Base CI
Type
Select a base CIT for the CIT you are creating. The new CIT inherits the base
CIT's attributes.
Note: This field only appears in the Create CI Type Wizard. It is not relevant
when editing an existing CIT in the Details tab of CI Type Manager.
Created By
The user who created the new CIT.
Note: This field is optional.
Description
A description for the new CIT.
Note: This field is optional.
Display
Name
Page 392 of 446
The name of the CIT as it appears in the BSM interface.
Note: This field is optional.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Identification Every new CI defined has an identification based on its CMDB ID and global_id
properties. You can set an additional identification method for instances of the
selected CIT. The following options are available:
l
Simple identification. Select attributes from the Available Attributes pane
and move them to the Selected Attributes pane. These attributes are defined
as the CIT's key attributes. CIT instances with matching values for all of the
key attributes are merged into a single instance.
l
Advanced identification. Click the Edit button to define an XML
identification rule. For an example of an XML identification rule, see "Create
an Identification Rule Document" in the Data Flow Management Guide.
l
Inherited from parent. The CIT uses the same identification method as its
parent CIT.
l
No identification. No additional identification method.
Note: For relationships, only the Simple identification option is available.
Name
The unique name of the new CIT. Only the following characters are permitted: az, A-Z, 0-9 and underscore (_). Note also:
Scope
l
The first character must not be a number.
l
The name field is case sensitive, but you cannot use the same name with
different cases for different CITs.
l
The maximum length is 200 characters.
Select the scope of the new CIT (the class model to which it belongs).
Attributes Page
This wizard page enables you to edit the attributes of the CI type.
Wizard The "Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship Wizard"
map
contains:
"Details Page" > "Attributes Page" > "Qualifiers Page" > "Triplets Page" > "Icon
Page"> "Attached Menu Page" >"Default Label Page" > "Matching Rules Page"
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click the Add button to define a new attribute. For details, see "Add/Edit
Attribute Dialog Box" on page 385.
Page 393 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Select a row and click the Edit button to open the Edit Attribute dialog box. For
details, see "Add/Edit Attribute Dialog Box" on page 385.
Note: If you modify an attribute belonging to a CIT's parent, the text turns light
blue. If you modify an attribute belonging to the CIT itself, the text remains dark
blue.
Click the Delete button to delete a selected attribute. This option is only active
for newly defined attributes.
Click the Reset button to reset the attribute settings after editing a pre-existing
attribute.
Click Select Columns to select the columns to appear using the Select
Columns dialog box. For details, see "Select Columns Dialog Box" on page 443.
<Attributes> Displays all attributes associated with the new CIT. Attributes appearing in black
are ones that the new CIT inherits from the base CIT. Attributes appearing in dark
blue are ones that are private to this CIT and its descendants. Attributes
appearing in light blue are inherited ones that have been modified for the new CIT.
Asset Data
Indicates whether the attribute value is displayed in the Asset Report. For details
see "Asset Report" on page 335.
Note: When this qualifier is selected for a given attribute, the attribute appears as
a visible column in the Element Instances dialog box. For details, see "Element
Instances Dialog Box" on page 70.
Change
Monitored
Select to define attributes whose values are being marked as Change Monitored
in CI Type Manager. The changes in the values of such attributes are saved in
the CMDB History database.
Note: When this qualifier is selected for a given attribute, the attribute appears as
a visible column in the Element Instances dialog box. For details, see "Element
Instances Dialog Box" on page 70.
CMS
Browser
Searchable
Indicates whether this attribute is searchable in the UCMDB Browser.
CMS
Browser
Visible
Indicates whether this attribute is visible in the UCMDB Browser.
Comparable
Indicates whether this attribute is to be used for comparing compound CIs. For
details, see "Compare CIs Report" on page 336. The changes in the value of
such an attribute are saved in the CMDB History database.
Note: When this qualifier is selected for a given attribute, the attribute appears as
a visible column in the Element Instances dialog box. For details, see "Element
Instances Dialog Box" on page 70.
Page 394 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Default
Value
The default value for the attribute. This value appears when the new CIT is
defined and there is no runtime value for the attribute.
Description
A description of the attribute.
Discovery
Auto Trim
Indicates whether the results sent from the Probe are trimmed.
Display
Name
The attribute name that appears in the BSM interface.
Editable
Indicates whether the attribute can be edited.
Only attributes that are marked as Editable (or ones that have values) are
displayed in the Properties tab in IT Universe Manager.
Enable Auto Indicates whether the auto-truncate feature for attributes of type STRING is
Truncate by enabled.
DFM
Index
Indicates whether the attribute has been defined as an index attribute, which
enables you to accelerate the attribute retrieval performance.
This option is recommended for attributes that are used frequently in search
conditions. For example, IP address is usually an index attribute of a node.
Key
Indicates whether the attribute is defined as a key attribute.
Note: This column is only relevant when Simple identification is selected as the
identification method.
Lower Case
Indicates whether to keep the attribute value in lower case.
Name
The actual name of the attribute (compare to Display Name). The name must be
in English.
Probe-side
ID
Indicates whether this attribute is used by the probe to identify a CI.
Required
Indicates whether this attribute is defined as a required one, whose value is
required for the creation of the CIT.
Static
Indicates whether this attribute is defined as static.
Type
The type of the attribute.
UDM Scope
Indicates whether the attribute is included in the UDM class model.
Unique
Indicates whether this attribute is defined as unique, for which different instances
of this CI type must have unique values
Upper Case
Indicates whether to keep the attribute value in upper case.
Page 395 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Visible
Description
Indicates whether this attribute is displayed in the Properties tab in IT Universe
Manager.
Qualifiers Page
This wizard page enables you to assign qualifiers to a CI type definition.
Important
Qualifiers enable you to define added attribute definitions to the CIT. In the
information Qualifiers list, select the required qualifiers using the Add buttons to move your
selections to the Configuration Item Type Qualifiers list. You can make
multiple selections by holding down the CTRL key.
Wizard
map
The "Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship
Wizard" contains:
"Details Page" > "Attributes Page" > "Qualifiers Page" > "Triplets Page" > "Icon
Page"> "Attached Menu Page" > "Default Label Page" > "Matching Rules Page"
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Click this button to move all qualifiers to the Configuration Item Type
Qualifiers list.
Select the qualifier and click this button to add the qualifier to the
Configuration Item Type Qualifiers list. Select multiple qualifiers by
holding down the CTRL key.
To remove a qualifier from the CIT definition, select the qualifier from the
Configuration Item Type Qualifiers list and click this button.
Click this button to remove all qualifiers from the Configuration Item Type
Qualifiers list.
To define a new, custom qualifier, enter the qualifier name in the text box and
click Insert. The qualifier appears in the Configuration Item Type
Qualifiers list.
<Configuration
Item Type
Qualifiers>
The list of qualifiers that define attributes of the new CIT. For example, you
can use a qualifier to define a CIT as abstract, which means that you cannot
create instances from it.
<Qualifiers>
For a list of the available qualifier options, see "Qualifier Tab" on page 86.
Page 396 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
Triplets Page
This wizard page enables you to create a calculated relationship. Each row on the Triplets page
represents one of the allowed steps in the path leading from the source CI to the target CI in the
topology map.
Note: This step of the wizard is only relevant for calculated relationships.
Important
information
Wizard
map
l
This page is displayed if you select Calculated Relationships in the dropdown box in the CI Types pane.
l
For details about calculated relationships, see "Impact Modeling" on page 100.
l
For general information about the Create Configuration Item Type Wizard, see
"Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship
Wizard" on page 391.
The "Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship
Wizard" contains:
"Details Page" > "Attributes Page" > "Qualifiers Page" > "Triplets Page" > "Icon
Page"> "Attached Menu Page" > "Default Label Page" > "Matching Rules Page"
See also
"Impact Modeling" on page 100
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click to define the allowed steps in a path in the topology graph leading from the
source CI to the target CI in the calculated relationship. Opens the Add Triplet
dialog box. For details, see "Add Triplet Dialog Box" on page 67.
Select a row and click the Edit button to edit the triplet. Opens the Edit Triplet
dialog box. For details, see "Add Triplet Dialog Box" on page 67.
Click the Delete button to delete a selected triplet.
Relationship The required relationship connecting the two query nodes.
Relationship The source and target of a relationship.
Direction
l
The direction is from source to target.
l
The direction is from target to source.
Source
The required source query node.
Target
The required target query node.
Page 397 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
Icon Page
This wizard page enables you to select an icon to assign to the new CI Type.
Note: This step of the wizard is not relevant for relationships.
Important
Each CIT is displayed with a default icon. However, you can attach different icons
information to the same CIT when certain conditions apply. For example, you can associate
different icons with the same CIT when one of its attribute values changes.
Wizard
map
The "Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship
Wizard" contains:
"Details Page" > "Attributes Page" > "Qualifiers Page"> "Triplets Page" > "Icon
Page" > "Attached Menu Page" > "Default Label Page" > "Matching Rules Page"
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Click to add a row.
Note: Only active if Change the Configuration Item Type icon
according to its attribute value is selected.
Click to remove a row.
Note: Only active if Change the Configuration Item Type icon
according to its attribute value is selected.
Attributes
Select an attribute to determine the icon assigned to the CIT.
Change the
Configuration Item
Type icon according to
its attribute value
Enables you to assign an icon for each attribute value. For example,
you could define two values for the City attribute: if City=London,
one icon is displayed. If City=Beijing, another icon is displayed.
Configuration Item
Type Main Icon
Select the group to which the CIT belongs.
Icon
Select an icon to associate with the value you entered in the Value
column.
Value
Enter a value corresponding to the attribute you selected. You can
add a new line for each value you enter.
Page 398 of 446
Note: If you change the icon of a CIT that appears in an existing
view, the CIT's icon is not updated in the view.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
Attached Menu Page
This wizard page enables you to customize the shortcut menu of a CI by adding menu items and
commands (for example, ping, run a program, open a URL). The customized menu is displayed
when you right-click a CI instance in IT Universe Manager.
Important
If a CIT does not have a method defined specifically for it, the CIT inherits all the
information menus from its parent CIT or the nearest ancestor that does have a method
defined for it.
If you create or modify a menu, the change occurs only in the specific CIT that is
being edited.
Wizard
map
The "Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship
Wizard"contains:
"Details Page" > "Attributes Page" > "Qualifiers Page" > "Triplets Page" > "Icon
Page" > "Attached Menu Page" > "Default Label Page" > "Matching Rules
Page"
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Select a menu item from the tree and click the button. A new entry appears under
the selected item.
Click to remove a menu item.
Click to move a selected menu item up in the menu.
Click to move a selected menu item down in the menu.
<Tree>
Hierarchical tree containing the default menu items.
Caution: It is not recommended to edit the definitions of the default menu items.
Command
To connect to a specific location on the World Wide Web, select URL, and enter
the exact Internet address, for example,
http://www.hp.com/go/software. (Available only if you select the URL
command type option.)
Note: If you use a variable in the Command field, use the format command
name %1 and define the CIT attributes as described in "Parameters" on next
page. The parameter values replace %1 according to their order in the list. For
example, %1 is replaced by the first parameter in the list, %2 is replaced by the
second parameter in the list, and so on.
Description
Page 399 of 446
Enter a description for the method. (This is for internal use only and does not
appear in the menu.)
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Existing
Method
Select to choose a command from a list of defined methods inherited from the IT
Universe CIT and all its ancestors.
Icon
Select the icon to appear next to the menu option in the shortcut menu.
Note: This field is optional.
Menu Item
Name
Enter a name for the new menu item as it should appear in the menu.
Method
Enables you to add a command to the menu.
Note: To create a method and not override the existing method, it is
recommended to create a new menu item and place the new method there.
Method
Name
Enter a name for the command.
New Method
Select to add an action (for example, ping) to the menu item.
Parameters
To add attributes to the command or URL, click the Add Parameter button and
select the attribute from the list.
To delete an existing entry, select it and click the Remove Parameter button.
Note: Parameters are not relevant when Inner Process is selected.
Require
Select the check box for users to confirm access to a menu item before the item
user
is displayed.
confirmation
Separator
To place a separator between two menu items:
Click OK to place a separator underneath the selected menu option.
Shortcut
Press any key combination to create a shortcut for the menu item, for example,
CTRL+H.
Note: This field is optional.
Sub-Menu
Page 400 of 446
Select to create a sub-menu under the selected menu option.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Type
Choose a command type:
l
URL. Opens a web page to the specified URL. Enter the URL of a Web page
for the command to open in the URL box.
l
Inner Process. Triggers an internal BSM action. Select an action from the
drop-down list of actions.
l
Execute. Triggers an executable action. Enter an executable command in the
Executable box.
Note: In the Executable box, enter only the name of the executable file (for
example, notepad.exe). Do not enter a path to the executable file. A path
cannot execute a program.
Default Label Page
This wizard page enables you to define attributes that appear in the CI type label. You can include
more than one attribute by using the function buttons. This is the final step of the Create
Configuration Item Type Wizard.
Important
You build a label by selecting attributes in the CI Type Attributes pane and adding
information them to the Format pane, using the operators in the Format pane to connect them.
The label appears as the title under a CI of the new CI Type. The label definition
can be customized to include different attribute values. For example, if the
function label of the node CIT is composed of hostname and network, the
displayed label is: server1 10.0.65.0.
Labels can also be created using regular expressions.
Wizard
map
The "Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship
Wizard" contains:
"Details Page" > "Attributes Page" > "Qualifiers Page" > "Triplets Page" > "Icon
Page" > "Attached Menu Page" > "Default Label Page" > "Matching Rules
Page" on next page
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click to add the selected attribute to the Format pane.
Adds parentheses to the formatted text (use in conjunction with the other functions).
Page 401 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Places an AND operator between two attributes in the formatted text. For example,
network_netaddr&network_domain displays the network address and the domain
of a query node.
Places an OR operator between two attributes in the formatted text.
Adds a regular expression (using regular expression syntax) to the label definition.
The structure of the entry is (v1, v2, v3), where v1 represents the selected attribute,
v2 represents the regular expression itself (which divides the value into groups), and
v3 represents the number of the selected group.
For example, if the selected attribute is a name, consisting of a first name, a space,
and a surname, the regular expression would be (name, (\S*)(\s*)(\S*),
3), which indicates that the surname can be used for the name attribute in the
default label.
For examples of how to use regular expression syntax, see "Regular Expression
Examples" on page 445.
Click to undo the last change in the Format pane.
Click to revert the last change in the Format pane that was made using the Undo
button.
Click to clear the Format pane.
Click to restore the default settings.
CI Type
Displays the available options of attributes to be included in the CIT label.
Attributes
CI Type
Displays the attributes that you select to appear in the CIT label.
Label
For example, to label a node by its host name and operating system, choose the
Definition
host_hostname and host_os attributes. The CIT label is host1 UNIX.
Format
You can define conditions using AND and OR combinations.
Note: To delete an attribute from the Format pane, highlight it and press the DELETE
key.
Matching Rules Page
This wizard page enables you to define matching rules for comparable attributes for use in HP
Universal CMDB Configuration Manager.
Page 402 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
Important
This page is only relevant when Configuration Manager is installed. For details on
information matching rules, refer to the Configuration Manager documentation.
Note: You can activate the Matching Rules page manually by setting the Enable
Configuration Manager Matching Rules setting to true in the Infrastructure
Settings Manager.
Wizard
map
The "Create Configuration Item Type/Relationship/Calculated Relationship
Wizard" contains:
"Details Page" > "Attributes Page" > "Qualifiers Page" > "Triplets Page" > "Icon
Page" > "Attached Menu Page" > "Default Label Page" > "Matching Rules
Page"
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click to move the selected comparable attributes to the Matching Rule Priorities
pane or the Required Matching Attributes pane. Select multiple attributes by
holding down the CTRL key.
Click to remove an attribute from the Matching Rule Priorities pane or the
Required Matching Attributes pane.
Click to move all attributes to the Matching Rule Priorities pane or the Required
Matching Attributes pane.
Click this button to remove all attributes from the Matching Rule Priorities pane or
the Required Matching Attributes pane.
Set the order of the matching rules using the up and down buttons.
Comparable A list of all the attributes of the selected CI type with the comparable qualifier
Attributes
selected.
Matching
Rule
Priorities
The attributes selected are used by Configuration Manager, according to the
priority defined, to determine if the matching rule is satisfied.
Required
Matching
Attributes
The values of the selected attributes must match to satisfy the Configuration
Manager matching rule.
Create/Update List/Enumeration Definition Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define a new List or Enumeration definition. The List or Enumeration
definition you have created appears in the System Type Manager dialog box, where you can edit it if
required (for details, see "System Type Manager Dialog Box" on page 408).
Page 403 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
To access
Click the Add button in the System Type Manager dialog box.
Important
You can access the Create/Update Enumeration Definition dialog box from the
information State Manager as well. For details, see "State Manager" in the RTSM
Administration Guide.
Relevant
tasks
"Create List and Enumeration Definitions" on page 381
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Display
Name
Enter the name you want to appear in the list of System Type Definitions. If you
leave this field empty, the entry in the Name field is used.
Enumeration Enables you to create a predefined list of values, as well as assign each value a
color. For details, see "Enumeration Definition Area" on next page.
List
Enables you to create a predefined list of values. For details, see "List Definition
Area" below.
Name
Enter a unique name for the definition.
List Definition Area
This area enables you to create a predefined list of values.
To access
Select List in the Create List/Enumeration Definition dialog box.
Important
information
For example, a Location attribute might be defined by a location list
containing the following values:
l
New York
l
Boston
l
Baltimore
The following elements are included (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Add a List definition. Double-click inside the row and either select a date from the
calendar that appears (if you chose the type Date) or type the required value.
Delete a List definition.
Sorts the list in alphabetical order.
Page 404 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Type
Choose one of following field types:
l
Date
l
Double
l
Integer
l
Long
l
String
Enumeration Definition Area
This area enables you to create a list from a predefined list of values (similar to List), with
capabilities such as assigning a color for every value.
To access
Select Enumeration in the Create List/Enumeration Definition dialog box.
Important
information
Enumerations are designed to be used as severity value lists by states. You can
use Enumerations for lists that require key values.
See also
"Create an Enumeration Definition – Workflow" on page 382
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Add an Enumeration definition.
Remove an Enumeration definition.
Color
Select a color that indicates the severity level.
Note: Gray is only enabled when you create an Enumeration of the type Admin.
Key
Type a number to create an enumeration that describes a severity list for a category.
Assign key values according to the following rules:
l
The list of key values must always begin with zero (0). (Zero represents the Normal
state.) Otherwise, it does not appear in the State Manager (for details, see "State
Manager" in the RTSM Administration Guide).
l
The list must always be numbered consecutively.
For an example of an Enumeration definition, see "Create an Enumeration Definition –
Workflow" on page 382.
Value
Type a value, either a string or a number, for example, Red or my value. The value
appears in the tooltip for the CI in IT Universe Manager.
Page 405 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
Export Selected CITs to Excel Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you export selected CI types to an Excel report.
To access
In the CI Type Manager, click the Export Class Model button
Export Selected CITs to Excel.
and select
Important
You can select a CIT and a relationship to serve as the root CI type and root
information relationship for the report. If you do not select a CIT or relationship, the default
values are used. The root CIT and root relationship are independent of each other.
The report displays the root CIT and all its descendant CITs. The report contains
the following pages:
l
CIT Hierarchy. Displays the CITs under the root CIT in tree format with links
to their attributes.
l
Relationship Hierarchy. Displays the relationships under the root relationship
in tree format with links to their attributes.
l
CIT Attributes. Displays the name, type, description and display level for the
CIT attributes of each CIT under the root CIT.
l
Relationship Attributes. Displays the name, type, description and display
level for the relationship attributes of each relationship under the root
relationship.
l
Valid Relationships. Displays all the valid relationships for each CIT under
the root CIT.
l
Enumerations. Displays all the enumeration definitions from the System Type
Manager. (Not dependent on the root CIT or root relationship.)
l
Lists. Displays all the list definitions from the System Type Manager. (Not
dependent on the root CIT or root relationship.)
You can select the pages you want to display in the report.
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Root CI Type
Click the ellipsis button
to select a CIT to serve as the root CI type. If you
do not select a CIT, the default root CI type used . To change the default value,
edit the Object root setting in Infrastructure Settings Manager.
Root
Relationship
Page 406 of 446
Click the ellipsis button
to select a relationship to serve as the root
relationship. If you do not select a relationship, the default root relationship
used. To change the default value, edit the Link root setting in Infrastructure
Settings Manager.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Select pages
to display
Select the pages to display in the report (select the check boxes for all the
required pages). The following options are available:
l
CIT Worksheets. Includes the CIT Hierarchy and the CIT Attributes
worksheets.
l
Relationship Worksheets. Includes the Relationship Hierarchy and
Relationship Attributes worksheets.
l
Valid Relationships Worksheet. Includes the Valid Relationships
worksheet.
l
Type Definition Worksheets. Includes the Enumerations and Lists
worksheets.
Export Selected CITs to PDF Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you export selected CI types to a PDF report.
To access
Important
information
In the CI Type Manager, click the Export Class Model button
Export Selected CITs to PDF.
and select
The output of this dialog box is the UCMDB CI Types and Relationships
Information PDF, describing the Universal Data Model.
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
All Data
Select to display all the information on the selected CITs.
Changes
Only
Select to display only the changes in the selected CITs from the previous data
model.
CITs
Click the ellipsis button
Filter
attributes by
qualifiers
Select to filter the attributes in the report by qualifiers. Enter the required
qualifiers in the box. The report displays only the attributes with the selected
qualifiers.
Relationships Click the ellipsis button
Show
Properties
Page 407 of 446
to select CITs to export.
to select relationships to export.
Select the scope of the selected CITs and relationships:
l
UDM. Includes CITs and relationships from the UDM.
l
CMS. Includes only CITs and relationships used in the CMS
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 12: CI Type Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Show
Qualifiers
Description
Select to include qualifier information in the exported report.
Show
Select to include relationship information in the exported report.
Relationships
Show Valid
Links
Select to include valid link information in the exported report. The valid link
section displays all the valid relationships for the selected CITs.
System Type Manager Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to display the attribute types you defined in the Create
List/Enumeration Definition dialog box.
To access
From the CI Type Manager, select CI Types > System Type Manager.
Relevant tasks
"Create List and Enumeration Definitions" on page 381
See also
"Create an Enumeration Definition – Workflow" on page 382
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (AZ)
Description
Create a predefined list whose values define an attribute type. You can create
a definition for the following attribute types:
l
List definition.
l
Enumeration definition.
For a description of these attribute types, see "Create/Update
List/Enumeration Definition Dialog Box" on page 403.
Enables you to edit an existing definition. For details, see "Create/Update
List/Enumeration Definition Dialog Box" on page 403.
Delete an existing definition. Select the system type definition you want to
delete and click the Delete button.
<System Type
Definitions>
Page 408 of 446
The list of Enumeration and List definitions created in the System Type
Manager.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 13
Enrichment Manager
This chapter includes:
Enrichment Manager – Overview
410
Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario
412
Add Enrichment Query Nodes and Relationships to an Enrichment TQL Query
416
Enrichment Manager User Interface
417
Page 409 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
Enrichment Manager – Overview
Enrichment rules can be used for several purposes:
l
Adding new CIs and relationships to the RTSM.
l
Deleting specific CI instances from the RTSM.
l
Updating the attribute values of specific CI instances in the RTSM.
Enrichment query nodes and relationships differ from other query nodes and relationships in that
they are conceptual deductions that represent real relationships and CIs that cannot be discovered
automatically by the discovery process.
Enrichment query nodes and relationships are created as part of a TQL query, whose other TQL
query nodes are regular ones, meaning TQL query nodes that already exist in the RTSM. For more
information about TQL queries, see "Topology Query Language" on page 17.
The following example displays a regular query node of type Node linked to a Websphere AS
Enrichment query node by an Enrichment Composition relationship.
By placing an Enrichment query node within a TQL query context, the query receives data from its
attributes, and uses it to insert new information into the RTSM.
When you create Enrichment rules, the following results can occur:
l
The RTSM is enlarged. Add Enrichment query nodes and relationships that are currently not
included in the RTSM.
The following Enrichment rule example displays a regular Windows query node (that already
exists in the RTSM) connected to a Log File Enrichment query node by an Enrichment
Composition relationship.
Page 410 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
This Enrichment rule states that for every Windows CI instance that is found in the RTSM, a new
Log File CI instance is created, and linked to the Windows CI with a Composition relationship.
l
Specific CI instances are deleted from the RTSM. For an example, see "Define an
Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on next page.
l
The values of CI attributes are updated. Use an Enrichment rule to update the attributes of a
CI that already exists in the RTSM.
The following Enrichment rule example illustrates that a regular Windows query node (that
already exists in the RTSM) has been updated with an Enrichment rule.
This Enrichment rule states that every Windows CI found in the RTSM is updated with the
attribute value defined in the Enrichment rule.
Page 411 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario
This task describes how to create the following Enrichment rule:
An IP Address CI is connected to two identical Node CIs: one Node CI is identified by its IP
address and the other is identified by its lowest MAC address. For every such instance, delete the
Node CI that is identified by its IP address from the RTSM.
Note: To reach the required result, you must implement each one of the following steps.
This task includes the following steps:
l
"Create an Enrichment TQL Query" below
l
"Define the Query Node of Type Node that Is Identified by its Lowest MAC Address" on next
page
l
"Define the Query Node of Type Node that is Identified by its IP Address" on page 414
l
"Define the Enrichment Rule" on page 414
1.
Create an Enrichment TQL Query
To create an Enrichment TQL query, you need to define an Enrichment rule and then add the
regular TQL query nodes and relationships that define the query.
Note: You can add Enrichment query nodes and relationships only after at least one
regular query node has been added to the query.
Select Admin > RTSM Administration >Modeling > Enrichment Manager. For details
about how to create an Enrichment TQL query, see "New Enrichment Rule/Enrichment Rule
Properties/Save As Enrichment Rule Wizard" on page 424. For details about how to add query
nodes and relationships to a query, see "Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL Query"
on page 32.
Example of an Enrichment TQL Query:
A new Enrichment TQL query called doubleHosts1 (located under the Network folder)
is created in Enrichment Manager.
The doubleHosts1 Enrichment rule is displayed in the Enrichment Rules pane.
Page 412 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
In this Enrichment TQL query, an IP Address query node is linked to two query nodes of
type Node by a Containment relationship. The TQL results must comply with the
direction of the arrows.
Note: A TQL query is subject to certain validation restrictions. For details, see
"Troubleshooting and Limitations" on page 96.
2.
Define the Query Node of Type Node that Is Identified by its Lowest
MAC Address
At the top of the Enrichment Manager page, select Query mode. In the editing pane, right-click
the required query node of type Node, select QueryNode Properties to open the Query Node
Properties dialog box. Then define an attribute condition in the Attribute tab. For details on how
to define an attribute condition, see "Query Node/Relationship Properties Dialog Box" on page
76.
Page 413 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
Example of an Attribute Condition Definition that Identifies the Node by its Lowest
Mac Address:
In the Attribute tab, this attribute condition definition identifies the required Node by its
lowest MAC address.
3.
n
Attribute name — Node is Complete
n
Operator — Equal
n
Value — True
Define the Query Node of Type Node that is Identified by its IP Address
At the top of the Enrichment Manager page, select Query mode. In the editing pane, right-click
the required query node of type Node, and select Query Node Properties to open the Query
Node Properties dialog box. Then define two attribute conditions in the Attribute tab. For details
on how to define an attribute condition, see "Query Node/Relationship Properties Dialog Box"
on page 76.
Example of an Attribute Condition that Enables a Node to Be Identified by its IP
Address:
This attribute condition is the first attribute condition you need to define in the Attribute tab
to enable the query node of type node to be identified by its IP Address.
Attribute name — Node is Complete
Operator — Equal
Value — False
This is the second attribute condition you need to define in the Attribute tab to enable the
query node of type node to be identified by its IP address.
Attribute name — Node is Complete
Operator — Is null
Value — Value cannot be changed
4.
Define the Enrichment Rule
Define the Enrichment rule that deletes all instances of the query node of type Node that are
identified by their IP addresses. From the toolbar, select Enrichment mode. In the Enrichment
Rules pane, select the doubleHosts1 Enrichment rule. Then right-click the query node of type
Node that is identified by its IP address and select Delete Relationship/Query Node Item.
Example of a Query Node of Type Node Containing a Removed Indicator:
The query node of type Node now has a removed indicator to denote that all node
instances that have identical attribute and cardinality settings are removed from the
RTSM. The Enrichment query now looks like this.
Page 414 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
Page 415 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
Add Enrichment Query Nodes and Relationships
to an Enrichment TQL Query
This section describes how to add Enrichment query nodes and relationships to an Enrichment TQL
query in Enrichment Manager.
To add Enrichment query nodes and relationships to a TQL query:
1. From the tree in the Enrichment Rules pane, select the Enrichment rule to which you want to
add Enrichment query nodes and relationships or create a new one. For details, see "New
Enrichment Rule/Enrichment Rule Properties/Save As Enrichment Rule Wizard" on page 424.
2. From the Query/Enrichment drop-down at the top of the page, select Enrichment Mode.
3. From the tree displayed in the CI Type Selector, click and drag the query nodes you want to
function as an Enrichment query node on to the editing pane. These are the TQL query nodes
that are included in the query. Added Enrichment query nodes are displayed by an added
indicator.
Note: You can add more than one Enrichment query node to a rule.
4. Link the Enrichment query node to an existing TQL query node or query nodes, to provide the
Enrichment query node with the needed context for its operation.
The following are the Enrichment rule validations:
n
You must link the new Enrichment query node to at least one of the existing TQL query
nodes in the rule.
n
Enrichment query nodes can only be linked to one another with an Enrichment relationship.
n
If the new Enrichment query node must be contained (according to its CIT definition) in
another query node, you must use the Composition relationship to connect this
Enrichment query node to an existing TQL query node.
n
You cannot link an Enrichment query node to a TQL query node that is hidden.
5. To add a relationship between two query nodes, do one of the following:
n
Select the required query nodes by holding down CTRL and clicking the TQL query nodes,
right-click and select Add Relationship.
n
Click the Create Relationship
icon and draw a line between the required query nodes.
Added Enrichment relationships are displayed by an added
indicator.
The Add Relationship dialog box opens. For details, see "Add/Edit Relationship Dialog Box"
on page 59.
6. Click OK. The selected query nodes are linked by the relationship you have selected.
Page 416 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
Enrichment Manager User Interface
This section includes (in alphabetical order):
l
"Enrichment Manager Page" below
l
"New Enrichment Rule/Enrichment Rule Properties/Save As Enrichment Rule Wizard" on page
424
l
"Query Node/Relationship Definition Dialog Box" on page 427
l
"Query Node Definition - Advanced Attribute Dialog Box" on page 428
Enrichment Manager Page
This page enables you to define Enrichment rules. These rules, which are based on a specific TQL
query, can be used for several purposes, including:
l
Adding new CIs and relationships to the RTSM.
l
Deleting specific CI instances from the RTSM.
l
Updating the attribute values of specific CI instances in the RTSM.
To access
Select Admin > RTSM Administration > Modeling > Enrichment Manager.
Important
Enrichment Manager has two modes in which you can work. Always check the
information Enrichment/Query mode list in the toolbar to verify the currently selected
mode.
Relevant
tasks
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
Enrichment Rules Pane
This area displays a hierarchical tree structure of predefined folders and Enrichment rules. Each
Enrichment rule is associated with a TQL query.
Important
You can create your own Enrichment rule, or work with the out-of-the-box (factory)
information Enrichment rules provided with your BSM installation.
The default folders are provided for the out-of-the-box queries. You can modify
these folders, or add additional folders according to your organization's
requirements.
You can drag and drop Enrichment rules or folders to move them from one folder to
another.
User interface elements are described below:
Page 417 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Creates a new folder.
Creates an Enrichment rule. Opens the New Enrichment Rule/Properties
wizard.
Deletes the selected folder or Enrichment rule.
Refreshes the data content of the hierarchical tree structure that may have been
modified by other users.
(Enabled only when an Enrichment rule is created or when changes are made to
an existing one.) Saves the Enrichment rule to the RTSM.
Opens the New Enrichment Rule/Properties wizard. Enables you to change the
description and the activation state of the Enrichment rule.
Generates a preview of the results of the selected Enrichment rule.
Represents a folder.
Represents an Enrichment rule.
<Enrichment
Rule tree>
Displays the existing Enrichment rules in tree format.
Note: Only Enrichment rules appear in the tree. TQL queries of type Enrichment
(created in the Modeling Studio) do not appear in the tree.
The following elements are available by right-clicking a folder or Enrichment rule:
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Delete
Deletes the selected folder or Enrichment rule.
Export To
XML
Displays a standard Save As dialog box, enabling you to save the Enrichment rule
as an XML script. This option can be used to move an Enrichment rule from one
workstation to another, provided the related TQL query is also relocated.
Import
From
XML
Imports XML files that contain saved Enrichment queries to the Enrichment
Manager.
New
Creates an Enrichment rule. Opens the New Enrichment Rule wizard.
New
Folder
Creates a new folder.
Preview
Generates a preview of the results of the selected Enrichment rule.
Page 418 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
UI
Element
(A-Z)
Description
Properties Opens the New Enrichment Rule/Properties wizard. Enables you to change the
description and the activation state of the rule.
Rename
Folder
Renames the folder.
Save
(Enabled only when a new Enrichment query is created or when changes are made
to an existing one.) Saves the Enrichment rule to the RTSM.
Save As
Displays the Save As Enrichment Rule wizard, enabling you to define a new name
and description for a query. This option can be used for creating a new Enrichment
rule based on an existing one.
Editing Pane
This area enables you to create and define Enrichment query nodes and relationships.
Important
information
l
When you select a folder in the Enrichment Rules pane, the editing pane is
empty.
l
When you select an Enrichment rule in the Enrichment Rules pane, the editing
pane displays the selected rule, which consists of TQL query nodes that are
defined in the TQL query and the relationships between them, and the
Enrichment query nodes and relationships that are created and added to the
rule.
l
The Enrichment Manager has two modes in which you can work: Enrichment
mode and Query mode.
The mode in which you are working determines the options that appear in the
shortcut menu. For details, see the editing pane description below.
l
You can calculate the number of instances that were created as a result of an
Enrichment rule and remove the instances created from an Enrichment rule
from the RTSM. For details, see "Additions Count" on page 172 and "Remove
Enrichment Results" on page 177.
Relevant
tasks
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
See also
For details on how to create a TQL query, see "Add Query Nodes and
Relationships to a TQL Query" on page 32.
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Indicates an added Enrichment query node or relationship.
Page 419 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Indicates a query node or relationship that has been deleted from the
RTSM.
Indicates an updated query node or relationship.
The Enrichment Manager has two modes in which you can work:
Enrichment mode and Query mode.
Working in:
Query and
Enrichment mode
l
Query mode enables you to define regular (non-Enrichment)
relationships and query nodes and add them to the TQL query you
defined.
l
Enrichment mode enables you to define Enrichment relationships
and query nodes and add them to the TQL query you defined.
<Main Menu>
For details, see "Main Menu" on page 168.
<Query Node>
A component from which TQL queries are built.
<Relationship>
The entity that defines the relationship between two query nodes.
<Shortcut menu>
options
For details, see "Shortcut Menu Options" on page 40.
<Toolbar>
For details, see "Toolbar Options" on page 171.
<Tooltips>
Hold the cursor over a query node or relationship to view its tooltip.
The tooltips contain the following information:
l
Element name. The name of the query node.
l
CI Type. The CIT of the query node as defined in the CI Type
Manager. For details, see "CI Type Manager" on page 371.
l
Definitions of the selected query nodes and relationships. The
attribute conditions, as described in "Query Node/Relationship
Properties Dialog Box" on page 76.
CI Type Selector
This area displays a hierarchical tree structure of the CI Types found in the RTSM.
Page 420 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
Important
The CI Type Selector is part of Enrichment Manager, Impact Analysis Manager,
information and Trigger TQL Editor.
To create or modify a TQL query, click and drag query nodes to the Editing pane
and define the relationship between them. Your changes are saved to the RTSM.
For details, see "Add Query Nodes and Relationships to a TQL Query" on page
32.
Note: The number of instances of each CIT in the RTSM is displayed to the right
of each CIT.
Relevant
tasks
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
User interface elements are described below (unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets):
UI Elements (A-Z) Description
Click Add CI Type to Map to move the selected CI type to the Editing
pane.
Click Refresh to refresh the CI type tree.
Click Search to search for the CI type entered.
Click Expand All to expand all subtrees within the CI type tree.
Click Collapse All to collapse the subtrees within the CI type tree.
<Search
window>
Enter the name or part of a name of a CI type for which to search.
Shortcut Menu Options
The CI Type Selector includes the following elements (listed alphabetically) available by rightclicking a CI Type:
Menu Item
Description
Add CI Type
to Map
Select to add the selected CI type to the Editing pane.
Go to CI
Type
Definition
Takes you directly to the selected CI type in CIT Manager.
Show CIT
Instances
Opens the CIT Instances window, which displays all instances of the selected
CIT. For details, see "Element Instances Dialog Box" on page 70.
Page 421 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
Advanced Pane
This area displays the properties, conditions, and cardinality for the selected query node and
relationship.
Important
The Advanced pane appears in the lower part of the window in the following
information managers and user interfaces: Modeling Studio, Impact Analysis Manager,
Enrichment Manager, the Input Query Editor and Trigger Query Editor in DFM.
A small green indicator
Relevant
tasks
appears next to the tabs that contain data.
l
"Define an Impact Rule – Workflow" on page 356
l
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
l
"Define a TQL Query" on page 30
l
"Create a Pattern View" on page 265
l
"Create a Template" on page 266
l
"Create a Perspective" on page 267
User interface elements are described below:
UI
Elements
(A-Z)
Description
If the window is not wide enough to display all the tabs, use the left and right
arrows to move to the required tab.
Click Show List to display a list of the available tabs for the current module. You
can select a tab from the list.
Attributes
Displays the attribute conditions defined for the query node or the relationship. For
details, see "Attribute Tab" on page 77.
Cardinality
Cardinality defines how many query nodes you expect to have at the other end of
a relationship. For example, in a relationship between a node and an IP Address, if
the cardinality is 1:3, the TQL query retrieves only those nodes that are connected
to between one and three IP Addresses. For details, see "Cardinality Tab" on
page 79.
Data
Sources
Displays the data sources set for the selected query node.
Page 422 of 446
Note: This tab appears only in the Modeling Studio.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
UI
Elements
(A-Z)
Description
Details
Displays the following information:
l
CI Type/Element Type. The CIT of the selected query node/relationship.
l
Element Name. The name of the query node or relationship. This appears only
in the Modeling Studio.
l
Show in query results. A green check indicates that the selected query
node/relationship is visible in the topology map. A red mark indicates that it is
not visible. In the Modeling Studio, this is indicated by the word Yes or No.
l
Include subtypes. A green check indicates that both the selected CI and its
children are displayed in the topology map. A red mark indicates that only the
selected CI appears. This item does not appear in the Modeling Studio.
Edit
Click Edit to open the relevant dialog box for the selected tab.
Element
Layout
Displays the attributes selection for the selected query node or relationship. It lists
the attributes selected to be included in the query results (when Specific
Attributes is selected as the attributes condition). It also lists the excluded
attributes and any selected qualifiers for attributes. For details, see "Element
Layout Tab" on page 84.
Note: This tab appears only in the Modeling Studio.
Element
Type
Displays the subtype conditions defined for the query node or relationship. For
details, see "Element Type Tab" on page 82.
Note: This tab appears only in the Modeling Studio.
Enrichment Displays the Enrichment rule defined for the selected query node or relationship. If
Rules
the Enrichment rule is used to update the attributes of a CI, click Edit to open the
Query Node/Relationship Definition dialog box and edit the rule if required. For
details, see "Query Node/Relationship Definition Dialog Box" on page 427.
Note: This tab appears only in Enrichment Manager.
Impacted
Query
Nodes
Indicates which query node is impacted by the changes that occur in the selected
trigger query node. If required, you can click Edit to open and modify the Impacted
Query Nodes dialog box. For details, see "Impacted Query Nodes Dialog Box" on
page 366.
Note: This tab appears only in Impact Analysis Manager.
Qualifiers
Displays the qualifier conditions defined for the query node or the relationship. For
details, see "Qualifier Tab" on page 86.
Note: This tab appears only in Enrichment Manager and Impact Analysis
Manager.
Selected
Identities
Page 423 of 446
Displays the element instances that are used to define what should be included in
the TQL query results. For details, see "Identity Tab" on page 88.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
New Enrichment Rule/Enrichment Rule Properties/Save
As Enrichment Rule Wizard
This wizard enables you to create or modify an Enrichment rule.
To access
l
To create a new Enrichment rule, right-click anywhere in the Enrichment Rules
pane and click New or click the New
Important
information
button.
l
To modify an existing Enrichment rule, right-click an Enrichment rule in the
Enrichment Rules pane and select Properties.
l
To create a new Enrichment rule based on an existing query, right-click an
Enrichment rule in the Enrichment Rules pane and select Save As.
l
When creating a new Enrichment rule, bear in mind that the application does
not allow you to make any changes in the TQL query that are necessary for the
rule. These changes include the following:
l
n
Deleting, from the Enrichment TQL query, the query nodes or relationships
connected to the Enrichment query node, causing a query node to become
unattached to any relationship.
n
You cannot change the cardinality definition to 0 (not required) of a query
node or relationship that is used in an Enrichment rule. For details on
relationship cardinality, see "Query Node/Relationship Properties Dialog
Box" on page 76.
An Enrichment TQL query that serves as the basis for Enrichment rules, is
subject to certain validation restrictions. For details, see "Troubleshooting and
Limitations" on page 96. If the TQL query is not valid, you cannot save it.
Relevant
tasks
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
Wizard
map
The "New Enrichment Rule/Enrichment Rule Properties/Save As Enrichment
Rule Wizard" contains:
"Rule General Attributes Page" > "Rule Base Query Page"
See also
"Topology Query Language" on page 17
Rule General Attributes Page
This wizard page enables you to enter a unique name and description for the Enrichment rule.
Page 424 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
Important
information
Wizard
map
l
An Enrichment TQL query that serves as the basis for Enrichment rules is
subject to certain validation restrictions. For details, see "Troubleshooting and
Limitations" on page 96. If the TQL query is not valid, you cannot save it.
l
For important information on the effects of making changes to the TQL query
after creating it, see "New Enrichment Rule/Enrichment Rule Properties/Save
As Enrichment Rule Wizard" on previous page.
l
By default, this wizard is set to display a Welcome page. You can choose not
to display this page by changing the user preferences. For details, see "User
Preferences Dialog Box" on page 94.
The "New Enrichment Rule/Enrichment Rule Properties/Save As Enrichment
Rule Wizard" contains:
"Rule General Attributes Page" > "Rule Base Query Page"
See also
"Topology Query Language" on page 17
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Rule
(Optional) Enter a description of the rule.
Description
Rule is
Active
(Optional) Select this option to activate the rule in the system as soon as it is
saved.
Default: Not selected.
Note:
Rule Name
l
If an active Enrichment rule is deactivated (by clearing the Rule is Active
check box), all changes that occur in the RTSM relating to the rule are deleted
from the system. When you deactivate an Enrichment rule, a red X appears
next to the Enrichment rule in the Enrichment Rules pane.
l
To reactivate the rule, right-click the rule in the Enrichment Rules pane and
select Properties. In the General Attributes page, select Rule is Active.
Enter a unique name for the Enrichment rule. The rule name cannot contain any of
the following characters: \ / : " < > | % ?. The final character cannot be a blank
space.
Note: If the rule name is either empty, contains a name used by another
Enrichment rule, or uses invalid characters, the Next and Finish buttons are
disabled.
Rule Base Query Page
This wizard page enables you to define the properties of the TQL query on which the Enrichment
rule is based.
Page 425 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
Important
information
Wizard
map
l
An Enrichment TQL query that serves as the basis for Enrichment rules, is
subject to certain validation restrictions. For details, "Troubleshooting and
Limitations" on page 96. If the TQL query is not valid, you cannot save it.
l
For important information on the effects of making changes to the TQL query
after creating it, see "New Enrichment Rule/Enrichment Rule Properties/Save
As Enrichment Rule Wizard" on page 424.
l
By default, this wizard is set to display a Completion page after clicking Next
in this page. You can choose not to display the Completion page by changing
the user preferences. For details, see "User Preferences Dialog Box" on page
94.
The "New Enrichment Rule/Enrichment Rule Properties/Save As Enrichment
Rule Wizard" contains:
"Rule General Attributes Page" > "Rule Base Query Page"
See also
"Topology Query Language" on page 17
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Base the
Enrichment rule
on a new query
Select this check box if you want to base the Enrichment rule on a new TQL
query. The TQL results are based on the attributes defined for the new TQL
query.
Base the
Enrichment rule
on an existing
query
Select this check box if you want to base the Enrichment rule on an existing
TQL query. Select the required Enrichment TQL query from the drop-down
list.
Base Query
Description
(Optional) Enter a description of the TQL query.
Base Query
Name
Enter a unique name for the Enrichment TQL query.
Base Query
Priority
Select a priority level for the new TQL query (Low, Medium, High, or
Express). This setting determines how often the query is rerun automatically
by the system to include updated information from the RTSM.
Save a new
query based on
the current
definition
Select to save a new TQL query based on your Enrichment rule definition.
Page 426 of 446
If you selected the Base the Enrichment rule on an existing TQL option,
select the Enrichment TQL query on which you want to base the rule.
Note: This field only appears in the Save As Enrichment Rule wizard.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
Query Node/Relationship Definition Dialog Box
This dialog box displays the attributes of the selected query node/relationship. The key attributes
and the required attributes of the selected query node appear in bold.
To access
Right-click a query node or relationship when in Enrichment mode (select
Enrichment from the Query/Enrichment drop-down at the top of the Enrichment
Manager page) and select Update Relationship/Query Node.
Important
Use an Enrichment rule to update the value of CI attributes in the RTSM, or to add
information data to attributes that currently do not have values. You can use this option, for
example, for simultaneously adding a note to all CI instances.
You must fill in the value of the key attributes and the required attributes of the
Enrichment query node. The method you use to define these values determines
the number of instances created.
If you enter a dynamic value, you can create numerous instances. For example,
entering the dynamic value of a host_key for the CIT Node or an IP address
attribute for the CIT IpAddress.
Relevant
tasks
"Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
Attributes Area
User interface elements are described below :
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
Name
The attribute name.
Type
The field type of the selected attribute.
Value
The value as defined in one of the following:
l
The Value box in the Set Attributes area.
l
The combination of the values in the By Attribute boxes in the
Set Attributes area.
l
The Value column if you selected Simple in the Type column
in the Query Node Definition - Advanced Attribute dialog box.
l
The combination of the values in the Value column and the
column to the right of the Value column if you selected By
Attribute in the Type column in the Query Node Definition Advanced Attribute dialog box.
Set Attributes Area
User interface elements are described below :
Page 427 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
(Appears only if you selected an attribute of the field type string.) Opens the
Query Node Definition - Advanced Attribute dialog box.
Define query node and relationship attributes of the type string using simple or
complex expressions. You can also create complex expressions using regular
expression format..
Advanced
(Appears only if you selected an attribute of the field type string.) Displays the
attribute value you defined in the Query Node Definition - Advanced Attribute
dialog box.
By
Attribute
Define an attribute using attributes from other query nodes in the TQL query.
l
In the box to the left, select the required query node.
l
In the box to the right, select the query node’s required attribute.
The attribute definition appears in the Value column in the Attributes area.
RegExp
Group
(Appears only when you select an attribute of the field type string.) Enter the
group number only if you are adding a regular expression using regular expression
syntax. This is the part of the regular expression pattern to focus on when creating
the attribute. A set of parentheses ( ) constitutes a group.
Regular
(Appears only when you select an attribute of the field type string.) Add a regular
Expression expression using regular expression syntax. Enter the regular expression pattern.
Value (in
the Set
Attributes
area)
Define a constant value. Enter the required value in the Value box or select a
value from the Value list.
Note: The value definition appears in the Value column in the Attributes area.
Query Node Definition - Advanced Attribute Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to define query node and relationship attributes of the type String using
simple or complex expressions. You can also create complex expressions using regular expression
format.
To
access
Select an attribute of the type string in the Query Node Definition dialog box. Select
Advanced and then click the Advanced button.
Relevant "Define an Enrichment Rule – Scenario" on page 412
tasks
User interface elements are described below :
Page 428 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 13: Enrichment Manager
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Define an attribute value using simple or complex expressions. Creates a new
entry in the Type column. Click the new entry and select either Simple or By
Attribute. For details, see the description for the Type column below.
Delete an attribute value.
Move a selected row up.
Move a selected row down.
Advanced
Value
(This list is only available if you select By Attribute in the Type column.) Click
the entry inside the box and select the required attribute.
Concatenate Use all the attribute values listed in this dialog box.
RegExp
Group
(This list is available only if you select By Attribute in the Type column.) Click
Regular
Expression
(This list is only available if you select By Attribute in the Type column.) Click
Type
Click the entry inside the Type column and select one of the following options:
inside the RegExp Group column, click the
button, and enter the group
number in the Value for RegExp Group dialog box that opens. This is the part of
the regular expression pattern to focus on when creating the attribute. A set of
parentheses ( ) constitutes a group.
inside the Regular Expression column, click the
button, and enter the
regular expression pattern in the Value for Regular Expression dialog box that
opens.
l
Simple. Define a constant value using a simple expression.
l
By Attribute. Define an attribute using attributes from other query nodes in
the TQL.
Default is: Simple
Use first
attribute
with value
Use the first attribute value listed in this dialog box that is not empty.
Value
l
If you select Simple in the Type column, click inside the Value column, click
the
box.
button, and enter the required value in the Value for Simple dialog
Note: If you define an attribute value using only one Simple expression, the
Value column cannot be empty.
l
Page 429 of 446
If you select By Attribute in the Type column, click inside the Value column
and select the required value from the list.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Part 3
RTSM Data Model
Page 430 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 14
RTSM Data Model Introduction
This chapter includes:
Universal Data Model (UDM) Overview
Page 431 of 446
432
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 14: RTSM Data Model Introduction
Universal Data Model (UDM) Overview
The Universal Data model (UDM), provides the information model that enables HP Software
products to integrate using a common language. The UDM provides the vocabulary in the form of
CI types and the relationships between them, and their attributes. This vocabulary and the artifacts
derived from it are used to enable integrations in an enterprise environment, to enable faster design
and deployment, and to facilitate ease of maintenance and integration evolution. The UDM is
applied to many management products and solutions, including BSM and its integrations.
You can generate the UCMDB CI Types and Relationships Information PDF, which provides
information on specific CI Types and Relationships in the UDM. For details, see "Export Selected
CITs to PDF Dialog Box" on page 407.
Page 432 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 15
Exporting the RTSM Data Model to a UML Tool
This chapter includes:
Export the Class Model
434
Export to UML Tool – Overview
435
Convert XML of Selected Part of Class Model
436
Export to UML Tool User Interface
437
Tool Plug-in Input
439
Note: Currently, Altova UModel versions 2008 and 2009 are supported.
Page 433 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 15: Exporting the RTSM Data Model to a UML Tool
Export the Class Model
This task describes how to use the Export Class Model to UML tool wizard.
This task includes the following steps:
1.
Prerequisites
Set up the tool by extracting the following zip file to any location:
<HP BSM root directory>:\odb\tools\ExportClassModel.zip
2.
Run the UML Tool
You use the Export Class Model to UML wizard to choose the CIT and its attributes to be
exported to the UML tool.
For details on working with the Export to UML wizard, see "Export Class Model to UML
Wizard" on page 437.
3.
View the Exported File in Altova
a. In Altova, select File > Import From XMI File.
b. Select the XMI file. The class model entry appears in the Model Tree pane.
c. Right-click the entry and select Show in new diagram > Content. Click OK.
Page 434 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 15: Exporting the RTSM Data Model to a UML Tool
Export to UML Tool – Overview
The Export to UML tool enables you to export selected sections of the RTSM class model to a
format compatible with UML tools, and to view the model as a UML diagram.
The input for the tool is the RTSM class model XML file retrieved by the JMX service
UCMDB:service=Class Model Services/
exportClassModelToXml().
Note: To access the JMX console, enter the following address in your browser:
http://<server_name>:21212/jmx-console, where <server_name> is the name of the
machine on which BSM is installed.
Page 435 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 15: Exporting the RTSM Data Model to a UML Tool
Convert XML of Selected Part of Class Model
This task describes how to use the custom plug-in to convert the XML of a selected part of the
class model to the UML tool format.
The plug-in can be either a Java class or an XSLT text file. If you use a Java class, it must
implement the ITransformToUML(ExportToUML.jar) interface; the transformToUML() method
receives an XML string as a parameter and returns a byte array that is written to the output file.
For details on the custom plug-in input, see "Tool Plug-in Input" on page 439.
This task includes the following steps:
l
"Activate the Plug-in Using a Java Class" below
l
"Activate the Plug-in Using an XSLT Text File" below
Activate the Plug-in Using a Java Class
Add the display name and fully-qualified class name to the config.xml file in the ExportToUML
directory, as follows:
<ConverterToUML>
<Name><display name></Name>
<Class><fully qualified class name></Class>
</ConverterToUML>
Continue with the procedure for exporting the class model. For details, see "Export the Class
Model" on page 434.
Activate the Plug-in Using an XSLT Text File
In this case, XSLT from the specified file is applied to the class model XML and is written to the
output file.
Add the display name and full path of the XSLT file to the config.xml file in the ExportToUML
directory, as follows:
<ConverterToUML>
<Name><display name></Name>
<XsltFile><Full_path_of_the_XSLT_file></XsltFile>
</ConverterToUML>
Continue with the procedure for exporting the class model. For details, see "Export the Class
Model" on page 434.
Page 436 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 15: Exporting the RTSM Data Model to a UML Tool
Export to UML Tool User Interface
This section includes:
l
"Export Class Model to UML Wizard" below
Export Class Model to UML Wizard
This wizard enables you to choose the CIT and its attributes to be exported to the UML tool.
To access
Browse to the location where you extracted the tool. Right-click
ExportClassModel.jar in the ExportClassModel directory. Select Open With >
Java 2 Platform SE binary.
Important
By default the tool opens the ClassModel.xml file in the ExportClassModel
information directory. You open other files through the File > Open Class Model File menu.
Relevant
tasks
"Export the Class Model" on page 434
Wizard
map
The Export Class Model to UML wizard contains:
See also
"Tool Plug-in Input" on page 439
"Export Class Model to UML Wizard" above > "Select Valid Links" below >
"Export Selected Items" on next page
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element (A-Z)
Description
File
Displays a list of XML files. Open the file that contains the class model.
Select Attributes
Pane
Select the attributes to be displayed in the UML tool.
Select CI Types
Pane
The attributes of the selected CIT are displayed in this pane. The attributes
are colored as follows:
l
Attributes inherited from the parent CIT are black.
l
Attributes specific to this CIT are dark blue.
The CITs displayed here are retrieved from the ClassModel.xml file.
Select the CIT and its sub nodes to be exported to the UML tool.
Use the buttons to select or clear all subindex.
Select Valid Links
This wizard page enables you to select links that can be used between two CITs.
Page 437 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 15: Exporting the RTSM Data Model to a UML Tool
Important
information
General information about the wizard is available in "Export Class Model to
UML Wizard" on previous page.
Wizard map
The Export Class Model to UML wizard contains:
"Select Valid Links" > "Export Selected Items"
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Click to remove the filter from the list of CITs.
Filter by
Enables you to filter the list of valid links. You can filter the list of CITs and you can
sort the list by CIT or relationship.
Export Selected Items
This wizard page enables you to export the selected CITs and their attributes to the UML tool.
Important
information
General information about the wizard is available in "Export Class Model to
UML Wizard" on previous page.
Wizard map
The Export Class Model to UML wizard contains:
"Select Valid Links" > "Export Selected Items"
User interface elements are described below:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Export
Description
Click to browse to the UML file, in XMI format, to which you want to add the
UCMDB CITs and their attributes.
If there are no valid links for a pair of CITs, a no valid links message is displayed
in the Select Valid Links page.
Page 438 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 15: Exporting the RTSM Data Model to a UML Tool
Tool Plug-in Input
The input for the plug-in is an XML string (selected classes/attributes/valid links) in the following
form:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="ISO-8859-1"?>
<Class-Model>
<Class class-name="hostresource" display-name="Host
Resource" visibility="public">
<Attribute name="isvirtual" display-name="Is Virtual"
visibility="public"/>
<Attribute name="city" display-name="City"
visibility="public"/>
</Class>
<Class class-name="host_node" display-name="Computer"
visibility="public">
<Derived-From class-name="host"/>
</Class>
<Class class-name="vax" display-name="VAX"
visibility="public">
<Attribute name="root_actualdeletionperiod" displayname="Actual Deletion Period" visibility="public"/>
<Attribute name="data_allow_auto_discovery" displayname="Allow CI Update" visibility="public"/>
<Derived-From class-name="host_node"/>
</Class>
<Class class-name="host" display-name="Host"
visibility="public">
<Attribute name="host_iscomplete" display-name="Host Is
Complete" visibility="public"/>
<Attribute name="host_isroute" display-name="Host Is
Route" visibility="public"/>
<Attribute name="host_hostname" display-name="Host
Name" visibility="public"/>
<Attribute name="host_os" display-name="Host Operating
System" visibility="public"/>
</Class>
<Class class-name="unix" display-name="Unix"
visibility="public">
<Derived-From class-name="host_node"/>
</Class>
<Valid-Link ID="host_member_host" display-name="Member"
visibility="public">
<End1 class-name="host"/>
<End2 class-name="host"/>
</Valid-Link>
<Valid-Link ID="host_container_f_hostresource" displayname="Container link" visibility="public">
Page 439 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 15: Exporting the RTSM Data Model to a UML Tool
<End1 class-name="host"/>
<End2 class-name="hostresource"/>
</Valid-Link>
</Class-Model>
Page 440 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Part 4
Reference Information
Page 441 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 16
Working with Tables
This chapter includes:
Columns User Interface
Page 442 of 446
443
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 16: Working with Tables
Columns User Interface
This section includes (in alphabetical order):
l
"Select Columns Dialog Box" below
l
"Sort Column Content Dialog Box" below
Select Columns Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to choose the information you are interested in displaying. You can hide
a column or display a hidden column.
Description
Click the Select Columns
a report.
button. This button appears above every table in
Important
The order of the columns in the list in the Visible Columns pane determines the
Information order of the columns displayed in the table. To change the order of table columns,
move them to the required position using the up and down arrow buttons or by
dragging a column to a new location.
The following elements are included:
UI Element
(A-Z)
Description
Displays a column. Moves the selected column from the Available Columns
pane to the Visible Columns pane.
Hides a selected column. Moves the selected column from the Visible Columns
pane to the Available Columns pane.
Displays all hidden columns. Moves all the columns from the Available
Columns pane to the Visible Columns pane.
Hides all columns. Moves all the columns from the Visible Columns pane to the
Available Columns pane.
Move a selected column up in the list in the Visible Columns pane.
Move a selected column down in the list in the Visible Columns pane.
Available
Columns
The columns in this pane do not appear in the table.
Visible
Columns
The columns in this pane are visible in the table.
Sort Column Content Dialog Box
This dialog box enables you to set or change the sort order for the entries displayed in a table.
Page 443 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 16: Working with Tables
Description Click the Sort Column Content button
.
Important
To sort a table by one column:
Information
Move the column name from the Available Columns to the Sorted Columns
list. Select the name and decide whether to sort in ascending (upward triangle) or
descending (downward triangle) order by clicking the relevant button.
To sort a table by more than one column:
Move the column names from the Available Columns to the Sorted Columns
list. For each column, decide whether to sort in ascending or descending order.
To change the order in which columns are sorted:
In the Sorted Columns list, select an entry, and click the Up or Down arrow to
change the order. (Entries higher in the list are sorted before entries lower in the
list.) A number is displayed in the table's column headers.
Note: Only columns that are displayed can be sorted. For details on how to define
which columns are displayed in the table and in which order, see "Select Columns
Dialog Box" on previous page.
The following elements are included:
UI
Element (A–Z)
Description
Moves the selected column from the Available Columns pane to the Sorted
Columns pane. You can double-click the selection to perform the same procedure.
Moves the selected column from the Sorted Columns pane to the Available
Columns pane.
Moves all the columns from the Available Columns pane to the Sorted Columns
pane.
Moves all the columns from the Sorted Columns pane to the Available Columns
pane.
Moves the selected column up or down in the list to increase or decrease its priority
in establishing the sort order.
Enables you to sort the column content in ascending or descending order.
In the Sorted Columns pane, select a column name and click the ascending or
descending button.
Available The columns whose content is not sorted.
Columns
Note: You can select multiple columns.
Sorted
Columns
Page 444 of 446
The columns whose content is sorted in either ascending or descending order.
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Chapter 17
Regular Expression Examples
This chapter includes:
Examples of Regular Expressions
Page 445 of 446
446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)
Modeling Guide
Chapter 17: Regular Expression Examples
Examples of Regular Expressions
l
l
Enter a regular expression to define an IP address (aa.yy.zz.mm):
To:
In the First Field Enter:
In the Second Field Enter:
Create label by aa
(.*)([.].*[.].*[.].*)
1
Create label by yy
(.*[.])(.*)([.].*[.].*)
2
Create label by zz
(.*[.].*[.])(.*)([.].*)
2
Create label by mm
(.*[.].*[.].*[.])(.*)
2
Enter a regular expression to create the label by the first or last letters of the selected attribute:
To:
In the First Field Enter:
In the Second Field Enter:
Create label by the first letter
(.)(.*)
1
Create label by the last letter
(.*)(.)
2
Create label by the first two letters
(..)(.*)
1
Create label by the last two letters
(.*)(..)
2
Page 446 of 446
HP Business Service Management (9.20)